smi manual - university of hong kongebook.lib.hku.hk/hkg/b35827427v2.pdf · 2006-08-31 · smi...

SMI Manualon

School Administration

Volume II(Annex)

Education DepartmentSeptember 1992

SMI Manual on School Administration

Annex

CONTENTS

Section 4 The Administration of the School (Operational)

Section 5 The School Curriculum

Section 6 General Finance and Accounts

Section i Stores, Furniture & Equipment, Repairs &Maintenance of School Buildings

Section 8 Personnel

Abbreviations

ASGC Aided Schools General Circular

GAC General Administration Circular

GSCC General Schools Curriculum Circular

GSMC General Schools Miscellaneous Circular

Section 4The Administration of the School

(Operational)

Annex Topic

(1) Criteria for Destruction or Retention in Schools orPreservation in the Public Records Office of Schools'Inactive or Closed Files and Closed Parts of Files

(2) ASGC No. 10/92 dated 19 February 1992Maximum Holding of Petty Cash

(3) Application for Permission to Conduct Business or TradingOperations in Aided Schools

(4) ASGC No. 43/83 dated 12 October 1983Trading Operations in Aided Schools

(5) GSMC No. 114/90 dated 26 September 1990Code of Practice relating to Sale of Textbooks, ExerciseBooks and School Uniforms and other School Accessories

GAC No. 4/92 dated 22 January 1992Fund-Raising Activities in Schools

(7) Flag Days - Conditions for Sale of Flags or Flowers

(8) Guidance Notes on the Classroom Cleanliness ParticipationScheme

(9) GAC No. 25/91 dated 4 September 1991Enforcement of Compulsory Education

Annex Topic

(10) GAC No. 24/87 dated 12 November 1987Procedures for Processing Discretionary Places

(11) GAC No. 19/91 dated 3 July 1991Invitation to Participate in the 1991/92 Junior SecondaryEducation Assessment System

(12) GAC No. 8/92 dated 29 April 1992Revised Procedure for Admission to Secondary 6

(13) GAC No. 17/92 dated 10 June 1992Entry of Alien Children to Schools in Hong Kong

(14) Policy on Orientation Day for Secondary One Students

(15) Pupil Record Card and Forms A, B, C & D

(16) List of Scholarships, Grant and Loan Schemes Available toStudents of Secondary 6 and Secondary 7

(17) GAC No. 20/92 dated 1 JulyExpulsion and Suspension of Pupils

(18) How to Help Pupils with Problems

(19) Suggested Duty List for Careers Masters/Mistresses and theirTeams

(20) List of Voluntary Agencies Providing Services and Supportto Schools in Counselling and Guidance

(21) Gang Activities

(22) GSMC No. 78/91 dated 4 September 1991Safety in School Laboratories

Annex Topic

(23) GSMC No. 66/91 dated 14 August 1991Organized Visits by School Children: Safety Precautions

(24) GSMC No. 112/90 dated 26 September 1990Supervision of Pupils Travelling in Licensed School LightBuses, School Buses and School Hire Cars

(25) GAC No. 9/92 dated 16 May 1992Tropical Cyclones, Heavy Persistent Rain and Thunderstorms

(26) GAC No. 35/91 dated 4 December 1991Employment (Miscellaneous Provision) Ordinance 1979 andthe Employment of Children Regulations 1979

(27) Application for Registration of a Pupils' Association

(28) GAC No. 20/91 dated 3 July 1991Government's Anti-Smoking Policy

(29) GSCC No. 31/92 dated 10 June 1992Safety Precautions in the Conduct of School Athletic Meets

(30) GSCC No. 24/92 dated 13 May 1992Safety Precautions in Conduct of School Swimming Galas

(31) GSMC No. 105/91 dated 9 October 1991Eye Care

Section 4 Annex (1)

Criteria for Destruction or Retention in Schoolsor Preservation in the Public Records Office of

Schools' Inactive or Closed Files and Closed Parts of Files

(a) Policy Files to be kept permanently in the school ifreference to them is often required;

(b) Policy Files to be transferred to the Public RecordsOffice for permanent preservation ifreference to them is not required or onvery, very, rare occasions only;

(c) Non-policy Files

(e.g. school buildings and sitehanding-over statements, saferegisters, loans, grants andscholarships, school medicalservice, burglary records, schoolcrossing patrol permit, school logbooks, staff meeting records,tuckshop committee meetingrecords, P.T.A. records, personnel

records, surprise inspection books,

school social worker's/student

guidance officer's records,JSEA/S?PA records, EREvalidation test records, publicexamination results, pupils'testimonials and certificates,master mark sheets, pupil recordfiles/cards, pupil admission

registers, class organisation andpupil statistics, remedial teaching

class tests and records, etc.)

to be kept permanently in the school;

Section 4

(d) Non-policy Files(e.g. records of interest clubs andextra-curricular activities, H.K.School Music and SpeechAssociation circulars, H.K.Schools Sports Associationcirculars, school calendars, schoolfunctions, school visits, flag dayrecords, teaching practice records,class registers, internalexamination papers, applicationsand papers concerning use ofschool accommodation byoutsiders, courses/seminarsattended by staff, job descriptions,miscellaneous correspondence,etc.)

NOTEThe above examples are not exhaustiveand school heads may recommend othersin their lists for destruction or pre-servation.

Annex (1) p. 2

to be destroyed after 5 years

Section 4 Annex (2)

EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

19 February 1992

AIDED SCHOOLS GENERAL CIRCULAR NO. 10/92

Maximum Holding of Petty Cash

In view of the high inflation rate over the past few years, the maximumlevel of petty cash that may be kept by an aided school to meet payments ofminor expenses have been revised with immediate effect as follows:

Type ofAided Schools

Primary

Secondary(including:special)

Special withBoarding* Section

No. ofOperating Classes

10 or less11 - 20over 20

20 or lessover 20

All cases

Maximum PettyCash Limit

$2,000$3,000$5,000 '

$5,000$7,000

$7,000

2. It should be noted that these are the maximum levels allowable butshould not be taken to mean that schools must indiscriminately maintain theircash holding at these levels. Supervisors should take into account their actualoperational requirements and their security arrangements in deciding their levelsof cash holding within the allowable maximum. In this connection, supervisorsare strongly advised to review their existing system of internal control andsecurity measures for the safe-custody of cash and to strengthen these aspectsto safeguard against loss of cash.

3. To protect schools against losses, supervisors may consider taking outinsurance on theft, burglary and cash-in-transit for non-government propertyand funds as advised in Aided Schools General Circular No. 44/91.

4. Aided Schools General Circulars, No. 25/83 and 26/ 83 are herebycancelled.

P. ML V. CARTERfor Director of Education

To : Supervisor/Heads of all AidedPrimary and Secondary Schools(including Special Schools)

Heads of Sections - for information

Section 4 Annex

Application for Permission to Conduct Businessor Trading Operations in Aided Schools

(School Name)

(School Address)

To the Director of Education,

The Management Committee has noted the contents of Aided SchoolsGeneral Circular No. /80 concerning trading operations in aided schools.

(a) * I wish to inform you that no trading operation is conducted on thepremises of the above school, and it is not intended to commenceany such operation.

(b) * I wish to apply for permission in writing for the operation of atrading operation on the premises of the above school.

* Delete whichever is not applicable.

2. This undertaking will be operated by : -

(a) the sponsoring body, namely :

(b) employees of the school (not employed under the terms of the Codeof Aid), namely :

(c) outside contractors, namely :

(d) persons other than (a), (b) & (c) above, namely :

3. Details of the undertaking will be :

(a) purposes (e.g. sale of food, drinks, books, stationery, uniform).

(b) rental per 'month/annum.

(c) utilities charges (such as water, gas, electricity) will be•paid/reimbursed by operator on the basis of * actual consumptionor at a fixed sum of per 'month/annum.

(d) the agreement with the operator will commence onand will be "reviewed/terminated on .

4. Proceeds arising from the undertaking (including rent and any otherpayments made by tenants in respect of their tenancy) will be placed in thefollowing account (name the account) :

Section 4 Annex (3) p.2

5. It is intended that any surplus arising from the undertaking willbe utilised for the following purposes (if other than the standard purposes ofthe above account) :

6. I wish to propose the following financial arrangement with thesponsoring body (if applicable) :

7. I confirm that the trading operations described aboe *are now beingundertaken on the school premises/*will start on .

* Delete whichever is not applicable.

Date Supervisor

Section 4 Annex (4)

Ref.: E.D. (RB) 14/86/81 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

12 October 1983


Trading Operations in Aided Schools

This circular is to provide detailed guidelines, a copy of which isattached, on the operation of servicing and trading activities conducted on theschool premises. Heads of Schools are strongly advised to comply with theguidelines and consider as soon as possible establishing a "School TuckshopCommittee', if they have not already done so, to oversee all trading activitiesin schools. It is worth noting that such committees would not only relieve theSchool Head of the heavy workload generated by trading activities but alsoprovide opportunities for members of the teaching staff to participate in thegeneral administration of the school.

2. It is the duty of the Head of the school to monitor and review thework of the School Tuckshop Committee regularly so as to ensure that thecommittee provides adequate supervision on trading activities in the interestsof the pupils. Where trading activities are centrally managed by the sponsoringbody, the function of the committee is to monitor such activities and provide,through the Heads of Schools, suggestions and feedback to the sponsoring bodyfor information and improvement.

TANG VANfor Director of Education

To: Heads of all Aided Schools, including Special Schoolsand E.S.F. Schools

Heads of all Sections -for information


Guidelines on the Operation of Servicing and Trading Activities in Aided Schools

A. School Tuckshops

1. General Principles

2. Supervision

3. Operation

4. Items for Sale

B. General Trading Activities


2. Exercise Books and Stationery

3. Textbooks, School Magazines and Publications

4. Uniforms, Physical Education Kits, Badges and Ties

5. Other Items


A. School Tuckshop

1. General Principle

1.1 All schools are encouraged to run their own tuckshops. Theoperation of tuckshops is regarded as providing a service to pupils andthe tuckshop in each school should be supervised by a School TuckshopCommittee.

2. Supervision

School Tuckshop Committee

2.1 Schools which run a tuckshop on the premises are advised toform a School Tuckshop Committee. The committee should be composedof the following members : -

(a) Chairman - a responsible senior member of the teachingstaff appointed by the Head of School.

(b) Committee Members - 2 to 3 other members of the staffappointed by the Head of theSchools; a representative from theParents and Teachers Association ofthe school, if there is one, shouldalso be invited to serve on theCommittee.

Duties of the School Tuckshop Committee

2.2 The School Tuckshop Committee should be responsible to theHead of school. It is the duty of the School Tuckshop Committee inevery school to supervise and monitor the operation of the tuckshop.To ensure that school tuckshops are efficiently operated in theinterests of the pupils, the Committee should -

(a) directly control the prices of items sold and ensure that itis consulted before prices are increased;

(b) review the items of food sold to pupils and check theirstandards;

(c) meet at the beginning of each academic year to ensure theprices proposed by the operator are reasonable;

(d) compare, at regular intervals, the prices of items sold at theschool tuckshop with the current market prices and ensureitems sold at school do not exceed the market prices;

(e) make sure that the price list for all items sold at a schooltuckshop is permanently displayed at a prominent place atthe tuckshop.

(f) hold regular committee meetings to review all matters relatedto tuckshop operations and keep a record of the resolutionsof the meetings (which both the Head of School and thetuckshop operator may be invited to attend, the latter toanswer queries if required);


(g) carry out surprise inspections of the tuckshcp to ensure thatthe resolutions made at the committee meetings are observed;

(h) consider any suggestions from the school on the operation ofthe tuckshop;

(i) decided on the items for sale in the school tuckshop andensure that they are clean and wholesome;

(j) decide on the operation hours.

3. Operation

Operating hours

3.1 The tuckshop should normally be open to pupils during recess,lunch-breaks, before and after school. In general, the school tuckshopshould be closed when classes are in session.

3.2 The operating hours are to be decided by the School TuckshopCommittee.

Electricity and Water Charges

3.3 A separate electricity meter must be installed by thetuckshop operator, who is responsible for the electricity charges. Any re-imbursement of electricity or water charges should be credited to theCapitation/Class Grant Account.

Items for Sale

4.1 In making a decision on the items for sale, the firstconsideration should be given to the hygienic conditions of items to besold.

(a) What to sell -

(i) The items for sale should be clean and "wholesome,wherever possible, items of food should be properlywrapped.

(ii) Recommended items are soft drinks, cakes, buns, rollsof bread etc.

(iii) A tuckshop operator who intends to sell ice-cream orfresh milk (other than approved brands of sterilisedmilk in sealed containers), should apply to the U.S.D.or the N.T.S.D. for a Frozen Confections Permit or aMilk Permit respectively.

(iv) Soft drinks machines dispensing bottles, cans orcartons can be installed at suitable places subject tothe approval of the School Tuckshop Committee.

(v) Pupils should be given freedom of choices for brandswhere practicable.

Section 4 Annex (4)

(b) What not to sell -

(i) Items which involve too much preparation and washing1

up afterwards e.g. noodles, porridge, etc.

(ii) Items which are unsuitable for children e.g. beer,alcoholic drinks, cigarettes, etc.

(iii) Items of cooked food which may easily be contaminatede.g. fish meat balls, rice rolls and rice dumplings, etc.

B. General Trading Activities


1.1 The following guidelines which serve as an easyreference for the School Head should be read in conjunction withthe Code of Practice issued by the Director of Education in respectof the purchasing of textbooks, exercise books, uniforms, stationery,equipment and other items by students.

(a) No Head or members of staff of any school shouldderive any advantage, financial or otherwise, from thepurchase by students either in the school premises orelsewhere of any item needed by students to pursuethe school curriculum.

(b) No purchase should be compulsory and parents shouldbe informed accordingly.

(c) An adequate description of the items should be givenso that parents/students can exercise their owndiscretion to purchase these items elsewhere.

(d) Items bearing special insignia for the exclusive use ofstudents in one particular school should be kept tothe minimum.

(e) School should ensure that the total cost of itemsneeded by students to pursue their course of study arekept as low as possible.

(f) Prices should be negotiated with suppliers annuallyand items should be sold at a minimum feasible price,preferably not more than 10% profit (rounded up tothe nearest 10 cents) of the cost price.

(g) All schools must keep proper books of accountsreflecting all sales and purchases. All account booksare subject to inspection by officers of the EducationDepartment.

(h) Where an arrangement is made with any supplier anda discount or a block sum of money is received, this

"must also be entered into the Subscriptions Account asan item of income.


(i) Offer of donations except desk copies should only beaccepted with the prior approval of the Director.

2. Exercise Books and Stationery

2.1 School Heads may arrange for exercise books and stationery(including accessories for art and craft) to be purchased in bulk andresold to pupils, to assist pupils to purchase such items at a reasonableprice.

2.2 Quotations from several suppliers should be called for atregular intervals, at least once in every three years, so as to compareprices, quality and reliability.

2.3 Pupils should not be compelled to purchase a package ofexercise books. Each type of exercise book should be made available forpurchase separately at reasonable times throughout the year.

2.4 Different types of exercise books and stationery recommendedshould be clearly described and prices indicated on a list issued toparents.

2.5 Schools which use exercise books printed with schools1 namesand/or crests should permit their pupils to use exercise books ofcomparable size, quality and layout which are on sale at stationery shopsprovided that prior approval of the Head has been obtained.

3. Textbooks, School Magazines and Publications

3.1 The Head of School may arrange for a book-seller to printthe textbook list of the school for distribution to students before the endof an academic year and to new pupils upon admission. However, pricesfor books in the draft booklist form several book-sellers should first becalled for and it is the duty of the Head to compare prices of booksquoted by various book-sellers.

3.2 All books should be fully described on the textbook listgiving details of title, authors, publishers, editions and prices.

3.3 Parents must be informed on the textbook list that they canpurchase their books wherever they wish.

3.4 No sale of books by book-sellers on school premises shouldby permitted unless authorized by the Head of School.

3.5 If the Head of School arranges with an individual book-sellerto sell textbooks at the school premises at a special discount, parentsshould be provided with a textbook list, notified of the availability of thebook-seller at the school compound on certain dates and the percentageof discount. However, parents' free choice of suppliers should also bestressed in the notification.

3.6 Heads of Schools may encourage pupils to purchase schoolmagazines and other publications. However, purchase by pupils should beentirely voluntary.

Section 4 Annex (4) p.?

4. Uniforms, Physical Education Kits, Badges and Ties

4.1 The Head of School may appoint a "nominated school tailor"to supply items at prices specified; pupils may call at the tailor or thelatter may visit the school to take orders. However, pupils should not becompelled to purchase school uniform and accessories from the school orthe school tailor.

4.2 Tenders should be called for from several suppliersperiodically, at least once in every three years.

4.3 Head of School may arrange for these items to be purchasedin bulk and resold to pupils, to assist pupils to purchase them at themost reasonable price.

4.4 Head of School should make it clear to pupils and theirparents that they are free to choose their own supplier by providing themwith details of the school uniform required.

4.5 Head of School should ensure that materials selected are ofa type and quality generally available to the public so that pupils andparents can make their own arrangements for the provision of uniforms.

5. Other Items

In all cases where the school is involved in the sale of goodsor services e.g. school bags, pullovers etc., there should be no compulsionplaced on pupils and the price should be kept to a minimum.

Section 4 Annex (5)

Ref. ED(RB) 168/74 Pt. 5 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

26 September 1990

GENERAL SCHOOLS MISCELLANEOUS CIRCULAR No, 114/90

Code of Practice relating to Sale of Textbooks,Exercise Books and School Uniforms

and Other School Accessories

Sales of Miscellaneous items, including"Tuck Shop" Iterns» in Schools

The purpose of this circular is to remind Heads of Schoolsof the importance of the Code of Practice, A copy of the Code ofPractice is attached.

Heads of Schools are asked to continue to give their fullcooperation, as they have done since the Code of Practice was firstissued in 1975, in ensuring that the provisions of this Code areimplemented* It is essential that in all matters concerning thesale of textbooks, exercise books, school uniforms and schoolaccessories, these procedures be observed in full, in order toavoid any causefor complaint*

S.T. KWANfor Director of Education

To: Heads of All Schools/Colleges/Institutefor necessary action

Heads of Sections -for information


CODE OF PRACTICE

This Code relates to the sale to students of textbooks, exercisebooks, uniforms, stationery, equipment and other items to pursue their courseof study in kindergarten, primary, secondary and other schools.

1* General Principles

1.1 No supervisor, manager, member of staff or other employee of anyschool maintained or aided by Government may derive any advantage, financialor otherwise, form the sale to students either on the school premises orelsewhere, of textbooks, exercise books, paper, equipment or other items neededby students to pursue the school curriculum or extra-curricular activitieswithout the written approval of the Director of Education.

1.2 All schools must keep proper books of account which must reflectall sales and purchases of textbooks, exercise books, uniforms, stationery andother school accessories as specified above. Where an arrangement is made witha bookseller or other supplier and a discount or a block sum of money isreceived this must also be entered into the school accounts as an item ofincome. Schools are required to record in an inventory, any advantages receivedfrom suppliers in the form of goods or items of equipment.

1.3 Where schools are involved either directly or indirectly in the saleof items to students they should observe the following points:

(a) No purchase should be compulsory and parentsshould be informed accordingly;

(b) An adequate description of the items should begiven so that parents and students can exercisetheir right to purchase these items elsewhere.If items are made up in packages, each itemshould be made available for sale separatelywith individual prices clearly shown;

Cc) Items bearing special insignia for the exclusiveuse of students in one particular school shouldbe kept to a minimum;

(d) Each item should be sold at the minimumfeasible price.

1.4 Schools should ensure that, subject to sound educational practice,the total cost of books, exercise books, paper and uniforms and schoolaccessories are kept as low as possible.

2. Textbooks

2.1 Heads of schools should issue lists of all books, including textbooksreference books and workbooks, to existing students before the end of any termwhen a change is proposed, and to new students or their parents whenadmissions are agreed.


2.2 All books should be fully described on the list with title, edition,author, publisher, and price. On the school book lists, which should show dateof compilation, parents should be informed that they can purchase their bookswhere they with.

2.3 Where the booklist is printed by a bookseller for the school, headsof schools are responsible for ensuring that books are described correctly, asdetailed above at paragraph 2.2.

2.4 Heads of schools should ensure that any sale of books by a book-seller's representative on school premises should be authorized by the Head ofthe school. Such purchases by students should be entirely voluntary.

3. Exercise Books

3.1 Different types of exercise books recommended for use should beclearly described, and prices indicated on a list issued by the school to studentsor parents.

3.2 Students should not be compelled to purchase a package of exercisebooks. Each type of exercise book should be made available for purchaseseparately at reasonable times throughout the year.

3.3 Schools which use exercise books printed with the schools1 namesand/or crests should permit their students to use exercise books of comparablesize, quality and layout which are on sale at stationers if they are cheaper.

4. School Uniforms

Schools should not compel students to purchase their uniforms fromthe school tailor, and should ensure that materials selected for the uniforms areof a type, quality and colour generally available to the public. The design andmeasurements of the uniform and specimens of the materials to be used shouldbe made available for the inspection of students/parents who wish to make theirown arrangements for the provision of uniforms. Wherever possible, schoolbadges should be available for purchase by parents from a source other than theschool tailor.k Where schools provide sports clothes, badges and ties, pricesshould be kept as low as possible.

5. Other Items

Tt should be a point of principle that in all cases where the schoolis involved in the sale of goods or services either by teachers or students, e.g.school bags, there should be no compulsion placed on students. Items ofstationery and school accessories should so far as possible be of standard typeand readily available outside the school, and their prices kept as low aspossible. Schools using a handbook for a variety of purposes such as studentidentification and the provision for statement of the school regulations calendarand report, should keep the price to a minimum.

ED(RB)168/74 Pt. 5

Section 4 Annex (6)

Ref: ED(GR) 2505/52 IV EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

22 January 1992

GENERAL ADMINISTRATION CIRCULAR NO. 4/92

Fund-Raising' Activities in Schools

Heads of Schools are reminded that the only fund-raising activitiespermitted in schools are : -

(a) the annual fund-raising campaigns of the Anti-Tuberculosis andThoracic Diseases Association and the Community Chest;

(b) collections organized for school or charitable purposes specificallyapproved by the Director of Education.

2. Pupils may assist in fund-raising efforts for outside charitableorganizations, but no collection or subscriptions, or sale of flags or tickets, willbe allowed in the school without prior approval from the Director of Education.

3. Approval from various government departments must be obtainedbefore any 'public entertainment can be held within the school premises inconnection with approved fund-raising campaigns. Public entertainment includesconcerts, bazaars, stage plays, film shows, stage performances or other musical,dramatic or theatrical entertainment to which the general public are admittedwith or without payment for admission. The approvals which must be sought areas follows :

(a) a permit to advertise, present or carry on such publicentertainment from the Commissioner for Television andEntertainment Licensing. Following the enactment and thecommencement of the Film Censorship Ordinance, a certificate forExhibition of films is required under Section 15 of the FilmCensorship Ordinance form the Commissioner of Television andEntertainment Licensing;

(b) a licence to keep or use any place of public entertainment from thelicensing authority (Urban Council for Urban Council areas and theRegional Council for Regional Council areas);

(c) licences or permits from the Commissioner of Police for activitieswhich include the selling of liquor, the use of starting pistols orshooting stalls where air rifles are used.

It should be noted that applications for permits or licences must be submittedto the authorities concerned at least 18 days before the commencement of thefunctions, and m the case of public entertainment or stage performance FireServices requirement must be complied with.


4. If it is desired to advertise the above activities publicly by wayof bills or posters, your attention is drawn to Section 104A of the Public Healtharid Municipal Services Ordinance, Cap. 132, which is reproduced below forreference : -

"Section 104A (1) No bill or poster shall be displayed or affixed -

(a) on any private land, except with thewritten permission of the owner oroccupier thereof;

(b) on any Crown land, except with thewritten permission of the Authority.

(2) A person displaying: or affixing a bill or posterin contravention of subsection (1) commits anoffence."

5. The following" standing: requirements must be fully complied with : -

(A) Regulation 66 of Education Regulations, reproduced below:

"(1) No person shall in any school premises -

(a) appeal to any pupils of a school forsubscriptions; or

(b) make any collection among any pupils of aschool, without the permission in writing of theDirector.

(2) No manager or teacher of a school shall in any waywhatsoever -

(a) appeal to any pupils of a school forsubscriptions or permit any appeal to be madeto or among any pupils of a school forsubscriptions, or

(b) make any collection among any pupils of aschool or permit any collection to made by oramong any pupils of a school,

without the permission in writing of the Director."

(B) Fund-raising activities involving collection of money inpublic places are prohibited unless covered by a PublicSubscription Permit issued by the Director of Social Welfare.

(C) Walkathons which are not races must be covered by a PublicProcession Licence issued by the Commissioner of Police underSection 13 of the Public Order Ordinance, Cap. 245. Racesrequire a Road Event Permit issued under the Road TrafficOrdinance, Cap. 374; these Permits should be sought from thePolice Regional Commander (Attn. : Senior Staff OfficerTraffic) in whose Region the race will occur. If a walkathonor race involves any raising of funds in public, a Permit asdescribed in paragraph (B) above must be obtained as well.

Section 4 Annex (6) p.3- 3 -

(D) Prenumbered receipts/tickets should be used as far aspossible for collection of funds. A financial statement ofFund Raising- Activity (sample attached at Appendix) must besubmitted to the District Education Officer concerned forexamination within two months after completion os eachfund-raising activity.

(E) When collections are organized for approved school purposesfunds so collected, as well as all expenditure, must beproperly reflected in the school's accounts. In respect offunds collected for approved charitable purposes, officialreceipts should be obtained from the charitable organizationsconcerned and retained by the school.

6. Heads of schools are reminded that all fund-raising activities mustbe on an entirely free and voluntary basis, and that in communications toparents there must be no suggestion that a pupil's or an applicant's standingis in any way related to the contributions the parents might make, nor shouldany particular amount be suggested. Under no circumstances should there beany compulsion on pupils to make donations.

7. This circular supersedes the General Administration Circular No.38/90 dated 12 December 1990.

LI YUET TINGDirector of Education

To: Heads of All Schools/Colleges - for necessary action


Section 4 Annex (6) p 4Appendix

Sample of a Standard Income and Expenditure Account

Name of School -____

Fund Raising: Activity : (e.g. Fund Raising Concert 19xx)

Income and Expenditure Account

Income (Schedule 1)

Donations $ XXXX

Sales of tickets $ XXXX

Less : Expenditure (Schedule 2)

Surphis/Deficit

Represented by :

Fixed Deposit with XXX Bank

Savings Account with XXX Bank

Fund Raising Activity Current Account No. XXX

Amount donated to

(Name of charitable organization (s) )

and supported with copies of receipt (s)

$ XXXX

$ XXXX

$ XXXX

$ XXXX

$ XXXX

$ XXXX

$ XXXX

$ XXXX

Prepared by Date

Name:Position:

Checked by

CertifiedCorrect bySupervisor

Date

Name:Position:

Date

Name

Section 4 Annex (6) p.5Schedule 1

Fund Raising Concert 19xxIncomeDonations from $ $e.g. Sponsoring* body XXX

V. I. P.s XXX

Alumnae and friends XXX

Secondary school teaching staff XXX

Secondary school non-teaching staff XXX

Primary school teaching staff XXX

Primary school non-teaching staff XXX

Kindergarten teaching staff XXX

Kindergarten non-teaching staff XXX

Secondary school parents XXX

Others XXX XXX

Sales of Tickets*Alumnae $

No. of tickets sold

e.g. @ $10 each : XXX

@ $20 each : XXX XXX

Teaching Staff

No, of tickets sold

e.g. @ $10 each : XXX\


Students

No. of ticket sold

e.g. @ $10 each : XXX


Others XXX

(Please specify in Schedule 3Separately)

Total Receipts : XXX

{ « All receipts for donations and tickets should be serial numbered and aseparate record of the receipts issued and tickets sold, with the serialnumbers indicated, should be kept).

Section 4

Fund Raising Concert 19xx

Expenditure *

Annex (6) p.6

Schedule 2

e.g. Rent for Hall, Theatre etc.

Sound system & equipment

Programme -printing

Ticket-printing:

Poster-printing*

Receipts-printing

Transportation

Music

Refreshment

Postage and stationery

Miscellaneous

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

(* All invoices and receipts should be kept).

FRA(2)/gac

Section 4 Annex (7)

FLAG DAYS - CONDITIONS FOR SALE OF FLAGS OR FLOWERS

1. No children under 14 years of age are to be permitted to sell flagsor flowers.

2. Flags or flowers are not to be sold to persons in vehicle on thepublic highways.

3. Not more than two flag or flower sellers are to be permitted tooperate together.

4. Presale of flags or flowers is strictly prohibited.

5. No flag or flower selling is to be permitted at the approaches tothe ferry piers and mass transit stations or any area within fivemetres of the exits or entrances or ferry wharves and mass transitstations.

6. No flag or flower selling is to be permitted at the Star FerrySubway and any area within five metres of its exits or entrances.

7. Flag or flower sellers are not to cause annoyance or obstruction.

Section 4 A^nex (8)

Guidance Notes onthe Classroom Cleanliness Participation Scheme

Purpose of guidance notes

1. These notes serve to provide schools with some guiding principles onthe implementation of the Classroom Cleanliness Participation Scheme (CCPS).As school facilities and school environments may differ, school heads vill needto use their discretion when applying these guiding principles in the operationof the Scheme within their own schools. In general, pupils should not be askedto perform tasks other than those specified in paragraph 3 below. Theseguidance notes do not of course preclude individual initiatives by heads inrespect of the operation of the Scheme within their schools.

Aims of the CCPS

2. The CCPS aims to promote pupils' civic awareness and to instil a senseof caring for the environment through the performance of simple cleaning dutiesin their own schools. It is believed the CCPS will help pupils develop agreater community spirit and stronger sense of belonging to the school. In nocircumstances should classroom cleaning activities be used as a form ofpunishment for misbehaviour.

Tasks to be performed by pupils

3. Pupils should be allowed to participate in the following tasks in theclassroom :-

(a) cleaning desks and chairsf the floor and the chalkboard;

(b) collecting and disposing of rubbish and litter;

(c) locking and unlocking doors and windows; and

(d) turning on and off lighting and ventilation facilities.

Pupils to be involved

4. Both primary and secondary pupils can be involved and it is considereddesirable for every pupil to be given the opportunity to participate unlessthere are compelling reasons for exempting individual pupils. Heads of:schoolsshould exercise their discretion in deciding which pupils, if any, should notparticipate in the Scheme for health or other reasons. With regard tohandicapped pupils, it is recommended that the following categories of pupilsbe exempted :

(a) the blind or the partially sighted;

(b) the physically handicapped; and

(c) the mentally handicapped.

Section 4 - 2 - Annex (8) P.2

5. Heads of primary schools and special schools may have to decide on theextent of pupils' involvement. Pupils at lower levels in primary schools andin preparatory classes in special schools may be asked to perform very simplecleaning tasks only, while pupils of upper primary classes can be asked to helpthe younger pupils with some of the tasks, such as cleaning the classroomfloor^ disposing of litter from the classroom, and closing the windows at theend of the school day. Pupils of Primary 1 and pupils in preparatory classesin special schools can also be exempted from such duties as locking and.unlocking doors and windows, and turning on and off lighting and ventilationfacilities in the classroom.

Mode of operation

6, There is no single mode of operation which will be suited to thecircumstances of every school. School heads are requested to devise the modewhich best suits their particular situation. In devising the mode ofimplementation, school heads may wish to consider the following :

(a) If every pupil participates in the daily cleaning work, the time spentby each pupil would be minimal* This cleaning can take place atwhatever time of the school day, regarded as the most appropriate.Schools can also consider adjusting their timetables so as to allowtime for cleaning activities to be conducted before school dismissal*For instance, it may be necessary for the AM session of a primaryschool to spend the last 5-10 minutes before dismissal for the pupilsto-clean up the classroom;

(b) Schools may choose to organise pupils into groups to take turns incleaning work. For example, a class of ;40 can be divided into five orsix groups, with each group being responsible for cleaning theclassroom once every week. Naturally if this mode of operation isadopted, more time will be required for cleaning work every day andsince the whole class is not involved, cleaning work may have to becarried out during lunch hour or after dismissal. This arrangementhas the advantage of not requiring every pupil to stay behind everyday. However, for schools offering a school bus service thisarrangement may not be practicable;

(c) While daily cleaning activities will keep the classroom reasonablyclean, there is no reason why schools cannot leave more thoroughcleaning work for a special cleaning day, in which the pupils aremobilised to spend more time on cleaning, such as mopping or scrubbingthe classroom floor and wiping desks and chairs with a wet cloth. Forexample, a "Clean-Our-School11 Day can be arranged either regularly ona fortnightly, monthly or quarterly basis, or 9n certain occasions,such as the first school day after the long holidays or after theschool examinations towards the end of term;

/3 ....


(d) Secondary schools operating floating classes may consider a differentapproach. Cleaning can be done either by assigning the duty to thelast class-user or by arranging for the classes sharing the sameclassroom as a learning base to clean the classroom in turn. Theformer is more convenient in practice but may not be considered fairby pupils. The latter is fair to all classes but may be rathercomplicated to operate and hence requires careful planning beforeoperation. It is essential that pupils develop a strong sense ofcommitment and responsibility for the Scheme to operate successfully.

Teachers' involvement

7. No matter which mode is ultimately adopted, it is crucial that allteachers perceive the value of the Scheme and are involved in one way oranother in its planning, organisation and implementation. It may be useful toappoint one or more teachers to co-ordinate and oversee the implementation ofthe Scheme.

8. Prior to implementation, teachers1 involvement in the planning andorganisation work is pivotal* A well-thought-out operational plan, which fromthe outset takes account of the anticipated practical difficulties, may save alot of trouble later. Teachers will have to decide on the mode of operation tobe adopted and how their pupils can best be organised* Teachers will also needto identify the most effective and efficient way to get the message across toboth pupils and parents*

9. Primary school teachers will need to supervise pupils' cleaningactivities while -supervision by teachers in secondary schools may be reducedonce pupils are clear about their responsibilities and can organise anddiscipline themselves. Although daily cleaning activities normally take about10 minutes or so, a teacher's presence should help to foster team spirit andboost morale. It is estimated that several minutes a day of a teacher's timewill be all that is required to make the Scheme a success.

Safety precautions

10. In considering the types of cleaning task to be performed, there is noreason tq believe that participation in the Scheme will result in pupilinjury. The cleaning activities are as safe as other normal school activitiessuch as PE lessons or practical lessons in the laboratories. Nevertheless, thesafety of pupils must be the paramount concern and schools must ensure that allsafety precautions are taken*

11. It is advisable for pupils of primary schools to be supervised byteachers when engaged in cleaning work, even though the tasks are simple andthe time involved is relatively short. If water is needed for cleaning, it isessential that only senior pupils should be asked to do the job and pupilsshould be cautioned against water-spilling and the dangers of floors beingslippery. Furthermore, junior pupils should not be asked to lock or unlockunguarded windows or to turn on or off lighting and ventilation facilities.

12. In secondary schools, however, it may only be necessary for teachersto supervise their pupils during the first two or three months but once pupilshave organised themselves and are familiar with the daily routine the amount ofsupervision can be reduced. A set of safety rules should be drawn up and madeavailable to pupils, who should be asked to observe them very closely.

/4 ....

Section 4 A*1*16* <8> P 4

13. For the reference of teachers and pupils, some safety precautions forclassroom cleaning activities are set out in the Appendix to the notes.

Insurance

14. Like any organised school activitiesr classroom-cleaning activitieswhich aim at developing pupils1 civic awareness are covered under the existingBlock Insurance Policy for aided schools. For pupils in government schools,the existing arrangements for claims for injuries sustained during the conductof organised school activities are applicable. Other schools should ensurethat appropriate insurance cover is provided.

Parents' and pupils' support

15. The success of the Scheme depends to a large extent on the commitmentof teachers and pupils and on parental support. To facilitate smoothimplementation, it will be necessary to brief pupils and parents thoroughly onthe background to and operation of the Scheme at the beginning of the schoolyear to avoid false perceptions and resistance arising therefrom.

Education DepartmentJuly 1992

Appendix


Appendix

Cleanliness Participation SchemeSafety Precautions

Preamble

The following safety precautions are prepared for the generalreference of schools. They are not exhaustive nor are they universallyapplicable to all types of schools and to all levels of pupils. Schools are atliberty to add to them in the light of their circumstances or to select fromamongst them those that they deem applicable. It is imperative however toimpress on pupils the importance of preventing the occurrence of accidents.

General Safety Principles

1. Before pupils (particularly pupils in lower primary and special schools)actually participate in any cleaning activity, they should be told or shownhow the task should be done and the standard of work expected of them*

2* Pupils* should be given ample opportunities to practise each step thoroughlyunder supervision before they are allowed to work independently.

3* Pupils should be required to clean their hands properly after cleaning workor disposal of litter. They should not touch their eyesr noses, mouths andears while performing cleaning duties.

4. The school first aid box should be well equipped and readily accessible.Pupils should be told to report immediately to their teachers any breakagesor accidents. If an accident should occur, the school should respondpromptly and notify the parents of an injured pupil immediately. Pupilsshould be cautioned not to touch any wounds with bare hands or have directcontact with the blood.

5. If teachers are supervising pupils at work, they should station themselvesin a position where they can see the whole class or the group of pupils allthe time.

6. Pupils should be cautioned not to play in the corridor or the classroomwhile cleaning is in progress.

Section 4 A™16* <8> P 6

Appendix

- 2 -

Specific Safety Precautions

(A) Precautions to be taken when cleaning desks, chairs, the floor and thechalkboard in the classroom

1. If water is needed for cleaning, it is essential that only seniorpupils are involved in fetching it. They need to be cautionedagainst :

(a) water spillage;

(b) the danger of wet floors being slippery;

(c) the proper way of lifting heavy objects and buckets of water; and

.(d) carrying full buckets,

2. Under normal circumstances cleaning agents are not necessary,particularly for daily cleaning work. But when cleaning agents areused, pupils should wear gloves to protect their hands;

3. Pupils should be cautioned against rough and uneven edges of chairs,desks and the chalkboard;

4. Pupils should be cautioned against uneven floors;

5. Pupils should be warned not to play with cleaning equipment; and

6. Under no circumstances should pupils be allowed to stack up and standon any furniture/objects in order to clean the chalkboard. Cleaningof the'Chalkboard should be assigned to senior or taller pupils*

®) Precautions to be taken when collecting and disposing of rubbish from theclassroom

1* Sharp objects e.g. pinsr staples, nails and pencil shavings should bewrapped up properly before disposal;

2. Pupils must be cautioned about the danger of touching sharp discardedobjects when disposing of refuse; and

3. For hygienic purposes, the class dustbin should be lined with disposalbags.

/3 .....


Appendix

(C) Precautions to be taken wher> locking and unlocking doors and vlndows andturning on and off lighting1 and ventilation facilities in the classrooms

1. Under no circumstances should pupils be allowed to stand on objectswhen locking or unlocking windows. Only pupils of appropriate heightshould be given such tasks;

2. The proper positioning of hands, fingers and feet must be clearlydemonstrated to pupils to avoid possible minor injuries to fingers andtoes when closing and opening windows or doors;

3. All hinges and locks of doors and windows should be properlylubricated and maintained by the school authorities. Cut fingers maybe infected if brought into contact with rusting metals;

4. Pupils should be warned not to handle electric switches unless theirhands are dry; and

5. Pupils should be cautioned against inserting their fingersr pencils orany objects into electric switches*

Section 4 Aimex

Ref- ED 31/4446/79 III EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

4 September 1991

GENERAL ADMINISTRATION CIRCULAR NO. 25/91ENFORCEMENT OF COMPULSORY EDUCATION

The Education Ordinance empowers the Director of Education toenforce attendance at school of children aged 6 to 15 who have not completedSecondary 3. The Education (Amendment) Bill 1990 has revised some of theclauses in the Education Ordinance in respect of the power of the Director ofEducation to order attendance and enforce attendance order. A revised versionon Section 74 and 78 of the Education Ordinance (Laws of Hong Kong, Chapter279) is annexed in Appendix I of this circular for reference. This circularoutlines the administrative procedures and actions which schools should take inthe enforcement of compulsory education.

IDENTIFICATION AND REPORTING OF DROPOUTS

2. It is of prime importance for Heads of Schools to identify and reportdropouts at an early stage so as to facilitate prompt investigation into dropoutcases with a view to bringing them back to school at the earliest opportunity.Heads of schools are requested to follow the procedures outlined below;

(a) Absent for 1 or 2 days

If a pupil is absent from school for 1 or 2 days insuccession without any apparent reason, the Head shouldcontact the pupilfs parent/guardian by telephone and/orarrange a home-visit to ask the reason for the pupil'sabsence.

(b) * Absent for 7 days

If a pupil is absent from school for 7 days and is suspectedto be a dropout, including those being, withheld by parentsfrom attending school, those with family problems, persistentabsence or truancy, behavioural problems, reluctance orinability to continue schooling, the Head of School shouldreport the case urgently through the Early NotificationSystem "ENS" by phoning direct to the Non-attendance CasesTeam of the Student Guidance Section on 8810048(information required is at paragraph 3 below) and follow-upthe phone call by sending immediately Form As of suspecteddropouts. These Form As should be marked "URGENT" andsent to the Education Records and Junior SecondaryEducation Assessment Section (ER & JSEA Section) within 14days since the pupils1 absence. A copy of Form A isattached for reference.


(c) Cases not reported through the "Early Notification System"

Cases of school transfer and emigration need not be reportedthrough the "ENS". For such cases, Heads should submitForm As to the ER & JSEA Section within 14 days since theirabsence.

3. To ensure prompt investigation into dropout cases and provision ofappropriate support services, the following information is required when schoolsreport dropouts under the "ENS" through the telephone : -

(i) Name of school

(ii) Name / class / sex / date of birth of pupil

(iii) Date of last attendance

(iv) Reasons for absence

(v) Parent's contact address and telephone

4. If a reported case is also receiving Student Guidance Service /School Social Work Service, the Student Guidance Officer / School Social Workershould also be informed.

REPORTING OF NEW INTAKES

5. Heads of Schools are also requested to report particulars of everynewly admitted pupil transferred from another school by filling in Form B whichshould be completed and returned to ER & JSEA Section within 10 days aftereach admission. A copy of Form B is attached for reference.

6. Pupils allocated to a school through the Secondary School PlacesAllocation (SSPA) or Primary One Admission (POA) need not be reported unlesschanges occur after the confirmed lists of such students have been forwardedto SSPA or' POA.

ASSISTING DROPOUTS TO RESUME SCHOOLING

7. Early reporting of dropouts and new intakes would speed up theidentification of dropouts through the matching* of Form As and Form Bs by thecomputer based Pupil Record System administered by the ER & JSEA Section.Heads are also requested to observe the "ENS" for reporting- immediately genuinedropouts.

8. Prompt reporting is of crucial importance in the handling of dropoutcases. The earlier the intervention, the greater is the likelihood of a dropoutreturning to his original school or being placed in another. The problemsarising from any delay in reporting dropout cases can be potentially veryserious and such children may come under the influence of undesirable elementsor become involved in unlawful activities. Heads are therefore urged to adherestrictly to the reporting procedures outlined in this circular. Heads are alsorequested to make full use of the existing Student Guidance Service, the School


Social Work Service and services provided by the Special Education Section ofthe Education Department to give support to pupils to overcome difficultieswhich prevent them from attending schools. Dropouts who are willing to resumeschool should be allowed to attend class immediately. The practice of delayingthe resumption of schooling until the beginning of another school term shouldbe avoided.

9. If schools have any queries on identification and reporting ofdropouts through "ENS" and on matters relating to the enforcement of compulsoryeducation, please contact the NON-ATTENDANCE CASES TEAM of the StudentGuidance Section on 8392577. Heads of Schools are also requested to refer toGUIDELINES FOR SCHOOLS ON ADMINISTRATION RELATED TO THE PUPIL RECORDSYSTEM and Heads of Special Schools are requested to refer to GUIDELINES FORSCHOOLS ON ADMINISTRATION RELATED TO THE PUPIL RECORD SYSTEM (SPECIALSCHOOLS) in the reporting of dropouts and new intakes. These Guidelines willbe distributed to schools by ER & JSEA Section in September 1991. On mattersrelating to submission of Forms A and B, please contact ER & JSEA Section on8919099.

10. This circular supersedes the General Administration Circular No.27/90 dated 19 September 1990. A Chinese version of the circular will follow.

T.S. Lamfor Director of Education

To: Heads of * all Primary and Secondary Schools including PrevocationalSchools and Special Schools except ESF Schools for necessary action

Heads of Sections / Colleges - for information


Appendix I

Extracted from

LAWS OF HONG KONG Chapter 279 Education OrdinancePart VII Power of Director to Order Attendance At

A Primary or Secondary School Section 74 -78

74. (1) Where it appears to the Director that a child is notattending primary school or secondary school without anyreasonable excuse, the Director may, after making suchinquiries as he considers necessary, serve upon a parent ofthe child an attendance order in the prescribed formrequiring him to cause the child to attend regularly as apupil the primary school or secondary school named in theattendance order.

(2A) The Director may at any time, by notice inwriting served upon the management committee of a primaryschool or secondary school named in an attendance order,require the committee to admit to that school as a pupil thechild to whom the attendance order relates.

(2B) No person shall, without the permission in writingof the Director, expel from a primary school or secondaryschool named in an attendance order the child to whom theattendance order relates and who has been admitted to thatschool as a pupil in accordance with that order.

78. Any parent who without reasonable excuse fails tocomply with an attendance order (as the same may be variedform time to time) shall be guilty of an offence and shall beliable on conviction to a fine of $5000 and to imprisonmentfor 3 months:

Provided that -(a) if an Application for a review of an attendance order ismade, no offence shall be committed until after the secretaryof the board has notified that parent under section 77(5) ofthe decision on the review;

(b) if an application for a review of any variation of anattendance order is made, no offence shall be committed,byreason of a failure to comply with the variation, until afterthe secretary of the board has notified the parent undersection 77(5) of the decision on the review.

Power ofDirector toorderattendanceprimary orsecondaryschool

at

Enforcement oforder

Section 4 Annex (10)


Ref. : (19) in ED(SSPA) ALL/13 19 November 1987

General Administration Circular No. 24/87

Procedures for Processing Discretionary Places

Paragraph 8 to 11 of General Administration Circular No. 4/87 on"Modifications of the SSPA System" dated 25 February 1987 described proceduresto be followed by secondary schools in filling 5% of their Secondary 1discretionary places (or 10% for some schools) before the SSPA main allocation.Those procedures have now been revised, having- been endorsed by a majorityof the SSPA Advisory Committee members during* their first meeting held on4 November 1987. The revised procedures are now detailed as follows :

(a) Secondary schools can reserve, with effect from the 1988allocation, up to 5% of their Secondary 1 places forrepeaters.® (See Note)

(b) The balance of their discretionary places can be filled by theschools before the SSPA main allocation, in the followingmanner :

Each year, they will receive applications fordiscretionary places form primary pupils. Eachprimary pupil is allowed to make application toonly one school for a discretionary place. Forthe 1988 allocation the closing date ofapplications will be 29 February 1988.Application of more than one discretionary placeby pupils will result in forfeiture of all rightsto a discretionary place.

They will be required to forward a list ofapplicants, using a 'List of Pupils Applying forDiscretionary Places' form available from theDepartment (sample attached), to the SSPASection for checking of multiple applications notlater than 15 March 1988. Only participatingpupils of the current SSPA cycle need to beforwarded. Non-participants of the currentcycle (including non-participants of the SSPASystem or SSPA participants of past cycles) willbe dealt with separately, under Step 5 below.

Upon receipt of the lists of applicants, the SSPASection will generate a rank order based onapplicants1 internal assessments scaled by theA.A.T. results. Secondary schools will be issuedwith the rank order list of their applicantstogether with a Multiple Entries Pupil List forDiscretionary Places' if any in mid April 1988.

« Note : This is no longer valid with effect from September 1992.


Next, schools will have to decide a shortlist of applicants foradmission to fill the discretionary places. The criteria forselection will be entirely at the discretion of the Principals.However, with the rank order list provided, it is hoped thatsecondary schools would, as far as possible, dispense withentrance examinations. Pupils who have made applicationsto more than one school for a discretionary place i.e. pupilswhose names appear on the 'Multiple Entries Pupils List forDiscretionary Places' should not be considered.

If a school intends to accept an applicant who is a non-participant of the current SSPA cycle, the school should firstsend him to the SSPA Section for checking of eligibility fora discretionary place, not later than the third week in May.A form, specially designed for this purpose (sample attached)should be completed in duplicate by the school and broughtto the SSPA Section by the applicant for checking" andendorsement. After endorsement, one copy will be returnedto the school and the other retained by the SSPA Section.

Schools will then be required to forward their lists ofsuccessful applicants, using the 'List of Successful Applicantsfor Discretionary Places' form (sample attached) to the SSPASection on or before 1 June 1988. Part A of the form is forentering the names of participating pupils of the currentSSPA cycle and Part B is for those non-participants of thecurrent cycle who have been certified eligible for adiscretionary place under Step 5 above.

Successful applicants will be allocated these discretionaryplaces prior to the central allocation. The nettingarrangement will be appropriately adjusted according to therevised supply and demand situation.

Pupils who have not been given a discretionary place will becentrally allocated in the normal manner.

The successful list of applicants forwarded by schools in step6 is confidential and pupils will be notified of the results atthe same time when the central allocation results areannounced in July.

(c) Should the number of successful applicants forwarded by a school be lessthan the number of discretionary places entitled by the school, theremaining unfilled places will automatically be returned to the generalpool for central allocation.

(d) A school may, however, decide to fill part of its discretionary places byitself and the remainder by central allocation. Alternatively, a schoolmay decide not to fill any of its discretionary places by itself, but tooffer all of them for central allocation.


- 3 -

(e) In the case of feeder/nominated schools, they are free to opt to fill uptheir discretionary places (less the 5% for repeaters) for special allocationto their feeder/nominated primary pupils by the SSPA Section. Theseplaces will be filled in the following way :

(i) those pupils from the feeder/nominated primary schoolwho are either Band 1 or Band 2 (criterion foreligibility for a feeder/nominated place to be loweredto Band 3 with effect from the 1989 allocation), buthave not been allocated a place in the parent schoolbecause the feeder/nominated places have beenexhausted, will be considered first. The computer willallocate them by band and according to their randomnumber sequence;

(ii) if there are still discretionary places remaining afterstep (i), those pupils from the feeder/nominatedprimary school who have not been allocated a place inthe parent school because they are Band 3, Band 4 orBand 5 (Band 4 or Band 5 as from the 1989 allocation)will be considered next. Again allocation will be doneby band and by their random number sequence; and

(iii) if, as a result of (i) & (ii), there are stilldiscretionary places left vacant, they will be returnedto the main pool for open competition.

(f) Alternatively feeder/nominated schools can fill some of theirdiscretionary places in the manner described in (b) and the balanceas in (e) above, provided that they give advance notice to theSSPA Section.

2. Prevocational schools will continue to recruit their own pupilsbefore the central allocation. The only difference is that they will be requiredto recruit pupils to fill 95% of their secondary 1 places (after deducting 5% forrepeaters) in their annual recruitment exercise held in February each year.

3. Heads of primary schools are requested to advise parents of theirprimary six pupils of the proper timing of making applications for discretionaryplaces and draw their attention to the importance of not making application bythis time, they should be advise to retain only the application of their firstpreference and with draw all the others (please see Step 1 of paragraph l(b)above).

4. Attached to this circular is a copy of 'An Outline of the SecondarySchool Places Allocation System (for the 1986/88 cycle and onwards) for yourinformation and reference. Sufficient copies have been provided for eachparticipating primary school for distribution to their primary six pupils.


- 4 -

5. Any enquiries concerning this circular should be directed to MrClement C.K. Wongr, Senior Education Officer (SSPA) on telephone 8912200,

(S. H. HSU)for Director of Education

To : Supervisors/Headmasters/Headmistresses/Principalsof all primary and secondary schools participating- in the SSPASystem

c.c. Heads of Sections/Colleges/ILE


5 4

* m m w *EDUCATION DEPARTMENT HONG KONG

* $ 9 ffi & £SECONDARY SCHOOL PLACES ALLOCATION

StfcSheet No

List of Pupils Applying for Discretionary Places

Schooi Name:*«»KSchool Code: Tel. No.: No. of pupils on this sheet I i t

I2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

II

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

2829

30

c

Pupil No.) (15)

7)

Name of Pupil (in English dfc in block letters)

"

^ _ • . . . .

,

Sex

(15) Jg-R&ti Signature of Princiral :

Remarks

-

School Chop

L.

fcDSAA.2

Name of Principal(in block letters):

B*}

Section 4 Annex (10) p. 6

(To be completed in duplicate)

Secondary School Places Allocation 1986/88Eligibility Check for Non-ParticipatingPupils of the Current SSPA Cycle

for Discretionary Places

PART A (To be completed by School)

The school is .prepared to accept the following pupil to fill a Secondary 1discretionary place subject to confirmation by the Education Department ofhis/her eligibility.

Name of Pupil (English) (Chinese) Sex

Date of Birth | I I (Yr) I I I (Mth) Place of Birth

Address

Tel. No. I.D* Card/Passport/Entry Permit No.

School attending/last attended

Class attending/last attended

Previous S,S.P*A. Pupil No* (for repeaters only) I I I I I I 1 I

School ChopSignature of Principal

Name of Principal(in block letters)

Date

PART B (For office use only)

I confirm/regret that the above-named pupil is/is not eligible for adiscretionary place in your school.

The S*S.P,A. pupil number assigned to him/her for the current cycle is

1 1 1 t I I i I t i

Official Chop

Signature of Officer

Name of Officer

Date


School Code:

PART B ( FOR PUPILS NOT PARTICIPATING IN CURRENT CYCLE }

I

z \

3 .

_ 4

>

C

$e.

SSPA Pupil No.Current Cvcle }

*

J

T

Date of BirthY r )A w»

SSPA Pupil No*Current Cycle }

ttSI

J

('

Date of Birthr M M

SSPA Puoil No*Current Cycle )

Sex

1

r

&&BWDate of BirthY Y M r*

SSPA Puoil No.Current Cycle >

SexDate of BirthY Y M M

Name of Pupil (in English & in block letters)

Previous SSPA Pupil No. "( For repeaters only )

Remarks

Name of Pupil (in Englistt d in block letters)

Previous SSPA Pupil No* "( For repeaters only )

ffclrRemarks

Name of Pupil (in English 4 in block letters)

Previous SSPA Pupil No.( For repeaters only )

Remarks

Name of Pupil (in English dc in block letters)

Previous SSPA P( For repeaters

!£$#)upil No* .only )

Remarks

m»*^A«Suwnary of pupils admitted s

' f«ffl#.fta-K*K)r7i> Ae complftrd in iht last shttt t*niv)

? 35 PART A

£ 3S PART" B

»X«f

B BOY

GRAND '

* CIKL

COTAL

fr* TOT.

R 81School Chop

Signature of Principal;

Name of Principal(in block letters):

Dace:

Section 4

EDUCATION DEPARTMENT HONG KONG

£ 3R 5 ift ^r IcSECONDARY SCHOOL PLACES ALLOCATION

LIST OF SUCCESSFUL APPLICANTS FOR DISOmOWRY PLACES

T«l. No.:

Annex (10) p. 8

«*Sheti No.

School Name:

Schoot <

PART A { FOR PDPHS PART1CI?ATIN3 IN CDRREOT CYCLE )

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

3

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

" 20

*** ftKanic"

Order SS?* I

if

J_!

' iI i

I I

I -i

!( !

1 1I t f —.._.«„.,..I f

i , , -l~dI 1 ii 1 !

t 1{ ! • - ,-,„«• ;-! 1

1 r i HMHHMM.M... ! 1 :( t ,,- !f i1 i» 1 II . .TT- -r-L' ,L! ,11 , - TTT

1 i

, f ....» . . . .

| (

£^St «^^^C^*(J£?f)>up,j 0 Name of Pupil (in English & in block letters)

I I 1

..

— fi i i!

T

-jJL.

ULJLj•*

±. i-

*

•1*S1Sex

fft££Remarks

EOSA72 *^R^^ :®5?3C< f f ' SAA4-OI. According to computer report number SAA4 - 01


Ref.: ED(E/J)PA/01 Education DepartmentHong Kong

3 July 1991

General Administration Circular No. 19/91Invitation to Participate in the 1991/92

Junior Secondary Education Assessment System

The purpose of this circular is to inform schools of the new arrangements of the JuniorSecondary Education Assessment (JSEA) System and to invite schools to participate in the System.

The Revised Mean Eligibility Rate Allocation Method

2. With effect from September 1991, a new allocation method known as the RevisedMean Eligibility Rate (RMER) Allocation Method will replace the current Mean Eligibility Rate(MER) Allocation Method.

3. The RMER-Allocation Method is an enhancement of the MER-Allocation Method.The RMER is the percentage of Secondary 3 students in a school eligible for allocation of subsidizedSecondary 4 places and its calculation will start from the 1988/89 school year. Like the MER, theRMER is an average of the eligibility rates over the previous three years. Their only difference liesin the formulation of the eligibility rates. Under the RMER-Allocation Method, the eligibility rateof the school in a particular year takes

either (a) the value of the MER of the same year, if the absolute difference between theMER and the Scaled Eligibility Rate (SER) is less than or equal to 10%;

or (b) the value of SER of the same year, if the absolute difference between theMER and the SER is greater than 10%.

The calculation of SER is illustrated at Appendix I. For schools with less than four eligibilityrecords, the RMER is equal to the SER of that year.

4* The operation of the RMER-Allocation Method will be similar to that of the MER-Allocation Method. Schools will be asked to submit their entries in December. As the personalparticulars of the Secondary 3 students can be retrieved from the Pupil Record System, schools willonly need to enter individual students' Pupil Record Card Numbers and their names in Chinese intothe Entry List. In February the following year, schools will be asked to submit the Half-yearlyAssessment Reports.

5- Individual schools will be informed of their eligibility rates and quotas, i.e. thenumber of students eligible for subsidized Secondary 4 places, by March and June respectively.


Admission to Post-Secondary 3 Craft Courses

6. Enrolment for post-Secondary 3 craft courses in technical institutes and industrytraining centres will begin in March. In order to safeguard the interest of vocationally inclinedstudents, two rounds of interview will be conducted by the technical institutes and industry trainingcentres. Applicants will be invited for the first round interview in April. The second round interviewwill be carried out in May for applicants unsuccessful in the first round.

7. Schools should inform parents that an applicant who has been interviewed and selectedwill automatically not be considered for the allocation of a subsidized Secondary 4 places. This willbe stated clearly in the application form for the craft courses and parents will no longer be separatelyasked to sign any consent form. Parents and students should consider very carefully before makingapplications in future because an applicant will forfeit his/her chance of being allocated a subsidizedSecondary 4 place if he/she attends an interview and is subsequently selected for a course in atechnical institute or an industry training centre.

8. In June, when schools receive from the Education Department the list of successfulapplicants for courses at technical institutes and industry training centres, such students should beregarded as having given up their right to compete for subsidized Secondary 4 places.

Internal Assessments

9. Participating schools may conduct internal assessments for their Secondary 3 studentsin much the same way as for students at other levels. This normally means that they will have eithertwo or three sets of internal assessment results per school year. In calculating the overall total forthe year, each set of results is advisably given equal weighting.

10. In a grammar school, the subjects in the internal assessment used for the compilationof an order of merit should include : Chinese, English, Mathematics, Science Subjects, SocialSubjects and Chinese History. Individual schools may also add non-academic subjects to the abovesubject groups if they wish. In a technical or prevocational school, technical/practical subjects shouldbe added.

11. On the basis of the time allocation in the majority of schools, the following ceilingscores for each subject group are recommended:

Non-Sci. Soc. Chin. Tech./ Tech./ academic

Chin. Eng. Maths. Subj. Subj. Hist. Pract. Comm. Subject(optional)

GrammarSchool 300 300 300 300 300 100 - - 300

(or less)

Tech.School 300 300 300 300 300 100 300

Prevoc.School 300 300 300 300 200 - - 400


12. If the standards of students within a particular school are found to cover a very widerange of ability, the school concerned may, subject to certain conditions, design different test papersfor different ability groups. For technical information and advice on assessing students of differentabilities, schools may consult the Education Records and Junior Secondary Education AssessmentSection of the Education Department.

13, Schools will be asked to submit an order of merit of their Secondary 3 students. Theyneed not submit the scores of individual students in the internal assessments. However, documentssuch as marking schemes and the students's test papers will need to be retained for possible inspectionby the Eduction Department. The order of merit of students in the half-yearly internal assessmentof the Secondary 3 school year must be submitted in early February.

Allocation

14. In early July, after schools have finalized their internal assessments (i.e. produced anorder of merit based on the combined internal assessments of the two or three terms of the Secondary3 year) and after arrangements have been made for any students to repeat in Secondary 3 (notexceeding 5%) or go to technical institutes and industry training centres, schools will then select fromamong the remaining Secondary 3 students in descending order of merit a number equivalent to theeligibility quota and classify them as "eligible" students for promotion to Secondary 4; the rest of thestudents (i.e. those below the cut-offline for the quota) will be classified as "ineligible" students.

15. The "eligible" students of the highest order of merit will be selected to fill theSecondary 4 places in their own schools. The remaining students, "eligible" or "ineligible", will haveto participate in the central allocation. In the case of private independent schools without boughtplaces at Secondary 4 level, all students will require central allocation since these schools have nosubsidized senior secondary places.

16. Two territory-wide lists, one for the remaining "eligible" students and one for"ineligible" students, will then be compiled by the Education Department for the purpose of centrallyallocating them to any Secondary 4 places which are still vacant. The priority of the students in theselists will be determined by their order of merit as reported by schools after being scaled by theirSSPA standard scores (Appendix II). Examples illustrating the procedures described in paragraphs14, 15 and 16 are at Appendix III.

17. Parents of students who require placement should indicate on a Choice of SchoolsForm provided by the Eduction Department their preferences selected from a territory-wide list ofschools with subsidized Secondary 4 places. Parents may also choose certain full-time craft coursesoffered in technical institutes and industry training centres. These forms, after having been completedby the parents concerned, should be submitted to the Education Department by the school.

18 - Through a procedure taking parental choice into account, the remaining subsidizedSecondary 4 places will then be allocated by the Education Department to all "eligible" students anda number of "ineligible" students according to the availability of subsidized Secondary 4 places andthe students' positions in their respective orders of merit. Students not allocated subsidized Secondary4 places through this procedure may apply for places in private independent schools without boughtplaces at Secondary 4 level or short courses operated in industry training centres.


Release of Results and Registration

19. Results of central allocation will be released in August. Students allocated Secondary4 places in schools other than their own will each be given a registration form. These students mustreport to the schools to which they are allocated on the date specified, taking with them theirregistration forms which will be retained by the school.

20. If a student is unable to go for registration on the date specified, the parent concernedshould authorize, in writing, a representative to report to the allocated school for registration. Theletter of authorization must be endorsed by the school presenting the student. Failing that, the studentwill be considered to have given up the school place allocated to him/her,

21. Registration forms will not be issued to students who will be offered subsidizedSecondary 4 places in their own schools. Schools should register these students in a way similar tothat as in other levels.

Review

22. The RMER-Allocation Method will be reviewed after completion of two cycles.Schools will be given adequate notice of any changes which may result from the review.

Participation

23. Schools are now invited to participate in the 1991/92 JSEA System. All schools withsubsidized Secondary 3 students are expected to participate in the JSEA System. These includegovernment, aided, assisted private, caput and private independent schools in the bought place scheme(with bought place students in Secondary 3). New participating schools and schools which have beenparticipating in the current cycle are requested to inform the Education Department that they willparticipate/continue to participate in the coming cycle 1991/92.

24. Private independent schools not in the bought place scheme, which are currentlyparticipating in the JSEA System but choose not to participate in future, are required to give threeyears' advance notice of their intention to withdraw from the System so that no existing Secondary1 to Secondary 3 students will be adversely affected. In other words, they may withdraw from the1994/95 school year.

25. Alternatively, such private independent schools may withdraw from the JSEA Systemin the 1991/92 school year without giving three years' advance notice provided that they can confirmagreements from the parents of their Secondary 1 and Secondary 2 students.

26. Private independent schools not in the bought place scheme, which are not currentlyparticipating in the JSEA System, may choose not to participate in the 1991/92 JSEA System.However, they are reminded that they must notify parents that their children will not be eligible forallocation to subsidized Secondary 4 places.

27. Enclosed please find Reply Slip A, B, C and D. Schools are requested to completethe appropriate one and return it to the Education Records and Junior Secondary EducationAssessment Section on or before Friday, 19 July 1991.

Section 4

Enuiries

<n>

28. For enquiries concerning the new arrangements of the JSEA System, please contactthe Education Records and Junior Secondary Education Assessment Section of the EducationDepartment. The address and telephone number of the Section are as follows:

269 Queen's Road East4th FloorLui Kee Education Services CentreWanchaiHong Kong

Telephone No.: 891 9099

S.H. HSUfor Director of Education

To : Heads of all secondary schools - for necessary action

c.c. Heads of all SectionsHeadmasters/Headmistresses of Government Primary SchoolsPrincipals of Colleges of EducationPrincipal of Institute of Language in Education

0 .. * Annex (11) P.6Section 4Appendix I

SCALING ANDCALCULATION OF SER

$3 Internal SSPA Total S4A99699m*nt9 Standard Seated P/ace*of*School# Scof»*# Scor*«# Avatlabto

D mm i — i cm CUDB • CD A CD CDC. SS i — l 1=3 C=3£ I — I CZ3 CZDG i — i cm CDH •• I — i CD CD

(=3 CD CDCD CD CD

dD CD

CD CDCD CD

CD CD CDCD CD CD

5 CD CDCD ............ --.-CD ......................... CD....

\

C=D CDi "t(# : In cf**c*ndfng order of tcorefmertt)

CD cutting Scon

SER _ Mo. of student* above th* cutting coroTola/no. of S3 students in tb* school

675%

Section 4Annex (11) p.7

Appendix II

RMER-ALLOCATION METHOD

SCHOOL A (RMER => 70%) .

$4 places S3 students

TERRITORY-WIDE LISTS

Eligible students

Eligible

Ineligible

SCHOOL B (RMER - 90%)$4 places S3 students

Scaled bySSPAStandard Score*

Scaled bySSPAStandard Scores

Scaled bySSPAStandard Scores

Vacant S4 placesfor CentralAllocation

Ineligible *<ucfenfo


Appendix III

PREPARATION OF TERRITORY-WIDELIST FOR CENTRAL ALLOCATION

S3 InternalS4 pieces assessmentsIn school of school #

CDI |[•• [

| - } Promotioni - 1 to own school

CDCD.

Territory-widelist of eligible

students #

1 — 1I I

Territory-widelist of Ineligible

students #

f?W£fi =

W

XY

EligiblerequiringCentral

CDw

CDCD

CDCZ3CDCDCDCDCD

CDCDCDcm

CD

(#: In descending order of score/merit)

CDCDCDCDCD

z ESS

CD

CD

Section 4 Annex (12)Ref. : ED(GR) 2/4515/61 EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

HONG KONG29 April 1992


Revised Procedure for Admission to Secondary 6

Following consultation with relevant schools councilsand other concerned parties, the existing procedure for admissionto Secondary 6 has been revised for 1992-93 school year, takinginto consideration comments and proposals received,

5-stage procedure

2. The step by step procedure covering a period of 11working days in five different stages remains basically the sameas last year as detailed in Annex 1 to this circular. Yourattention is particularly drawn to the incorporation ofprevocational schools, bought place schools, non-bought placeschools, evening schools, private candidates and candidates whohave sat previous HKCEEs in the revised procedure.

3. The proposal by some groups to combine Stages II, III& IV as one stage so as to shorten the procedure has beenconsidered and found to be unsatisfactory, as it will bringpressure to bear on students having to hunt for places in StageII, and multiple registration of students and the consequentialwastage and underenrolment, which the admission procedure setsout to eliminate, will re-occur. In any case, based on lastyear's experience, by the end of Stage III (i.e. Day 4), 98% ofall the Secondary 6 places were already filled* This means thatthe number of schools that have to carry on with Stages IV to V(i.e. from Day 5 up to Day 11) would be very small. Thus, the5-stage procedure will continue to be followed in 1992.

The cut-off point for Day 1 admission

4~ The proposal to raise the aggregate of 14 points of theHKCEE results for Stage I admission so that students not admittedby their own schools will have a greater choice of schools on Day2 has^also been carefully considered. However, in view of theanticipated 8% drop in the number of candidates taking part inthe HKCEE in 1992 resulting in a corresponding decrease in thenumber of students gaining admission in Stage I and theadditional 3,000 Secondary 6 places to be provided in 1992, theEducation Department considers that maintaining the status quoof 14 points for Day 1 admission will be more appropriate as morevacant places will be available for Day 2. Moreover, the raisingof the aggregate of 14 points for Day 1 admission would haveother disadvantages. Students with an aggregate score of 14points^would become ineligible on Day 1 if the Day 1 admissioncriterion is raised. This means more students will be out in thestreet looking for places in later stages. Student movement wouldbe increased and a more chaotic situation would result.


- 2 -

Discretionary places for Day 1

5. A new feature of the revised admission procedure is theintroduction of discretionary places in 1992 as requested by someschools councils and associations. A quota of two discretionaryplaces per Secondary 6 class operated will be allowed in StageI to accommodate your own students or students of your linkedschools, who meet the new minimum A-level entry requirements.Your own past students or past students of your linked schoolsmay also be considered. Your own past students means studentswho have attempted a previous HKCEE in your school. Anydiscretionary places not used should be returned to the generalpool for admitting your own current students with 14 points ormore in Stage I. You are required to put on record the reasonfor the use of each of your discretionary places for inspectionby relevant authorities if the need arises such as in the caseof complaints. You are also required to report to your DistrictEducation Officers at the end of Day 1 the number ofdiscretionary places that have been used up.(please also see para. 13(i))

Schools without Secondary 6 or with only one stream ofSecondary 6

6. For students of government or aided schools which donot operate Secondary 6 or operate only one stream of Secondary6, the arrangement of a link for them to other schools withSecondary 6 or with Secondary 6 of a reciprocal stream willcontinue in 1992.

Bought place schools

7. Commencing this September, the government will buySecondary 6 places from this group of schools. Therefore,students of bought place schools which operate Secondary 6 mayaPPly to their own schools on Day 1 in the same way as otherstudents. However, for those schools which do not operateSecondary 6 in 1992 or those which will have only one stream ofSecondary 6, the Education Department will establish a link forthem.

Non-bought place schools

8. For non-bought place schools, arrangement will be madefor PLK Vicwood K.T. Chong Sixth Form College to regard them aslinked schools if they so wish.

Past HKCEE participants

9* All schools may consider admitting past HKCEEparticipants in Stages I (for own past students) , II and IV only.


- 3 -

Private candidates and evening schools

10. For private candidates, arrangement has been made forPLK Vicwoood K.T. Chong Sixth Form College to regard them as itsfeeder students. For evening schools, arrangement may also bemade for them to be linked to PLK Vicwood K.T. Chong Sixth FormCollege if they so wish. A quota of Secondary 6 places will beprovided for them. As not all of the private candidates orstudents of evening schools will be able to receive their HKCEEresult slips from the Hong Kong Examinations Authority until theevening of Day 1, eligible students with the Sixth Form Collegeas their linked school may apply to the College on Day 2 to fillthe quota. They will be considered in the same way as otherfeeder students have been considered on Day 1. They are alsofree to apply to other schools on Day 2. However, If they wereaccepted by the College at the end of Day 2 and had registeredwith the College, they would no longer be eligible for admissionto other schools.

Leaflet on the revised secondary six admission procedure

11. To ensure that intending candidates for Secondary 6will be fully aware of the revised procedure, a leaflet and aposter will be prepared. Schools are requested to collect copiesof the leaflet and a poster from the Education Department, Room314, 3rd floor, Lee Gardens, Hysan Avenue, Hong Kong on 23 June1992, using the proforma at Annex II. Extra copies of theleaflet will be available to private candidates and members ofthe public in District Education Offices and City and NewTerritories Adminstration District Offices. There will also bepublicity through the mass media* Schools are requested todistribute copies of the leaflet to their Secondary 5 leavers toensure that they are fully aware of the revised procedure, andto display the poster in a prominent place in the school.

Important points to be noted by schools

12. Your particular attention is drawn to the 1992 HKCEEIndividual Results Notice. When a student has been admitted andput on your register, the admission slip (lower portion of theNotice) should be detached and kept by the school. No schoolshould admit a current year HKCEE candidate who is unable toproduce the admission slip. You are requested to adhere to thisstrictly. However, applicants who sat the HKCEE before 1991 andare eligible for admission to Secondary 6 should be consideredfor admission without the need to produce any admission slip.

Section 4 Annex (12) p.4~ 4 -

13. To achieve tighter monitoring of the implementation ofthe admission procedure, the following measures will beintroduced in 1992 :-

(i) All schools will be required to keep records of bothsuccessful and unsuccessful candidates for all stages.A form has been designed (Annex III) for the purposeof recording information regarding successfulcandidates. You are requested to fill in the form atthe end of each stage and send one copy to yourDistrict Education Office for information. (Pleaseduplicate the form yourself.)

(ii) Selection of students at any one stage should be inaccordance with the points and subject relevance. If,for any reason, the order is not followed, anexplanation must be recorded for future reference;

(iii) Although it is not unreasonable for a school to rejecta student on grounds of disciplinary problems or thatthe curriculum offered by the school is unsuitable forhim, the school should be responsible for providingexplanations in case of complaints; and

(iv) District Education Officers will continue to visitschools on a random basis throughout the stages toensure that schools comply with the revised sixth formadmission procedure,

14. The success of this revised admission scheme dependsmuch on your cooperation and close adherence to its detailedprocedure. To this end I enlist your support.

15. The revised admission procedure will be formallyreviewed again in three years7 time.

16. A Chinese version of the circular will follow.

T.F. MANfor Director of Education

To : Heads of all secondary schoolsc.c. Heads of sections

Section 4 Annex <12> P 5

Annex I

Secondary Six Admission Procedure

(All days refer to working days- Monday to Friday -except public holidays, with Day 1 being the date onwhich the HKCEE results are released)

(1) Stage I - Day 1

On Day 1, schools should admit only their own orfeeder students who have obtained 14* points or morefrom six subjects in one sitting of the HKCEE. As longas there are vacancies, no such students should beturned away unless they are obviously unsuitable forthe stream (Arts or Science) applied for in terms ofsubjects. Students from other schools should not beadmitted.

Schools may admit their own current or past studentsor current or past students of linked schools who haveobtained the new minimum A-Level entry requirements tofill discretionary places.

Applications should be accepted or rejected on thesame day up to 3:30 pm so that unsuccessful applicantscan apply to another school in Stage II.

At the end of the day, preferably by 3:30 pm, schoolsshould advise their District Education Officers byfaxing a copy of the Secondary 6 Admission Registerfor the day or by telephone of the admission resultsto enable lists of schools with vacancies by streamsto be compiled, one for each district. The lists withrelevant details will be displayed at DistrictEducation Offices at 9:00 am on the following day forthe information of intending applicants during StageII.

(2) Stage II - Days 2 to 3

On Day 2, schools with vacancies may considerapplications from students of other schools includingprevocational schools, private schools (both boughtplace and non-bought place schools) , eveningschools,and private candidates as well as past HKCEEparticipants, who have obtained 14 points or more fromsix subjects. Applications may be received throughoutthe day until 3:30 pm.

Grades A to E are given points value of 5 to 1 respectively,

Section 4 Annex (12) P.6

Prevocational schools with vacancies may considerapplications from their own students and students from

other prevocational schools with results that satisfythe new minimum A-level entry requirements andstudents from grammar/technical schools with a scoreof 14* points or more from six subjects in one sittingof the HKCEE. Priority of admission should be given toprevocational school students.

On Day 3, no applications should be accepted. Theresults of applications received on Day 2 should beposted from 9:00 am to 3:30 pm for the information ofapplicants. Registration of successful applicantsshould be completed within the same day.

(3) Stage III - Day 4

On Day 4, schools should attempt to fill all theirvacancies, if any, by admitting their own students orstudents of their linked schools. The eligibilitycriteria for admission at this stage should be the newminimum A-level entry requirements for schoolcandidates in 1994 as stipulated in HKAL ExaminationCircular No. (11) 91/92 issued by the Hong KongExamination Authority on 17 February 1992. Studentsfrom other schools should not be admitted.

No action is required in this stage for prevocationalschools. This stage is not applicable to past HKCEEparticipants.

Applications should be accepted or rejected on thesame day up to 3:30 pm so that unsuccessful applicantscan apply to another school in Stage IV*

At the end of the day, preferably by 3:30 pm, schoolsshould advise their District Education Officers byfaxing a copy of the Secondary 6 admission registerfor the day or by telephone of the vacancies situationto enable such information to be updated for thereference of intending applicants during Stage IV*

(4) Stage IV - Days 5 to 6

On Day 5, schools still with vacancies may consider upto 3:30 pm applications from students of other schoolsincluding past HKCEE participants who meet the newminimum A-level entry requirements. They shouldannounce the admission results and register successfulapplicants between 9:00 am and 3:30 pm on Day 6. Theyshould also advise their District Education Officersof the latest enrolment situation preferably by 3:30pm on the same day.


- 3 -

Prevocational schools with vacancies may also considerup to 3:30 pm applications from students ofgrammar/technical schools who meet the new minimum A-level entry requirements.

With effect from Day 6, schools should cease to acceptany application for admission. This is necessary tofacilitate the central allocation described below.

(5) Stage V - Davs 7 to 11

All current HKCEE students (i.e. excluding past HKCEEparticipants) who satisfy the new minimum A-levelentry requirements but have not yet obtained a placemay apply at specified Centres to be announced laterfor central allocation to schools with vacancies. Atthe time of application, they will be shown a list ofschools with vacancies and asked to indicate theirchoices. The students will then be banded according tothe number of points they have obtained in the HKCEE.All those in the same band will be assigned arandomized priority number by computer for allocationto the schools of their choice, starting with those inthe highest band.

On Day 11, allocation result will be displayed outsidethe hall of the Centres. Students should go to theCentre where they have submitted their applications tosee if they have been allocated a place. If so, theywill be given an allocation slip. They should reportto the schools concerned for registration with theallocation slip and the admission slip between 9:00 amand 3:30 pm on the same day.

September to October

Vacancies may arise from students leaving to join theColleges of Education, Technical Institutes, thePolytechnics and other institutions. Schools wishingto fill these vacancies may report the number ofplaces available to their District Education Officersup to about the middle of October. The EducationDepartment will update this information and arrangefor it to be posted for the reference of students whohave still not secured a Secondary 6 place.


- 4 -

Throughout the admission procedure, it should be madevery clear to the applicants that double or multipleregistration will not be entertained as each schoolwill detach and retain the admission slip attached tothe HKCEE result notice for use as a record ofadmission of a particular student. Schools have noobligation to return the applicants their admissionslips after they have been accepted.

Only under exceptional circumstances and with fulljustification should a school refuse to admit acandidate who is qualified under Stages I to V.

Section 4 Annex (12) p.9Annex II

Collection of Poster and Leaflet onProcedure for Admission to Secondary 6

To : Education Department,Lee Gardens,Hysan Avenue,Room 314,Causeway Bay,Hong Kong.

Please hand the bearer a poster andcopies of the above leaflet.

Name of School :

School Chop

Signature of Principal

Date

Section 4 Annex (12) p.io

Secondary 6 Admission Regis-ter

Class: S..6 {

Permitted No.:

Date:

Stage I/II/III/IV/IV (please delete as appropriate;

Name ofCandidate

HKCEECandidate

No.

Previous School

Own School*Name of

Feeder SchoolName of

Other School

Please tick for current year candidates or enter the year for paststudents. Please indicate by a 'D' if the place offered is adiscretionary place*

Total No. of students registered:

Total No. of vacancies available:

Principal's Signature:

Name of School:

Note: One copy to be posted in school at the end of day and one copy to befaxed to District Education Offices at the end of day for information.

Section 4 A""6" (13)

Ref.: ED(RB)196/69 PtJ4 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

10 June 1992

GENERAL ADMINISTRATION CIRCULAR-No, 17/92Entry of Alien Children to Schodls in Hong Kong

Permission for aliens to enter-,or reside in HongKong for any purpose is at the discretion of the Director ofImmigration. Thus, alien children may enter, or reside in HongKong for the purpose of education, only with the approval of theDirector of Immigration*

2. In general, and subject to the Director ofImmigration's decision in individual cases, there is noobjection to the entry and residence of an alien child for tbepurpose of attending a private independent school registeredunder the Education Ordinance. However, alien children are notto be regarded as having a right of access to places in thepublic sector allocated through any system operated by thisDepartment.

3. My attention is drawn from time to time by theDirector of Immigration to cases where applications have beenmade to him for permission to enter or reside in Hong Kong forthe purpose of attending a government, aided or assisted privateschool, or a school taking part in the caput -grant or the boughtplace scheme. Places in these schools (except for such places inindependent schools which are not bought) are for Hong Kongchildren and children resident with their families as members ofthe Hong Kong community. This applies to primary schools,secondary schools, and schools or classes for handicappedchildren.

4. As far as the above-mentioned categories ofschools are concerned {vis government, aided, assisted private,or schools taking part in the caput grant or the bought placescheme), admission is restricted to pupils holding one of thefollowing documents:-

(a) A Hong Kong Birth Certificate

- For persons born in Hong Kong before 1 January 1983,the birth certificate alone (Annex A) is sufficientproof of the holder's eligibility for admission tosuch schools;

- For persons born in Hong Kong between 1 January 1983and 30 June 1987, column 12 of feheir birthcertificates must indicate their Hong Kong belongerstatus as 'Established' (Annex B);

- For persons born in Hong Kong on or after 1 July 1987column 12 of their birth certificates must indicatetheir Hong Kong permanent resident status asEstablished1 (Annex C);


- Persons whose- Hong Kong belonger status orHong Kong permanent resident status is shownas "Not established" (Annex D & E} should berequired to produce their travel documents orpermits to remain in Hong Kong (I.D. 235B-Annex F) and (d) below will apply?

(b) A Hong Kong identity card issued during theperiod from 28 March 1983 to 30 June 1987 whichdoes not bear the symbol 'C1 (for conditionalstay) at line 7 (Annex G). If the symbol 'C1 isshown, the holder should be required to producehis travel document and (d) below will apply.

{c) A Hong Kong identity card issued on or after1 July 1987 which does not bear the symbol 'C1(for conditional stay) at line 6 (Annex HK Ifthe symbol 'C1 is shown, the holder should berequired to produce his travel document and (d)below will apply.

(d) A valid travel document showing any of thefollowing endorsements:-

(i) "Permitted to remain until (date) "(the date showing the stay in Hong Kongto be still valid .at the time ofadmission to school? see (i) of Annex I);

(i±) "Permission to remain extended until(date) " (the date showing that the

stay in Hong Kong to be still valid atthe time of admission to school? see (ii)of Annex I);

(iii) "The holder of this travel document hasthe right to land in Hong Kong* No visais required (Section 8(1), ImmigrationOrdinance Cap* 115, Laws of Hong Kong)wSee (iii) of Annex I)?

(iv) "The holder arrived in Hong Kong on(date) and was permitted to land.11

(See (iv) of Annex I);

(v) Permitted to stay with no conditionattached. (See (v) of Annex D?

(vi) "Previous conditions of stay are herebycancelled11; (see (vi) of Annex I); and

(vii) "Holder's eligibility for Hong Kongpermanent identity card verified1. (See(vii) of Annex I).

-2-

Section 4 Annex (13) p 35. It should be noted that in general, pupilswhose travel documents bear any of the followingendorsements can reside im Hong Kong for the purpose ofeducation. However, they should not be admitted to publicsector places in the types of schools mentioned in paras. 3and 4 above:-1

(i) "STUDENT - permitted to remain until(date) * (the date showing the.stay in

Hong Kong to be still valid at the timeof admission to school; see (viii)of Annex I); and

(ii) "STUDENT - permission to remain extendeduntil (date) * (the date showing thestay in Hong Kong to be still valid atthe time of admission to school; see (ix)of Annex I)*

6. Unless clearance is obtained from the Director ofImmigration, no pupil whose travel document/passport bearsthe endorsement "VISITOR1' over the immigration stapp shouldbe admitted to any school in Hong Kong.

7. In the event of your receiving an application onbehalf of a child whom you may have reason to believe to bean alien, you should advise the person making theapplication to seek the approval of the Director ofImmigration as soon as possible as to the entry to Hong Kongof the child in questionf for purpose of study. If you arein any doubt as to the nationality of an applicant for aplace, you may contact the Assistant Section Head, ExtensionSection of Immigration Department on 829 3112 for advice* Aspecimen letter to the Director of Immigration is alsoattached(Annex J) which it is hoped will be helpful.

8. Under no circumstances should the principal of aschool guaranatee a place in the school to a child who isnot a resident of Hong Kong, unless he is fully satisfiedthat the child is permitted, by the Director of Immigration«to reside in Hong Kong as indicated in paras* 4(d) and 5above. In the case of public sector schools, admission ofaliens is restricted to those detailed in para, 4(d) above*However, a conditional acceptance letter may be issued* Sucha letter must make it clear that the offer of a place istemporary and subject to the Director of Immigration1^approval.

9* This circular replaces General AdministrationCircular No. 22/9 I of 2-f July 1991.

Robert C. H. LO -for Director of Education

To: Heads of all Primary SchoolsHeads of all Secondary SchoolsHeada of Sections (for information)Principals of Colleges (for information)

BIRTHS AND DMTfIS RFfHSTRY, HONH KONG

CIMFN%*> A JL v Jg. &~4 £ |CERTIFIED COPY OF AN ENTRY IN A REGISTER OF BIRTHS.

ffi ft & % & M » w m & m as m ± • •KEPT IN TERMS OF THE BIRTHS AND DEATHS REGISTRATION ORDINANCE<

Annex A~

o

It) ,.

QJ

Nr-

cr.When andinhere born

/

(4)

?., if any45 '•?'{ 4« /I *!'•}«*»

S1U M l W Q

(SI .Narnr; anil surname

iiffotherKKMX

CHAN

X.

Mama and ma f densurname of moitier

WONC,

% f

CT,Rank or profession

ol* i'iilhfr

dm.Sigma u:i£

ofrciiisti.tr

O

Name tf .uf.lc j *H\..icv*l!<itiim pi hi i l l

<*KftTIF|F,Dlabcatruecopyofancniryin thercgtsCernfbirlhsm Hong Kong (his

> •;.. 1.1 £t *M ITION-—Any rftrson who ( I ) îlsifies any «f the particulars nn this certificate, or (2) uses s falsified ccrtififinâ^TTuc, knowing if' lo'bc falsc7fc Mable to irfu^culiun.- ; i f . —<f ;fuf J^ J r . f c K - ^ A ^ a i l f ^ i ^ f E W i f l l l f J t i -.)•«»». iff O t t f f i f l U l f i W f l : f t t t « t t l H V I » { ff'astRWâo

... D529036


inir>

COofz

BIRTHS AND DEATHS REGISTRY HONG KONG§ m a n t± a &

s**&

S^-fcss Vaifi&?4r

Annex C

,J*CERTIFIED COP^ OF AN ENTRl IN A REGISTER OF BIRTHS' * * £ R f i r * » « * « W » J I ; t

KEPT IN TERMS OF THE BIRTHS AND DEATHS REGISTRATION ORDINANCE

Hon$ Kong pcrnan-n «• idtn ..LJ s LiJtr^3} of ib. Fu-fl Sv "cJv k n T" fc j

11*1 E* t **>~j \ « ^ ifWhen I Sipa/urc j Nsm*. & juided dllcc

rrg.s.UdK o orhifth

OWN WOMC,

CERTIFIED to be a ifuc tvj^v of ae cmr) m the rep>ier of

3 Ti* i> d vcritiuaie n«^ trui- I nm\'«t a i** h« f ji<t i* iiihle taAm r *" ** whf* f h ls!*itv* an\ ofthc jf*a-ii^u*ar« o* this M

— us 'vx-t : t -

N2 479541

BIRTHS Vs'D DEVTHS REGISTRV HONG KONG§ ?t £ JE a a jg

§

SPECIMENAnnex,

CERTIFIED COPY OF AN ENTRY IN 4. REGISTER OF BIRTHS« « ^ J ? H W « « a S K t t » ±

k£i*7 IN TtKMb Of THE BIRTHS \,ND DEATHS RtGISTRVTION ORDINANCE

iaj A

Nanc if a ^ orprc'r-iipa

00 <!2jiioof. kooj- per >a^cot r

[dto« v f - r-SJ(Op l i ^ l E

i ircimmiiTjNot t uci ^

o

vJr

*O

HfN^^T/^i

H •fl

.TI *ft

X

CERTIFIED Jo b< a true cop\ of an ene-\ m the regiuer o/ btnh< .n Hong kong ihi^

C M TJON — m person v-ho f 1 1 faiyn^s a&\ or r* on ihi*; cer invcie o* • 21 use* a f.iinrui ccn fi&i9 j*> true. knnunj »i 10 be fa'sc j«; I ah t. it pru>uuuoaSPEC::,;ZN

N2 479542


IMMIGRATION DEPARTMENTH5M6 KONG

.RTMEHT. llJ

Annex FOWGrNAL—WHITE PAPERDUPLICATE— YEtLOW PAPER

Reference

Name of child£j£Sex

Permit to Remain in Hong Kong* m m m * «r a

Date and pface of birth

Birth entry number

Name of father

Name of mother

Address »n Hong Kong

The holder, whose particulars appear above, ts permitted to remain* m 4 » # A ( * • » A £ »» io ± ) » H » « ft * S B O »

in Hong Kong on the followrng conditions;—

I 0 2355

Immigration Officer sauthenticating stamp

£»

\ §

2*

I

a0

»

CJC5E>

i2.

ff\52D

DO,** i

TDK-»•o

§

\*ifv*FW.v oi.'*r/p

;:vgH£g&;'*Vyn^.*crvr*-- - . • • „ . . *~v-*5-» -. *;. */•-» •.-*r-'O

"•^^S*:'.V. - • • . • • • •••«-S;X'•

:«-• ;;-/ ;^;•^'

r ! -^:-.-i ivv-.^:?:$,-•?#6>^r'

ii

3

Section 4 Annex (13) :63C I

Immigration Endorsements

i) (ES) Permitted to remanuntil-

S E R V » C £

2 4 APR 1991KONG'

ii) extended uata

IMMIGRATION. S E R V I C E

2 4 APR 1991* . .

HONG KONG

ill) Tht holder of this travei documenthas the right T« und ?n Hong Kong;No viss is requif».tf.(Section 3H), immigrationCap, 115, Laws of Hong Kong)

The holder arrived Hcng Kong

on

and was permitted to land*

I M M I G R A T I O N. SERVICE

2 4 APR 1931fHONG KONG

SERVICE

2 4 APR 1991fHONG KOMG

v)

vii)

ix)

Holder's eligibility for Hong Kongpermanent identity card verified

vi)

IMMIGRATIONSERVICE

2 4 APR 1991> • •f H O N G KONG

iriii)

IBS) S7UDEKT. p«rmission tountil

2 4 APR 1991

'•HOMO

(ES) Previous cbnditiotyi ofstay Ate hereby

SERVICE:|2 4 APR 1991

RONG KONG'

(ES) STUDE4T-Pcrmitted to resoamuntil

SSRVICE

APR


Annex J

Director of Immigration(Attn.: Extension Section)

Dear Sir,

(Name of Applicant)

d.o.b. ' M/F

~ The captioned child applies for admission to(Name of School) ' . an aided* school in Hong Kong.

From tne identity papers attached, it is noted that theapplicant does not hold any documents as stipulated at Para.4 of the General Administration Circular No. onEntry of Alien Children to Schools in Hong Kong issued on

2. For the purpose of considering his/her application,I should therefore be grateful if you would advise me, withinone month from the date of this letter, whether the childbelongs to one of the categories of status mentioned atPara. 4 of the said circular for admission to public-sector -schools.

*Please modify if necessary


POLICY ON QRXENZ&TIGNr DRY FOR SECXMORY ONE STUDENTS

1. To help new students to become familiar with the history,environment, rules and culture of the school.

1.1 To speed up their integration.

1.2 To reduce their anxiety in the transition from primary tosecondary education so as to learn happily and effectively inschool.

1.3 To establish realistic expectations of school life.

2. To establish tripartite relationship between new students, theirparents and the school.

2.1 To promote open communication with introduction to variouschannels available for mutual understanding and futureconsultations.

2.2 To make new students aware of the accessibility to guidance andsupport from teachers and senior students in the course of theirintegration and participation in school activities.

1. A half day programme to be held at least a week before thecxxnmera ment of a new academic year.

2. All SI new students and their parents to attend the programme.

3. The programme ccxtprising (a) a hall assembly, (b) a classteacherperiod and (c) a tour to tie school ground and facilities, coveringthe f ollc&ting areas :

3.1 Organisational IssuesHistory of school- School policies- Disciplinary regulations- Student handbook & record- Layout of physical facilities

3.2 Student Affairs- School unif orm- Schooling & holidays- Lunch break- Counselling- Extra"-curricular activities


~ 2 -

3.3 Introduction of key school personnel- Principal- Counsellors— classteaciiers- Social worker- Senior students (prefects & peer guiders)

3.4 School Expectations- on learning attitude- on punctuality- on manner & behaviour

4. A warm atmosphere ttiroughout to facilitate open cxanraunication betweenparents ard teachers, new students and the seniors*

5. Administration of the programme involving representatives ofDiscipline Oamittee and Counselling Gaomdttee with the assistance ofGeneral Services Conmittee.

6. Head of Student Affairs Department to monitor , and evaluate theprogramme.

7* Co-<2 dirator of the programme assigned by the monitor to plan andimplement the programme*

8* All SI class teachers to participate actively throo tiout the

9. Prefects and peer guiders to show new students and parents around,and to respond to questions raised.

10. Checklists to ensure a systematic preparation and to identify strongand weak points of the programme in progress.

11. The programme can benefit new students and their parents more withtuilt-in follcw up procedures.

EftSIS OF DISCRETION :

Hie above policy will be varied by the School ministration afterconsultation with the staff.

PROCEDURES :

As shown in the working schedule at Appendix


Workincr Schedule

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

TimeScale

early-June

early-Junemid-June

late-June

late-June

early-July

early-August

mid-August

late-August

late-August

late-August

Action

Review past experience (evaluation frcm lastorientation day)

1. set/revise objectives and specific targets oforientation day.

2. set date of orientation day.

Allocate man-power and resources for orientationday

Inform General Services QDKimittee to do :1. school uniform specimen & handbook matters2* arrangernent of drinks for orientation day3. setting date of completion of summer cleaning

First meeting1. Tasks :

(a) setting of programme schedule(b) decoration & seating arrangements(c) selection of master of ceremorrf(d) modif ication of information issued to

parents and students(e) briefing with SI class teachers & social

worker(f) training of students (Peer Guidance Group)(g) board display(h) preparation for the speech to parents and

students2. Set deadline for the above tasks.

1. Training of students (Peer Guidance Group)2. Preparation for board display

Second meeting1. Qiecking progress of the tasks in E.2. Checking school premises for this occasion.

Briefing with SI class teachers and the socialworker.

Orientation day

Evaluation of orientation day1. questionnaire from parents2. coranents fron teachers involved

— smoothness of programme schedule- attainability of objectives and specifictargets

Code ofworkinggroup(s)

b,c,d

a,b

a,b

b/c, d/e

c,d,e,

c,d

c,h

c,d

c,d,f,g

a,b,c,d,£,g,ha,b,c,d,e,f,g

Section 4

- 2 -

Annex (14) p.4

a. Principal

b. Students Affairs1 Department Head

c. Ccxmselling Committee

d. Discipline Ocmmittee

e. General Services Qxnmittee

f. Sdbool Social Worker

g. SI Class Teadbers

h« Students (Peer Guidance Group)

(I) A.

Section 4g. ^ ^ =** =.* £ *£ il •

^£ f@ A W n PERSONAL DATA OF PUPIL

Annex (15)EDUCATION DEPARTMENT HONG KONG

PUPIL RECORD CARD

91/11/05Date of Issue: Current Grade:

P3

Pupil Record Card No

SexM ^£E

Date ol

School Attending

Z4264835

3sl *3 * 07

SS 61999

Name of Pupil

n os 0MM DD

Sffi TINName

CHU

fHK

HOK

HIN SING

£ Jii £ £5 B8 {*T / If rt= •£•(&•& / S^BSft^ Z426A81Birth Certificate/HK ID Card/Passport No «-•»«. w-ruj

PRIMARY SCHOOL PM

, ,41 £ 1" Chinese

1£ 1 «f » 5fe MNon-Chinese Speaking

^®ife® VAHome Area

B. HISTORY OF SCHOOLING

School Code Name

46990 MING KWONG PRIMARY SCHOOL PM61999 TIN HOK PRIMARY SCHOOL PM

fil From

Date &ftMBDD Grade

89 09 01 PI91 09 03 P3

To

S ft Date$YYJ1MM0DD Grade

91 07 10 P2

ED/PRC1

(II) C St§¥ - ^^IS / !&!l!ixjali FORM A: REPORT OF PUPIL LEAVING/ABSENT FROM SCHOOLForm

CHU HIN SING 83 * 07 £ 08 0

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

ED/

Name of Pupil

^tt«W TIN HName of School

JtttttftSftGrade Last Attended

L JL. Date of Bi"p X In Chinese

OK PRIMARY SCHOOL PM ttS'J MSex

16 17 18 23

P Last day of 4£ J§ 0Sch. Attendance YY MM DO

rth YY MM DD

ftWMPJB For Office Use 6

24 25 i 6199Q rj-\

7

Address of Pupil Tel:

Name of Guardian Relationship Occupation Office Tel.

n fl,^ Changew rx School

n *w cs Moving•** House

] U Si Emigration

_J Si& Others

fhe pupil *is/is not an active

Remarks:

3 REASON FOR LEAVING/ABSENT FROM SCHOOL

New School (AM/PM/WD)

New Res. Add. " Tel.

Destination - Date of Departure

Please specify

s case of the school's SGO. If yes. write the SCO's name. Ms. #±

Signature of Head of School

^$ ' Bft£jtti!U$ ) {Further information on the non-attendance.) "" "| jjjj" Date

PH/IOOAK

(III)This is to acknowledge receipt of Form A for the following pupil and the matter is receiving attention.

Name & Address of School

TIN HOK PRIMARY SCHOOL PMPING SHEK ESTATEKOWLOON

££9%M. 61999

Pupil Record Card Number & Name of Pupil

Z4264835CHU HIN SING

tt f * EDUCATION DEPARTMENT


FORM A: REPORT OF PUPIL LEAVING/ABSENT FROM SCHOOL Forai

Name of SchoolTIN HOK PRIMARY SCHOOL PM

In Chtnese

fl »lSex

16 17

A.Grade Last Attended

Jiif* I 3 H N J WLast day ofSch Attendance

24 25 1

For Office Use e

61999 |T

Z4264835

fjui n JiiAddress of Pupil

IE ITel

Name of Guardian.

Relationshipft 18Occupation

anna.ua •>., 3Office Tel. J-5 3

C ^.'lift ft / SfelSJjRIB REASON FOR LEAVING/ABSENT FROM SCHOOL

.V ChangeSchool

D aUS MovingJS '" House

Q] ft 1C Emigration

[] JUUi Others


New Res Add

BMJftDestination Date of Departure

Please specify

Mr.Ms.The pupil "is/is not an active case of the school's SCO If yes, write the SGO's name.

E. flu till ( (i ffi A '\ ifc r3Rfi'j Jt fife ft ft ' iTilf'nttWn ) (Further information on the non-attendance.)

Remarks: ^^ED/PR/ 106AP ' ~ " ' ———

Tins is to acknowledge receipt of Form A for the following pupil and the matter is receiving attention.

'PM

fct

Tel.

Signature of Head

Date

T-ifcol Code

61999

Pupil Record Card Number * Nam€ of Popil

PING SHEK ESTATEKOWLOON

CHU HIN SING

ft ft V? EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

(II) FORM A: REPORT OF PUPIL LEAVING/ABSENT FROM SCHOOLForm

Name of Pupil75 $12 j; 10

' Date of Birth YY MM DO

AName of School

SHATIN SECONDARY SCHOOLSex

16 17

Grade Last AttendedLast day ofSch. Attendance

*t ft* Will For Off ice Use 6

2* . 2s i 32999 fT

K3011546B.

Address of Pupil -,«UiMTel:

/,« % £ + r* of Guardian Jfr> <yJ&

tt&/tk&mia REARName of Guardia Relationship Occupation Office Tel.

>i/_/_

ChangeSchool

l\; Emigration

fe Others

REASON FOR LEAVING/ABSENT FROM SCHOOL


HWJfiDestination

fe ;To.'110 f I R QDate of Departure

Please specify

D. »'!-. *^/ . , .71»e puptl *is/rs not an active case of the school social worker. If yes. write the SSW's name

E. f/U«l. t f i fWai Wj^ft'J Jlffelftll • iUl'.Jltmn ) (Further information on the non-attendance.)Remarks"

ED/PR/ 106AS ' " — —•

Mr.

S1

ftftttTC Signature of Principal

Ifltlj Date

(III) ft $J K "ij /Ji >J: ,> fft f|! &$ L! i|Jc •£ ' jfe /i; jijJ 111 .This is to acknowledge receipt of Form A for the following pupil and the matter is receiving attention.

OTATTM cirnwmiv^cntrrw!? $'t"£I& fJfi5*a^i'fett Pupil Record Card Number & Horn* of PupilSHATIN SECONDARY SCHOOL K3011546WO CHE ESTATE T1?F T A T T A TSHATIN NT UE UI

K ff 7? EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

RecID

6

5

1

School Code L5. £ ?ll

5

' l?l

Pupil Record Card No.

7 15

K> /,*?,/,£,;$• î0iK\ 3lc3le? 1 D\ 7 -2-171

t

1

1

1

i

See

> i < ? i 3 i 0

t \ i

i i i

i i i

i i i

i i i

i i i

i t i

f

I

I

|

1

f

i

Note Overleaf

School

IC*I

i I

I

I

i i

I I

I

I

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

Aiat

O)

•o'Esl

16 17

$\2S\£

iii

J

IIChop

1

EDUCATION DEPARTMENT, HONG KONG

m & & i* m m ••%PUPIL RECORD SYSTEM #fo LJ Wl

^ ^ I f ^ ^^ i ^ ^^ Form l^]^ oForm for Admission of Transferred Pupils ^^^^ g»

53£*

Namfinf Schnnl .C^/^ T T A/ StCffAfDAR V SCHOOL

±an\m1 st Day of Attendance

in this School

*f- JlYR. MN.

18

ii

DAY

23

2 1 jO ^j / *Î ' i *^ 1 / 1 i I */

?, f , <?,?^1 / (?l f

1 i

1 1

1 1

1 1

1 1

i 1

1 I I „!

Telei

nnnDate

/ IO*

/ \d

i

i

1

I

i

I

Jfione

/

E C Oll24 25

Ki6

K\3/Vi /

itiiii

,,.,»UJL«.,

Name of Pupil (in English)

CHZUhJb CHl KltiC,

~iONh AJZ/V6 WMA/6

n<? n^K \^0l.

tt

CO

FAf

/f

Total No. of Pupils on this sheet

Nn / 7 ^ / f5"^

HK ID Card/HK Birth Certificate No.

(if any)

KlUtS-} c o )K$JAk }±(.})vot>$e1<±(t)

3

ttiSignature of Head of S<

ft^tt:î(Name of Head of S(

(in BLOCK le

Name of School Last Attended

*T A -7 V?" Z~ CfU-iQrtf <&M/pji*rwi>)Ins. j & & «-> i*'" */|/ *-

/* U- 7 T? C ^* C/*i-//)/)/ (A>T/P£A7Wl))v--«TJu / , /_ o JtC' . &*"\\vUL~

P7h//* "T7A//» C^/* (*W//M/ (A>t?ew/wi))* «*• ™C/ i **/¥€••/ ex vtx- • 13 CxfT*'*'/-

(AM/PM/WO)

(AM/PM/WU)

(AM/PM/WD)

(AM/PM/WDJ

(AM/PM/WD)

(AM/PM/WD)

(AM/PM/WD)

ihool A? A^, f . (7) £AA^*&~

iEW) ^^r!100! >Lf«A/6 yz« AJZA/<^ 2^J6tters) ^-^ «^/Tw / -^ *

&&

'p

LP

Record ID

§ m « w ®EDUCATION DEPARTMENT, HONG KONG

PUPIL RECORD SYSTEM

Form for New Admission of Pupils Who Have Never Been Issued a Pupil Record Card BeforeForm G

School Code

Grade

P 2«:WSax

49

M

*W'*V/JilFor Office usea it

& 1 9

13

N (y

Dale of BirthSOY

0

Y

3M

0M

7

Grade6 7

P 3fUJfSex

49

F

Grade• 7

p|3tts<

49

m

F

•.# tro winFor Office useH H

D

CJD56

366

Z

p

9 9 Name of School TIN HOK

Name of Pupil

n#mnr

HK Oirlit C

S

13

K flDate of Birth

60Y

g

Y

,2M

0M

£"

ttffttwiiFor Office use6 M

0

^

065

-f

N t^

\y*mftuuiiicat

c HI/riifl.'f&ft/JIJHtttff•/HK IP .Cjftl/PftUport No.

67

0|3l3 I / 7

iNon-Cftin

A/

itUHuAi

09

K

itUiin«•«

70

(o

!

PRIMARY

1111 DRV o( Alt«n«t«nc*

iniiir Sell71Y

?

Y

f

M

D

M

?.

D

D

O76

3

SCHOOL. PM

48

Sp. Ed.

77 A B 78

Toloohone No. *•* i* * ^"Q^. I

'|'WWtf>lM*'fett* • tfliJIWSSPA Pupil Nunibur. if any

78 87

Giada Admitted

88 89

P

Name of Pupil

Mj |5|lU | • 1 ll 1 ItJ rf | IA. rt\<?

HK Biiih Cerliticaift/HK ID Card/Passport No.54 67

Z o

13

5^litffeMJW

Daio of DirlhW1

sY

2M

0M

2D

1956

i

fi

O

K\Mi

l\6\8

1\

3Non-Chin88 ip

N

MHum*

69

K70

S

!' &4.KAX.h#fli*

1st Day of A«l«nd»nc»in li.i firh

71Y

1»'

1

Name of Pupil

T l N c, 5 H UL

HK Oirth C«(tifica|e/HK ID C»«d/Pfl$spon No.66 67

Z o 0 iFnl/|2Non C'htn6B»p.

HwtwAtM

69 70

K|t

M

*

M

90

0O76

4

1Sp. Ed.

77 A

48

B 78

-^

» Remarks

M'WfftaiWJ-tfttt » tftfllWSSPA Pupil Number, if any

79 87

>M Day of AltMticUnc*inthi Seh

7IY

*?Y

1M

O

M

?D

0O76

3

tWftfYSp Ed.

77 A

48

8 78

A9INUGrid* Admitted

88 89

P 3

fttiH Remarks

SSPA Pupil Number, if any79 8?

Grwte Adiniilad

68

P83

3

ifiUl". Remarks

School Chop

I certify that,(a) to the best of my knowledge,

all the pupil particulars listedabove are correct, and

(b) (applicable to governmentand aided primary schoolsonly) all the pupils listedabove are entitled to a schoolplace in the public sector.

Total No. of Pupils on this sheet .

AJ»»ISignature of Head of School , . K •

When completing columns 68, 69-70 and 77-78, please refer to the note overleaf.

Name of Head of School(in BLOCK leliers).

HtflDate .

TIK HoN

O

a

PUPIL RECORD SYSTEM, EDUCATION DEPARTMENT, HO

^ £ f f 4 IE IE Pupil Particulars Amendment Form

i\re KONG

Form D*«ktttf*BSI

f Pupil Record Card No M

f, L4JJ «Zt^ /,

#F&Grade15 16

M?***£Name of Pupil

M,WWSex

53

I, •S.w.E.Tnit- n w

Date of BirthMYJ yJ_M_[_M | D (DM

i t i 1 I

M I ZiA/i i t i i i i tftrtmri -unlit / ft?6A»w/aiM««

HK Birth Certificate/HK ID Card/Passport No68 71

i i i i i i 1 < i i i

i i

11 V8H"LNon-Chin Sp72

1 i

&€JfcftHome Area

73 74

1

| t 1 i tft#tttfxh«miw1st Day of Attendance

in this Sch75 Y| Y | M | M | D |0 80

t I 1 I 1

1 i 1

Af«£ttGrade Admitted81 82

i

Pupil Record Card Nomm

Gradeis t« Name of Pupil

Sex

J I L_J LIttTHIW

Date of BirthY | M | M | D |0 58

J * i t i i t i » i i

HK Birth Certificate/HK ID Card/Passport No60 71

J L

Non Chin Sp

72

J L

Home Area

73 74

t t > » «

1st Day of Attendancein this Sch

75 Y| Y | M | M | P |0 SO

i I i i i

I I L

Grade Admitted81 82

f*«»fc»M!Pupil Record Card No H

i i i i i i i i

9*GradeIS 16

i

17

(

nwSex

S3

i i i i i

ttltHJWDate of Birth

MY| Y | M | M | D |D 58

i i i i i

*£tt£Name of Pupil

t f i i i t i i t i i

M,'H1 »iMft/fr*!M»/»Mtt«HK Birth Certificate/HK ID Card/Passport No

60 71

1 i I I I I I I I I I

#*«HMNon Chin Sp72

%Lm&$kHome Area

73 74

,

ft*«t*!-«IIJW1st Day of Attendance

in this Sch7 S Y ) Y | M | M | D |08Q

f I I i I

52

ATWttGrade Admitted81 82

l

Instructions:

In completmg this form, the School Code, the pupil s Pupil Record Card Number and Grade (boxes 1 to 16) must beinserted If any of these items requires amendment, please do not amend it using this form but contact the relevantschool liaison officer

0 fu ^ o ,oignature or Head of School i

Only the box(es) for the item that requires amendment should be completed Boxes for the other items should be leftblank

3 £«Cif fl V*f'1 (W72 ft)/t*M»W<«73 ?^74fij)rBffl » W*BflPRWffi« °For the amendment of Non-Chinese Speaking Indicator (box 72) and Home Area (boxes 73 to 74), please refer to theNOTE overleaf

Name of Head of School -r-_ ..,(m BLOCK letters) f g/vw

i

41

ut

ED PR/I'*?

Annex (16)Section 4

SCHOLARSHIPS, GRANT AND LOAN SCHEMES AVAILABLE TOSTUDENTS OF SECONDARY 6 AND SECONDARY 7

(1) Agricultural Products and Marine Fish Scholarship Fund- Scholarships and Grants for Senior Secondary School Students

(2) American Women Association Scholarship

(3) Belilios Trust Fund

(4) Chiap Hua Cheng Foundation Maintenance Grants

(5) Education Scholarships Fund

(6) Grantham Maintenance Grants

(7) Government External Scholarship

(8) Government Maintenance Grant

(9) Helen Liang Memorial Scholarships

(10) H.K. Rotary Club Students' Loan Fund and Sing Tao Foundation Students' Loan Fund

(11) India Association Scholarship

(12) Li Po Chun Charitable Trust Fund Scholarship

(13) Nehru and Tagore Scholarship

(14) Royal H.K. Jockey Club Scholarship Fund/The Wah Kiu Yat Po Fund for the Reliefof Underprivileged Children

(15) Scholarships tenable at United World Colleges

(16) Singapore Government Scholarship

(17) Tak Kau Che Hian Kok Scholarship

(18) Woo Hay Tong Scholarship

Section 4 Annex (17)Ref.: ED(RB) 857/92 EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

HONG KONG

1 July 1992

GENERAL AOyD^ISTE^ATION CIRCULAR NO, 20/92

Expulsion and Suspension of Pupils(A Chinese version will follow)

This circular advises schools on the appropriate measures tobe taken before contertplating expulsion or suspension of pupils. Itshould be read in conjunction with General Administration Circular No*35/90 dated 14 November 1990.

2. There has been growing concern over current practices of saneschools in advising pupils to leave school voluntarily as an alternativeto expulsion. The Education Department has critically examined thepresent situation and is of the view that such practices areeducationally undesirable, and defeat the purposes of providing schoolswith various resources to promote education for all abilities and toprovide free and conpulsory education opportunities for all children upto junior secondary level, including problem children. It is also notedthat some parents who have been advised to withdraw their children fromschools may not realise that they have the right to refuse such advice.

3. Heads of schools are therefore reminded

(a) that they should admit pupils referred by the Directorof Education, particularly those 'drop-outs1 under 15years of age, to fill vacant places;

(b) that they should not oblige their pupils to leave schoolor withdraw 'voluntarily1. In case where a parentgenuinely wishes to withdraw the pupil, the schoolshould inform the District Education Officer concerned;and

(c) that they should provide maximum possible guidance andcounselling services to pupils to help them solve theirlearning and behaviour problems.

4. Heads of schools are requested to observe the followingguidelines before contenoplating expulsion or suspension of pupils fromschool :

(a) Expulsion of Pupils

Expulsion of pupils from school should not be institutedunless it is absolutely necessary and when such anaction has to be taken, the provisions in the Codes ofAid should be complied with. Pupils must not beexpelled solely on the ground that they are academicallyweak. Before contemplating expulsion of pupils, schoolsare advised to observe as far as possible the attachedProcess Flowchart for Handling Pupils with BehaviourProblems (Annex I).


(b) Suspension of Pupils

The Education Departinent does not consider suspensionfrom school a generally appropriate way to treat amisbehaved pupil. On the contrary, it is feared thatprolonged or frequent suspension from school would havean adverse effect on the development of the pupil andpossibly create more opportunities for furthermisbehaviour or learning difficulties. Under mostciroomstances, the pupil in question should be allowedto continue normal schooling, pending the outcome of anyinvestigation into the cause of his misbehaviour by theschool and, if necessary, he should be referred forprofessional advice* Schools are therefore advised notto suspend pupils from school except under very specialcircumstances, and when taking such an action, to complywith the procedures provided in the Codes of Aid.

It is noted that in many schools, pupils who havemisbehaved badly in class are ordered to withdraw fromnormal classes for a short period of time to cool off.This measure has proved to be useful in the adjustmentof a pupil's behaviour. Schools should thereforeconsider whenever possible suspension from class inplace of suspension from school. Pupils on suspensionfrom class should receive proper supervision andcounselling within the school premises.

(c) Adoption of the Whole School Approach to Guidance andDiscipline in Schools

The main reason for misbehaving is learning oradjustment difficulties in schools* As a preventivemeasure, schools are encouraged to adopt the WholeSchool Approach to guidance and discipline, whereby allteachers in a school should participate actively inassisting pupils to resolve their problems. Teachersshould be made aware of the pastoral care system in theschool and should participate fully in developing ahealthy and positive ethos. The Guidance TeacherResource Book published by the Services Division of thisDepartment would provide good material for reference.

(d) Professional Advice on Counselling and Guidance

Schools should also familiarise themselves with variousfeasible ways of handling problem pupils who mightrequire professional advice through formal and informalcommunication with one another and with externalservices agencies listed at Annex II. including theServices Division of this Department (Annex rm. Inthe^ event of serious delinquent behaviour of pupils,Police Oonmimity Relations Officers of the Royal HongKong Police Force should be involved.

Section 4 - 3 - Annex (17) p. 3

5. The District Education Officers will continue to xoonitorclosely all cases of expulsion and suspension. Heads of schools arerequested to keep a record of such cases should enquiries be required ata later date.

K.H. CHftNfor Director of Education

To : Supervisors/Heads of all Aided Primary }and Secondary Schools including }Prevocational Schools, Special Schools, }Assisted Private Schools, Caput }Schools, and Private Independent }Schools in the Bought Place Scheme }

for necessary action

Supervisors/Heads of Private Primary }and Secondary Schools, ESF Schools

Heads of Sections/Colleges

for information

[MM4:GAC692-2]


Annex IProcess Flowchart for Handling Pupils

with Behaviour Problems in Aided Schools

No

Placementassistancefrom Sp.

Pupil withbehaviour problem,.iCounselling byclass teacher,guidance teacher(s) &discipline teacher(s)

Interview andseek co-operation

Remedial actions byDiscipline Committee,Guidance Team,Deputy Head,Student Guidance Officer/School Social Worker,& Educational Psychologist

Give warning toparents & seektheir co-operation

>r No

Head, EducationalPsychologist & StudentGuidance Officer /School Social Workerto consider the case

Refer to AdjustmentUnit, Sp. Ed. Section /External ServingAgencies withcontinuous conuselling& remedial actionswithin the school

Yes

Parentalconsent sought for

No

Placement assistance fromStudent Guidance Officer /School Social Worker, Non-Attendance Team & DEOs fortransfer to another ordinaryschool

Caseclosed

Section 4List of Serving Agencies

Annex (17) p.5

Annex II

Agency TelephoneNumber

Asbury Village Community 420 1073Centre of Methodist Church

Boys' & Girls' Clubs 527 9121Association of Hong Kong

Caritas - Hong Kong 524 2071

Chinese Y.M.C.A. 420 0266

Christian Family Service 389 1242Centre

Evangelical Lutheran Church 710 8313Social Service

Hong Kong Christian Service 367 0071

Hong Kong Children & Youth 366 7272Services

Hong Kong Federation of 395 0161Youth Groups

Hong Kong Family Welfare 527 3171Society

Hong Kong Lutheran Social 711 9131Service

Hong Kong Y.W.C.A. 522 3101

International Social Service 834 6863

Methodist Epworth Village 558 0108Community Centre

St. James' Settlement 574 5201

Social Welfare Department 576 3083

Yang Memorial Social Service 388 7141Centre

Address

1 Sheung Kok Street, Tai Wo Hau,Kwai Chung

3 Lockhart Road, Wanchai

2 Caine Road, Caritas House, HongKong

32-40 Kwai Shing Circuit, KwaiChung

3 Tsui Ping Road, Kwun Tong

2/F, Lutheran Building, 50A,Waterloo Road, Kowloon

33 Granville Road, Tsim Sha Tsui

6/F, 23 Chatham road South,Kowloon

5/F, 54 Bedford Road, Tai Kok Tsui

Rm. 1003 Duke of Windsor SocialService Bldg., 15 Hennessy Rd.,Wanchai

89 Chung Hau Street, Homantin

1 Macdonnell Road, Hong Kong

6/F, Southhorn Centre, 130 HennessyRoad, Wanchai

100 Chai Wan Road, Chai Wan

85 Stone Nullah Lane, Wanchai

19/F, World Trade Centre, 280Gloucester Road, Causeway Bay

G/F, 54 Waterloo Road, Kowloon


List of Supportive Services to Schools to Help Pupils withBehavioural Problems Provided by Services Division, Education Department

Annex III

Supportive Services

A.

1.

2.

3.

Oil-site Support

Student GuidanceScheme*

Crisis InterventionService

Resource Classes

Peripatetic TeachingService

5. Advisory Service

B. Off-site Support

6. Resource TeachingGoitres

Provision of guidance serviceto primary schools and ident-ification and placement ofdropout students within com-pulsory school age.

Service provided for cases ofemergency, such as studentsuicides. Schools can contactthe Psychological ServicesSubsection by telephone foradvice on the managementmethods.

Classes which provide inten-sive remedial teaching toprimary and junior secondarypupils in the 3 basic subjectson a withdrawal basis.

Provision of visiting teachersto give intensive remedialteaching to primary pupils inschools where resourceclasses cannot be operated forvarious reasons.

Provision of advisory supportand advice to heads andteachers of ordinary schoolson helping pupils with learn-ing difficulties.

Provision of intensiveremedial teaching in the threebasic subjects to primary andjunior secondary pupils withlearning difficulties, whoattend schools whereresources classes cannot beprovided.

ResponsibleUnit/Section

Student GuidanceSection

PsychologicalService Subsec-tion, SpecialEducation Section

IntensiveRemedial ServicesUnit, SpecialEducation Section

Resource Teach-ing Unit, SpecialEducation Section

Special EducationInspectorate Unit,Special EducationSection


Tel. No.

#892 6759

714 7852

#892 6737

#892 6738

#892 6740

#892 6738

Address

#10/F, WuChung House,Queen 's RoadEast, Wanchai,HK

6 Perth Street,Homantin, Kin

#10/F, WuChung House,Queen's RoadEast, Wanchai,HK




Section 4

7. Adjustment Units

Annex (17) p.7

8. Special Schools forMaladjusted andSocially DeprivedChildren

9. Special educationservices including:

i. advisory service

ii. audiological service

111.

IV.

VI.

curriculum develop-ment service

examination service

psychological service

referral and place-ment service

viL research service

Provision of additional sup-port and guidance to primaryand junior secondary pupilswith emotional of behaviouralproblems outside normalschool hours.

Schools cater for maladjustedand socially deprived childrenaged 8:00-15:11 years.

see (5) above

Provision of diagnosticassessment of hearing impair-ment and educationalremedial services for hearing-impaired children.

Development of curriculumand teaching resources forspecial schools and specialeducation classes.

Provisskm of supportiveservice to enable handicappedcandidates to sit for publicexaminations.

Provision of assessmentservices and follow-up treat-ment to children with learn-ing and/or behavioural diffi-culties by a team of professi-onal staff.

Referral of children withspecial educational needs tovoluntary agencies or govern-ment departments for specialeducational services andeducational placement ofhandicapped children tospecial schools or specialeducation classes.

Research studies on issuesrelating to the norming oftests and special educationprovisions by the Psychologi-cal Services Subsection.


Special EducationAdministrationUnit, SpecialEducation Section

#892 6738

#892 6736



Special EducationSection andSpecial EducationServices Centreson Island,

in KowloonandtheNew Territories

#892 6754

561 3441

711 3066

454 3374454 3516454 3204

#10/F, WuChung House,Queen's RoadEast, Wanchai323 Java Rd,3/F, HK6 Perth St.,Homantin, KinTai KingGovernmentOffices, 3/F.,Tsun Wan Rd,Tuen Mun, NT

Section 4

viii screening service

Annex (17) p.8

ix. resource teachingservice

x. training service

xi speech therapyservice

Identification of primaryschool pupils with problemsof hearing, eye-sight, speechand learning with a view toproviding follow-up assess-ment and educational treat-ment services.

see items 4, 6 and 7 above.

Provision of short-term train-ing opportunities for specialeducation personnel in theform of seminars, workshopsand short courses.

Provision of diagnosticassessment and remedialtreatment programmes forspeech and/or language im-paired children.

* The Student Guidance Scheme serves primary school pupils only. For secondary schoolpupils, there is the School Social Work Scheme whereby school social workers from theSocial Welfare Department or voluntary agencies visit secondary schools regularly to providecounselling service to pupils.

# New telephone number/address effective from 25,7.1992.


HOW TO HELP PUPILS WITH PROBLEMS

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Some pupils experience adjustment difficulties and manifestbehaviour problems at some time during their school life. Most ofthese problems are neither serious nor permanent and can beovercome if appropriate help is given in time to the pupilsconcerned. In Hong Kong, different schools employ differentsystems in dealing with pupils' behaviour problems. One commonpractice is for a school to designate a teacher or a group ofteachers to oversee and administer the school's discipline andguidance policy. Such a system enables the school to handlepupils' problem at different levels. Inside and outside theclassroom, teachers are usually the first to detect misbehaviour.Problems of a minor nature are normally dealt with spontaneouslyon the spot. Other problems regarded as more serious are oftenreferred to the "class1 or "form1 teachers who have the pastoralresponsibility for a particular class or year group. If themisbehaviour problems are of a very serious nature, reports aremade to the teachers responsible for guidance and discipline, whowill either deal with the case using the school's own resources orseek other professional assistance. It is considered important thatparents should always be involved in the intervention process,particularly when the problems are perceived to have deep rootsoutside the school. Whatever the steps taken, prevention is betterthan cure.

1.2 The Department believes in a more positive approach in themanagement of pupil problems. The following are some practicalsuggestions for the school to follow.

2. PREVENTION

• Schools should improve internal communication among teachers.

• Teachers should strengthen the communication with parentsthrough interviewing, telephoning, and seminars.

• Parents should not be contacted only when their children are introuble.

• Pupils should be helped to strengthen their problem-solvingskills and stress-coping ability and establish a positive self-image.

• Parents and teachers should not put too much emphasis onchildren's academic achievement. They should pay more attentionto the overall development, especially their emotionaldevelopment.

• Pupils should be given the opportunity to see the School SocialWorker/Student Guidance Officer during class if needed.

• There should be closer co-operation among all professionalengaged in helping pupils to overcome their developmentalproblems.


— 0 —

3. WHO NEEDS HELP

Those who break school rules frequently such as failure to handin assignment, disruptiveness in class.

Those who are withdrawn and without friends.

Those with sudden behaviour or mood changes such as an activepupil becoming: unusually quiet.

Pupils who exhibit the above behaviour can usually drawteachers' attention thereby getting" help. However, we also haveto be cautious in handling those who may react strongly to whatteachers consider to be common disciplinary practice.

4. HOW CAN TEACHERS HELP

Spend a little more time listening and talking to the pupil tobuild up a warm and trusting relationship.

Try to understand the pupil and why he behaves as he does.Encourage him to talk about his own problems. Discussion of hisfeelings and behaviour can shed light on the cause and effect ofhis behaviour.

Be more sensitive to the pupils1 feeling.

If the pupil is receiving assistance from a professional body oragency, co-operate with the professional person(s). Find outhow you can help. A co-ordinated approach is important inhelping the pupil.

Don't attempt to change the pupil's behaviour all at once.Direct his attention to what he can do instead of what hecannot do.

Be warm and concerned but firm and consistent. Help the pupillearn the standards of acceptable behaviour.

Liaise with his parents. Inform them of what you and your pupilare trying to do. Whenever possible, enlist parents' co-operationand support.

Try to be patient. Allow some time for the pupil to change hishabits or behaviour. Reassure him of his success and let himknow his improvement. He may relapse - don't lose heart, tryagain.

Section 4 Armex (18) p 3

5. WHO ELSE CAN HELP

Ask for advice and seek help if you are uncertain about how youshould handle the pupil. Discuss his problems with other peoplewho are also concerned with the pupils' welfare such as hisparents, school heads and ceratin teachers such as the guidanceteacher. If required, seek professional advice from the StudentGuidance Officer, the School Social Worker or the Special EducationSection. Encouragement instead of stigmatization should be givento those who need professional assistance.

THE USE OF DISCIPLINARY MEASURES IN SCHOOLS

The purpose of all disciplinary measures is to change pupil'sbehaviour. The Education Department feels the need to carry outthese disciplinary measures through more positive means.Therefore, the existing practice of handling disciplinary problemsin schools should be scrutinized with regard to their effectivenessand psychological implications on pupils. Clear guidelines ondisciplinary procedures should be drawn up and discussed amongstaff. There is also a need to let parents know about thedisciplinary system within the school.

7. RIDERS IN EXERCISING DISCIPLINARY MEASURES

If some form of disciplinary measures is considered necessary, thefollowing steps should be taken : -

• Teachers should directly inform parents of misconduct of pupiland/or disciplinary measure to be taken. It should be avoidedthat pupils should asked to inform their parents of their ownmisconduct.

• Contacts with parents should focus on soliciting their co-operation and assistance.

• Teachers should be more sensitive to the feelings of pupils whenthey consider the punitive measures to be applied on them.

• Avoid having confrontation with the pupils - such situations willonly breed resentment and mistrust and will aggravate problems.

• When a pupil flies into a rage, keep and stay with the pupil andallow him time to cool off before attending to his needs orproblems.

• Act promptly and seek expert help if required.

c .. A Annex (19)Section 4Suggested Duty List for Careers Masters/Mistresses and their Teams

1. Upkeep a careers corner/Library and careers notice board/s;

2. Update and disseminate information on further education, jobopportunities, job description and changing job requirements;

3. Organize visits to industrial, commercial and academic organizations;

4. Give talks to and organize seminars/conferences for students?

5. Organize talks and seminars/conferences by guest speakers on careersand further education;

6* Arrange employers, local and foreign school representatives to visitthe school;

I. Arrange film shows, slide shows on careers and further education;

8. Organize exhibitions, camps on careers and further education;

9. Form groups to co-ordinate students of the same careers interest foractivities ;

10. Discuss with students their interest, ability etc. relating to careersand the value of work, qualities of a good worker, success in work, etc.;

II. Assist students in applying for further studies and jobs;

12. Write letters of recommendation for students; •

13. Provide individual and group guidance on careers matters;

14- Organize student volunteers for careers programmes;

15. Participate in the activities and liaise with the Hong Kong Associationof Careers Rasters and Guidance Masters;

16. Liaise with the Careers and Guidance Services Section of the EducationDepartment, CAS of the Labour Department, Vocational Training Council,community organizationsr commerce and individual organizations;

17. Research into the needs and problems of students in connection withcareers and further education and initiate programmes, according to theresearch findings;

18. Conduct surveys on careers of graduates/fresh graduates;

19. Interview students who need help;

20. Assist the Principal in preparing student records and transcripts;

21. Provide guidance and assist the Principal in streaming students intoarts, science and any other classes; and

22. Work with panel chairman to incorporate careers education in varioussubject curricula.

Section 4 Annex (20)List of Organisations Providing Support Services to Schools IB Counselling and Guidance

Student Guidance Service

Student Guidance Section, Education Department 839 2519

Hong Kong Student Guidance Centre 839 2554

Kowloon Student Guidance Centre (Kowloon West) 388 4111 - E259

(Kowloon East) 388 4111 - E233

Tsuen Wan Student Guidance Centre 421 6236

Shatin Student Guidance Centre 604 3874

Tuen Mun Student Guidance Centre 455 2348

Non-Attendance Cases Team 839 2577

Careers Advisory Service

Careers and Guidance Services Section, Education Department 399 2184

Careers Advisory Service, Labour Department 835 2044

Special Education Service

Special Education Section, Education Department 839 2521

Hong Kong Special Education Services Centre 561 3441

Kowloon Special Education Services Centre 711 3066

School Social Work Service

Social Welfare Department 322 7774

Asbury Village Community Centre of the Methodist Church 420 1073

Caritas - Hong Kong 524 2071 - E263

Chinese Young Men's Christian Association of Hong Kong 540 0526

Christian Family Service Centre 389 1242 - E251

Evangelical Lutheran Church Social Service - Hong Kong 710 8313

Hong Kong Children & Youth Services 366 7271

Hong Kong Christian Service 367 0071 - E275

Hong Kong Family Welfare Society 414 0141

Hong Kong Federation of Youth Groups 395 0161

Hong Kong Lutheran Social Service 711 9131 - El 12

Hong Kong Young Women's Christian Association 715 9558

International Social Service, Hong Kong Branch 834 6863

St. James Settlement 574 5201 - E343

The Boys' and Girls' Clubs Association of Hong Kong 527 9121 - E 15

The Methodist Epworth Village Community Centre 558 0108 - E 16

Yang Memorial Social Service Centre 388 7141 - E 27


Gang Activities

Symptoms that may indicate gang or triad activities

(i) Unusual gatherings

Normally only pupils approximately the same age group andof similar interests work or play together by themselves. If it isobserved that outside school activities, some pupils of different agegroups (or of different grades), or of diverse interest-groups,gather together during recess or before or after school hours, suchgathering is suggestive of certain unusual activity and it is worthfinding out the reason or purpose of the gathering and pay specialheed to the pupils involved.

(ii) Use of jargon etc.

If it is observed that a pupil uses jargon or slogans whichare not meaningful to an ordinary citizen or are thought to beassociated with triad languages, it may well be an indication thathe is associated with triad members, though it should be borne inmind that some innocent children may have picked up more commonjargon from the TV or the cinema. The use of handsigns or signalsand the possession of triad society writings or poems are more sure'indications of association with or involvement in triad societies.

(iii) Victimization

If a stronger pupil, or a group of pupils, is seen bullying orattacking another pupil, it may be that the pupil being bullied isbeing forced to pay "protection money" or being intimated andcoerced into joining a gang or triad society for "protection".

(iv) Loss or theft of valuables

When a pupil suffers from extortion, he may have to resortto thieving. Hence, reports of loss or theft of valuables may beconsidered symptomatic of gang or triad activities. A suddenupsurge in the number of reports of breakages or loss should becarefully investigated.

(v) Sudden increase in expenditure

If a pupil suddenly has much money at his disposal orgenerously provides food and drink for his schoolmates, especiallyif they are of different age-groups or of diverse interest, it isadvisable to require him to provide an explanation for his sudden"wealth". It may be that he has extorted money from others or hehas been provided with money to entertain his schoolmates in arecruitment attempt.

(vi) Sudden depression or fear

If a pupil suddenly loses interest in his school work, or looksdepressed or frightened, he may be being harassed and needunderstanding and guidance from his teachers.


(vii) Sudden aggressiveness

A pupil may suddenly become very aggressive towards hisschoolmates or even his teachers when he becomes associated witha triad society, thinking that he now has the support of his societyand has no need to take heed of anyone.

(viii) Appearance of intruders or strangers inside or outside schoolpremises

The sudden appearance of intruders or strangers or even pastpupils in the school playground or at the school gate during recessor shortly before or after school may indicate gang activities beingcontemplated on or being carried out among the pupils.

(ix) Sudden irregular attendance

If a pupil suddenly plays truant or becomes unpunctualwithout reasonable explanation, he may be in certain trouble ordifficulty and may need assistance.

Some preventive measures

(i) Promotion of understanding between school and parent

A good understanding of what a pupil does outside school,especially at home, will enable the school to help him moreefficiently. Furthermore, if parents appreciate the important rolethey can play in helping the school to help their children, and areconvinced of the school's sincere determination to help theirchildren, parental co-operation and support will normally beforthcoming. To achieve this end, formal and/or informal contactsare highly desirable. Activities of Parent-Teacher Associations areexamples of these activities.

(ii) Student prefects of discipline

Pupils among themselves have few secrets. Exemplary pupilsmay be appointed Student Prefects of Discipline whose dutiesinclude helping keeping order and settling disputes among pupilsand reporting to teachers irregular or unusual behaviour oractivities among their fellow pupils. Such reports may put teacherson the right track in looking for illegal or undesirable activities,

(iii) Meaningful extra-curricular activities

It is advisable that as far as possible extra-curricularactivities be made more meaningful by conducting free discussionsamong participants on suitable aspects of relevant moral conceptssuch as co-operation, good citizenship, sacrifice, respect for others,etc.


(iv) Checking of toilets, locker-rooms etc.

Toilets, locker-rooms, back staircases and other seldomvisited or secluded places are often meeting1 places for unusualgatherings and should be checked frequently and at irregularintervals.

(v) Checking desks, lockers etc.

Desks and lockers are school property and may be searchedwhen the circumstances justify it. It may not be desirable forteachers to search pupils' satchels or pockets but if necessary,pupils may be told to empty their satchels or pockets themselves.

(vi) Close liaison with Police Community Relations Officers

Police Community Relations Officers are responsible for interalia the organization of the J.P.C. movement in a division, thegiving of talks and lectures to improve Police Public Relations andthe awareness of the public to methods of reporting crime. Inaddition also under their auspices the School Liaison Officer schemeis operated. It is suggested, therefore that teaching staff who feelthat they may have problems may wish to call upon the servicesof these officers in a preventive role.

Investigation procedures

(i) If a pupil is suspected of an undesirable activity, question him andhis schoolmates, especially his close friends.

(ii) It may be necessary and useful to contact or interview his parentsto seek further information and co-operation so as to help thechild.

(iii) If there is a school social worker serving the school, his servicesshould be fully employed.

(iv) Inform the District Education Officer concerned in serious cases orif his advice is required.

(v) If a suspected illegal activity is confirmed through school's owninvestigation or if a serious illegal activity is suspected,immediately report to the police.

(vi) Advise parents and victims that a report has been made to thepolice and seek their co-operation in helping the police in order tostamp out such activity in the school.

Important Note

It must be emphasized that serious illegal activities in schools canbe stamped out only if reported to the police without delay. The police willtreat all reports in strict confidence and will not reveal the names ofindividuals and schools to the press. Furthermore, there is nothing to fear byreporting, for in the last ten years the police have not received any reports ofrevenge attacks and even if there were, the police would take suitable action.



4 September 1991

GENERAL SCHOOLS MISCELLANEOUS CIRCULAR NO. 78/91

Safety in School Laboratories

(Note : This circular should be read by heads,science teachers and laboratory techniciansof all secondary schools. Paragraph 2 ofthis circular should also be read byteachers who may use a science laboratoryfor non-science lessons, and paragraphs 6to 10 and paragraph 20 by teachers of art anddesign, home economics and technical subjects.)

The attention of supervisors/heads of secondary schools is drawnto regulations 21, 24, 26, 27, 31, 32 and 33 in Part V of Hong Kong EducationRegulations 1971 in connection with safety in school laboratories. For ease ofreference, these regulations are reproduced in Appendix A of this circular.

2. If a science laboratory is used as a classroom for non-sciencelessons due to floating class arrangements, the teacher involved should see thatthe pupils:-

(a) do not enter the laboratory unless the teacher is present;

(b) do not disturb or remove any of the science materials in thelaboratory.

New Pamphlet on Laboratory Safety

3. Copies of the pamphlet entitled "Safety in Science Laboratories"(1990 revised edition) were distributed to schools in September 1990. However,schools failing to collect the pamphlet last year, new schools operating witheffect from September 1991, and schools wishing to acquire additional copies forreference are invited to complete and return the request form Appendix B. Therequired number of copies will subsequently be sent to schools by mail.


- 2 -

Hazard Warning Symbols for Containers of Hazardous Chemicals

4. Good housekeeping, regular inspection as well as clear and exactlabelling are essential for minimising accidents resulting from the storage ofhazardous chemicals. In particular, schools should ensure that all containersof hazardous chemicals, including bench reagent bottles, bear appropriate hazardwarning symbols which depict the nature of the chemicals and hence serve toalert the laboratory users. In this connection, 50 sheets of self adhesive labelsbearing hazard warning symbols are now attached for use in school laboratories.

Posters on Laboratory Safety and Laboratory Rules

5. A set of 5 posters on laboratory safety and laboratory rules weredistributed to secondary schools in 1988 and 1989. These posters aim atpromoting laboratory safety and should be displayed prominently in the sciencelaboratories and demonstration rooms. New secondary schools which start tooperate in September 1991 are requested to contact the Science Subjects Section(Telephone Numbers: 8392463 or 8392474) to obtain the above-mentionedposters.

Use of Asbestos in Science Laboratories, Art Rooms, Home Economics Rooms andTechnical Subjects Workshops

6. As pointed out in the previous circulars on laboratory safety,asbestos products especially those containing soft asbestos (e.g. asbestos wooland powder) which easily emit free air-borne asbestos fibres are hazardous tohealth since asbestos is an alleged carcinogen. These microscopic fibres, onceinhaled, will remain in the lungs, possibly developing lung cancer. Schools aretherefore advised to replace all asbestos fire-blankets by fibre glass ones orother suitable substitutes as approved by the Fire Services Department.

7. In the science laboratories, art rooms, home economics rooms andtechnical subjects workshops, asbestos-containing items such as asbestos centredwire gauzes, asbestos boards, asbestos wool/powder, platinised asbestos, asbestosgloves, cooling pads and asbestos sheets should not be used and they should bereplaced by appropriate substitutes as soon as possible.


8. Schools are reminded not to dispose of asbestos products as commongarbage. The only recommended method of disposal is by land tipping. TheEducation Department has made arrangements for the tipping of asbestos wastecollected from schools at Ma Yau Tong, Junk Bay since October 1983. Schoolsare requested to dispose of any asbestos products still in their possession bymaking use of the forthcoming collection and disposal service in October 1990,details of which are as follows :

(i) All asbestos waste should be placed in double, heavyduty plastic bags which are to be sealed at the neck bymeans of adhesive tapes. Type 1 and Type 2 asbestoswaste (see Appendix C) must be packed in separatebags. Bags containing Type 2 asbestos waste should bewhite in colour and marked with indelible ink in Englishand Chinese as follows:

DANGER ASBESTOS WASTE DO NOT INHALE DUST

fe> ffcThe presence of sharp objects could easily damage thebags and this should be avoided by wrapping the sharpends with strong plastic sheets of 0.15 mm thicknessunder proper sealing with adhesive tapes. Improperlylabelled or unlabelled packages will not be accepted.

(ii) Asbestos waste should be delivered by school messengersto the Science Teaching Centre, Advisory Inspectorate, 4Pak Fuk Road, 3/F., North Point, Hong Kong. (TelephoneNo. 8110240).

(iii) Asbestos waste will be collected during the followingperiod of time:

Dates Time

7 - 1 2 October 1991 ) From 9 a.m. to 12:30 p.m.) and 2 p.m. to 4:30 p.m.) on weekdays and 9 a.m.

) to 11:30 a.m. on Saturday

(iv) The staff responsible for delivering asbestos waste shouldproduce on arrival a standard form (Appendix C) dulysigned by the school head detailing the amount of thesubstance to be disposed of. Schools are reminded thatthe above collection service does not apply to thedisposal of other types of chemical waste.


— 4 —

9. A survey on the use of asbestos products in schools was conductedby the Statistics Section of the Education Department in December 1983. Sincethen most schools have surrendered their asbestos products to this departmentfor disposal. As a follow-up exercise, schools are requested to indicate whetherthey still possess any asbestos products by completing Appendix D and returnit to the Principal Inspector (Chemistry), Advisory Inspectorate, EducationDepartment, 5/F., Lee Gardens, Hysan Avenue, Hong Kong, before 8 October 1991.Schools are requested to note that this exercise does not apply to asbestos infixtures or building material. The information gathered will facilitate the needfor future disposal services concerning asbestos products.

10. Any enquiries on replacement and disposal of asbestos productsshould be directed to the respective subject inspectors at the followingtelephone numbers:

(i) Science Subjects Section : 8392463, 8392468and 8392469

(ii) Art Section : 5621006 and 5621967

(iii) Home Economics Section : 5621009

(iv) Technical Subjects : 8392432. 8392433and 8392436

Eye Protection

11. Teachers, pupils and laboratory staff, when working in thelaboratory, should wear safety spectacles (or goggles) in all circumstances inwhich there is any potential risk of eye injury. These protective equipmentshould always be put on when heating chemicals, handling acids, alkalis andother corrosive chemicals, working with glass apparatus under pressure, orcarrying out potentially violent or exothermic reactions. Scratched or defectivesafety spectacles (or goggles) should be replaced without delay because theymay affect visibility and cause strain to the eyes or fail to serve theirprotective function. Dirty safety spectacles (or goggles) should be cleaned witha detergent or disinfectant (e.g. diluted Salvon) as appropriate.

Fire Precautions in School Laboratories

12. Every laboratory must be equipped with at least one appropriatefire-extinguisher, which should normally be installed near an exit and be easilyaccessible, i.e. not more than 900 mm above the floor. The following types offire-extinguishers are suitable for laboratory use :

(a) Carbon dioxide type(b) B.C.F. (Bromochlorodifluromethane) type(c) "Dry powder" type


13. Fire-extinguishers should be inspected at least once every twelvemonths. Discharged or expired fire-extinguishers must be promptly rechargedby a registered fire service installations contractor.

14. In addition, there should be an approved type fire-blanket and twobuckets of sand in every laboratory. All laboratory staff should be familiarwith the operation and handling of these appliances, which must be kept in astate on instant readiness at all times.

15. Schools should conduct fire drills regularly. All pupils, teachersand laboratory staff should be familiar with the escape routes form thelaboratories.

16. Schools are reminded that for safety reasons, all exit doors in thelaboratories should never be locked during lessons. Furthermore, the passagesfor the laboratory exits should always be kept clear of obstacles.

17. Whenever a laboratory is not in use, its gas and electricity suppliesshould be switched off at the mains.

18. Staff should ensure that fire-resisting doors are closed, but notlocked. The gas supply and electricity should be turned off at the mains ifpracticable when it is necessary to evacuate the laboratory. It is essential thatlaboratory staff know the positions of mains controls.

19. If liquefied petroleum gas is used in the laboratory, formal approvalmust be obtained form the Director of Fire Services and all Fire servicesrequirements formulated for such purpose must be observed at all times.

20. As advised by the Fire Services Department, schools are remindedto ensure that ethyl alcohol should not be stored together with kerosene andthinner in the laboratory, workshop, art room or in any other room within theschool premises, including the dangerous goods store.

General Guidelines in case of Fire in the Science Laboratory

21. When there is a fire incident or a serious accident (e.g. explosion)occurring in a science laboratory, all available staff should be made use of toevacuate immediately the pupils from the laboratory, or all the pupils from theschool building if the situation becomes serious. It is essential that any suchevacuation should be carried out in an orderly, controlled manner, and thatevery effort should be made to avoid panic amongst pupils. At the same time,the Fire Services Department should be quickly notified by dialling 999. TheEducation Department should also be notified of the incident.

Disposal of Picric Acid

22. Picric acid (2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol) is potentially explosive in thedry state when subjected to heating or friction. This chemical should not bestored in the school laboratory. If schools still possess this chemical, theyshould not attempt to dispose of it by themselves but to contact the ScienceSubjects Section for advice.


- 6 -

Storage and Handling of Potassium and Sodium

23. The attention of science teachers and laboratory technicians isdrawn to the storage of potassium and sodium metals in their laboratories.These metals should be covered with paraffin in well-sealed glass bottles inmetal containers and stored dry. Old samples of potassium and sodium(especially the former), which appear yellow due to the formation of superoxides,are liable to explode upon friction or shock; it is therefore strictly forbiddento use these old samples for practical work or to cut them into small pieceswith a knife as it would entail an explosion. As a general guide, it isadvisable:

(i) to purchase these metals only in small quantities (i.e.to keep not more than lOOg of each metal in thelaboratories);

(ii) to date-stamp the samples upon arrival;

(iii) to check the stock of sodium/potassium in thelaboratory regularly, making sure that there is enoughimmersion liquid. An additional label showing thename of the immersion liquid should be stuck on eachcontainer. Bottles of sodium/potassium should not bestored together with those containing phosphorus (toavoid confusing the immersion liquids); and

(iv) that sodium and potassium should never be stored inrefrigerators.

24. If schools have doubts or difficulties in the disposal of old samplesof sodium and potassium or other dangerous chemicals, they should contact theScience Subjects Section for advice.

Experiments Involving Human Blood and Cell Sampling

25. A number of experiments commonly demonstrated by teachers orassigned as pupils' practicals in the teaching of Biology, Human Biology orIntegrated Science may involve taking human blood and cell samples. Examplesinclude human blood grouping and the preparation of a temporary mount ofhuman cheek cells and blood smear for examination under the microscope.Taking human blood and cell samples in schools carries a risk of transmittingblood borne diseases such as AIDS (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome) andViral Hepatitis B. Schools are advised that such practices should bediscontinued.


Use of Naphthalene in Science Experiments

26. Naphthalene was formerly used in science experiments in melting-point determination in Secondary 1 and in the study of cooling curve inSecondary 4 Physics. However, it is known that some 4.5 per cent of local bornmale babies suffer from G6PD (giucose-6~phosphate dehydrogenase) deficiencywhich would last for life and that people with such deficiency when exposed tonaphthalene (mothball) may suffer from haemolysis (destruction of blood cells).In addition, naphthalene is harmful by inhalation, ingestion and skin contact.Recent syllabus revisions have suggested replacing the use of naphthalene bywax and octadecan-1-ol in the above experiments respectively. They areconsidered as safer alternatives.

27. Science teachers are advised to note the hazardous nature ofnaphthalene and the syllabus changes. They are also advised to replacenaphthalene with safer alternatives.

28. Schools are advised to request parents to report G6PD deficiencyand any acute diseases suffered by their children so that precautionarymeasures can be taken where appropriate.

Use of Radioactive Sources for Teaching Purposes in Schools

29. The use of sealed radioactive sources is governed by the "Code ofPractice on the Use of Sealed Radioactive Sources for Teaching Purposes inSchools" (Appendix E). Schools are reminded that compliance with theinstructions stipulated in this code of practice is obligatory. In particular,schools should:

(a) apply for exemption from requiring Radioactive SubstancesLicence for each and every radioactive source to be purchased,

(b) make a fresh application for exemption should there be a changein source custodian,

(c) arrange for routine checks, at intervals not exceeding 6 months,of the efficiency and condition of all sealed sources (by "WipeTest1) and monitoring instruments, and

(d) keep all radioactive substances (including sealed radioactivesources, natural radioactive substances and acidified uranylnitrate solution) in a locked metal container with an appropriatewarning label outside.


—. fi —

30. The radioactive source custodians or AL Physics teachers arereminded that annual disposal of the acidified uranyl nitrate solution preparedfor use in the experiment "Decay and Recovery of Protactinium" is notnecessary. The acidified solution should be poured into a glass bottle insteadof leaving it in the polythene bottle each time after the experiment. Thepolythene bottle can be re-used after cleansing: rinsing it carefully withdistilled water (disposable gloves worn ) over the flush toilet draining away thewater in the toilet for 3-5 minutes. The emptied polythene bottle and theacidified solution contained in the glass bottle should be locked inside the metalstorage container together with other radioactive sources when not in use. Inthis way, the acidified solution can be re-used again and again.

31. Enquiries concerning the use of radioactive sources for teachingpurposes in schools may be made at the Science Subjects Section, AdvisoryInspectorate, Education Department (Tel. 8392465).

Use of lasers

32. Schools in possession of lasers for teaching purposes (typically withmaximum output power not exceeding 1 mW) are reminded that lasers have tobe used with proper precautions. They should appoint a graduate scienceteacher to be responsible for the procurement, storage, issue and return oflasers and associated safety equipment. The teacher should draw up a list ofsafety rules and operating procedures and ensure that these are observed. Anyperson using the laser should be trained in its use and should be familiar withthe safety rules reproduced in Appendix F.

Use of Electrical Equipment

33. The use of electricity in science laboratories is very common andthe potential danger for electric shock is always present. Schools are remindedthat basic safety measures (Appendix G) should be taken when electricity isused in science laboratories.

Awareness of Laboratory Safety

34. An outline of the essential requirements for minimizing thepossibility of accidents in a science laboratory can be found in the newpamphlet "Safety in Science Laboratories (1990)" published by the EducationDepartment. To enhance the standard of safety in school laboratories, thispamphlet should be carefully studied by all science teachers and laboratorytechnicians.

35. g It is suggested that all science teachers should conduct a lesson(or more) on the general aspects of laboratory safety with each class at thebeginning of the school year and that they should emphasize specific aspects oflaboratory safety in detail whenever opportunities come up during the normalscience lessons.

36. It is further suggested that science panel chairmen should arrangeat least one meeting each term to discuss matters regarding laboratory safetywith other science teachers and the laboratory staff. Notes of such meetingsshould be kept in a record book and made available for inspection whenrequired.


- 9 -

Record of Laboratory Accidents

37. It is important that schools should keep a record of all laboratoryaccidents. In order to facilitate easy reference to such incidents, the standardreport form shown in Appendix H to this circular may be used. A copy of thecompleted form should be sent to the Science Subjects Section, AdvisoryInspectorate of the Education Department following each laboratory accident inwhich medical advice has been sought. Schools should note that it is theirresponsibility to ensure that there is adequate insurance coverage againstlaboratory accidents.

Science Experiments performed outside School Laboratories

38. It has been noticed that some science publications advocatedscience experiments to school children to be performed at home. Some of theseexperiments are potentially hazardous (e.g. they either involve the use ofdangerous chemicals or generate reactions which are violently explosive.) It isessential to remind school children repeatedly that such hazardous experimentshould by no means be done by them at home.

39. Science curricula for secondary schools have undergone changes inrecent years. Much greater emphasis is now placed on developing in pupils aspirit of enquiry. The learning of science is no longer confined exclusively tothe classroom and the laboratory. Pupils are encouraged to study the real worldaround them and to acquire information, through simple experiments, forthemselves. However, it is important to ensure that if pupils are to carry outsimple experiments on their own outside the school they should first seek adviceform their teachers on the nature of these experiments.

40. In the past, a number of accidents had occurred when pupilstampered with dangerous chemicals outside the school. Science teachers shouldtherefore advise their pupils against performing potentially dangerousexperiments (e.g. those involving the use of concentrated sulphuric acid, micro-organisms and radioactive substances) outside the school, especially when theyare not sure about the possible hazards of the experiment. The only properplace for potentially dangerous experiments is the school laboratory withqualified supervisory staff in attendance.

41. Enquiries concerning laboratory safety should be directed to ScienceSubjects Section, Advisory Inspectorate, Eduction Department, Lee Gardens, HysanAvenue, Hong Kong. (Tel. : No. 8392463, 8392467 or 8392469).

42. This circular supersedes General Schools Miscellaneous CircularNo.91/90.

Mrs C. H. KONGfor Director of Education

To : Heads of all Secondary Schools - for necessary actionHeads of Sections/Colleges/ILE/Government Primary Schools

- for information


APPENDIX A

Hong Kong Education Regulations 1971

Part V

(21) (1) The supervisor shall ensure that all necessary safetyprecautions are adopted in school workshops and sciencelaboratories and shall modify or extend those precautions as theDirector may require,

(2) The supervisor and principal shall ensure that no instruction isgiven in the use of tools or the operation of machines or inscience experiments except by a responsible teacher.

(24) The Director may limit the number of pupils who may at anyone time receive instruction in any school workshop or sciencelaboratory.

(26) All machinery, machine tools, hand tools and other equipment ina school workshop or science laboratory shall be suitable forthe courses and shall be maintained in proper working order.

(27) No pupil shall be permitted to enter any school workshop orscience laboratory unless a teacher is present.

(31) No poisonous or dangerous substance shall be kept without thepermission of the Director in any place in school premisesexcept in a science laboratory or a store room that has beenapproved in writing for such purpose by the Director.

(32) The principal of every school shall appoint a teacher to be incharge of every science laboratory and store room which hasbeen approved by the Director under regulation 31.

(33) A teacher who is appointed under regulation 32 to be in chargeof a science laboratory or a store room shall :

(a) cause every poisonous substance and dangerous substancein such laboratory or store room :

(i) to be kept in a proper container clearly marked withthe name of the substance, and with the word"Dangerous" or any word or words of similarmeanings; and

(ii) to be stored in a locked room or cupboard, exceptwhen the substance is being used for the purpose ofa lawful experiment in practical science which iscarried out under the control of a teacher; and

(b) keep the key to such looked room or cupboard in hiscontrol.


APPENDIX B

Collection Form

Pamphlet "safety in Science Laboratories'* and

Self-Adhesive Labels bearing Hazard Warning Symbols

Name of School :

Address :

Telephone No* :

Signature of Principal :

Name of Principal (in BLOCK LETTERS)

Name of staff authorised to collect the pamphlets and lables :

Date :

(Schools are requested to send a member of their 'staff to theAdvisory Inspectorate, Education Department, Boom 515, 5/F*f LeeGardens, Hysan Avenue, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong to collect thefollowing iteirs cm Wednesday, 26 September 1990 between 9:30 a«m,- 12:30 p*m* and 2:30 p«m» - 4:30 p*au :

4

(a) Five copies of the English version of the captioned pamphlet

(b) Five copies of the Chinese version of the captioned pamphlet

(c) 50 sets of self-adhesive labels bearing hazard warningsymbols)

.For Official Use

Signature of Collector :

Date :

Section 4Annex (22) p. 12

APPENDIX C

DELIVERS FOHW

Principal Inspector (Chemistry),c/o Science Teaching Centre,Advisory Inspectorate,Education Department,4 Pak Puk Road, 1/F.,North Point,Hong Kong*

Disposal of Asbestos Waste

Pleas6 receive from the bearer the following asbestos iteits andarrange for them to be disposed of :

Type

1 •

2

Item

A* Asbestos board/sheet

B. Asbestos-centred wire gauze

A* Asbestos fire-blanket

B. Asbestos gloves

C* Asbestos cooling pad

D* Asbestos wool/power

E. Platinised Asbestos

F* Others (please specify)

Quantity

(in ttos.)

(in tfos»)

(in Nbs«)

(in Nbs.)

(inNos.)

(in kg )

(in kg }

Total number of packages

Principal's Signature

Note : All asbestosproducts should beplaced in sealeddoubled plastic bags*Type 1 and Type 2 Nanie (IN BLOCK LETTERS)asbestos productsshould be packed in School :separate bags. Incase of Type 2asbestos products

Address :

please stick a label Telephone :with the wordsDANGER : ASBESTOS WASTE

_ _in both English and "* -Chinese*

Nfcte : Please ensure the packages are sealed and correctly labelled('see paragraph 8 of this circular) . -

Section 4 Annex (22) p. 13APPENDIX D

Reply Form re Asbestos Products in Schools

Name of School :

Address : ______

Tel. No.

Please complete Section A, B or C as appropriate, in case of Section A orB, please put a tick in the box provided*

Section A

f~] My school does not possess any asbestos products.

Section B

{ | My school still possesses some asbestos products f but thesQ willbe surrendered to the Education Department during the period 8-13October 1990.

Section C

My school has to retain the following asbestos products aftermid-october 1990 :

Item Quantity

Reason for retaining the above-mentioned products :

(N.B. This survey exercise does not apply to asbestofe in fixtures orbuilding materials.)

Date :

To : Principal Inspector (Chemistry),Education Department, 5/F., Lee Gardens,Hysan Avenue, Hong Kong.

Principal

Section 4 Annex (22) p. 14APPENDIX E

Radiation Board, Hong Kong

CODE OF PRACTICE ON THE USE OF SEALED RADIOACTIVE SOURCES FORTEACHING PURPOSES IN SCHOOLS

1. General Rules

1.1 The use of sealed radioactive sources in schools shall be solely forthe performance of simple experiments to demonstrate fundamentalprinciples, and the sources used and the methods of using suchsources shall be such as to ensure that the degree of hazard isvery smalL

1.2 No demonstrations or experiments involving: the deliberate exposureof students, staff or any other person to ionising radiation shall beperformed.

1.3 Experiments should be carefully planned to minimize the exposuretime, and preliminary rehearsals of the experiment procedure usingsimulated sources should be encouraged.

2. Control of Sources

2.1 The Radiation Board is the statutory body which controls the useand/or possession of radioactive material and irradiating apparatusin Hong Kong. Schools deciding to avail themselves of theopportunities to use sealed radioactive sources should apply to theSecretary, Radiation Board, (c/o Medical and Health Department),Sunning Plaza, 4th Floor, 10 Hysan Avenue, Hong Kong, forexemption from requiring Radioactive Substances Licence.

2.2 It shall be the responsibility of a graduate member of the sciencestaff, who shall be designated the source custodian, to supervisethe use of all radioactive sources within the school. Should thesource custodian leave the school for any reason, a freshapplication for exception will have to made in respect of the newlyappointed source custodian.

2.3 The source custodian shall be responsible for the procurement,storage, issue and return of sources and the correct use of allsealed sources.

2.4 The source custodian shall arrange for routine checks, at intervalsnot exceeding 6 months, of the efficiency and condition ofmonitoring instruments and/or all sealed sources by wipe test*. Allthe results shall be entered into a logbook which shall be madeavailable for inspection by Radiation Board on request. ('Wipe test- The source is wiped with a swab, tissue paper or cotton bud,moistened with ethanol or water; the activity removed is measured.Acceptance limit : 200 Bq)

2.5 All sealed sources failing the routine checks should be consideredas defective and withdrawn from use.

Section 4 Annex (22) p.is

2.6 The teacher in charge of a class shall account for all sealedsources before the period of instructor is concluded.

2.7 Sealed sources should be used by a student only when under thedirect supervision of a teacher.

2.8 The immediate responsibility of radiation safety in any experimentinvolving ionising radiation shall rest with the teacher in charge.

3. Storage and Labelling

3.1 All sealed sources shall be kept in a locked metal container.

3.2 Access to this container shall be limited to authorised members ofthe school staff.

3.3 The metal container shall be permanently labelled in such a mannerto indicate that it contains radioactive substances.

3.4 Individual sources shall be stored in separate, appropriatelylabelled, containers or compartments within the locked metalcontainer.

3.5 Each source shall be quickly identifiable by the user.

3.6 Sealed radioactive sources and their containers shall be permanentlylabelled with the type of radionuclide together with the activity ata specified date.

4. Handling of Sources

4.1 Sealed radioactive sources shall be handled with care andunnecessary handling of sources should be avoided. The followingrules shall apply :

(i) Sources shall be transported between the laboratory andtheir place of storage in their containers.

(ii) Radioactive sources shall only be handled by tongs orforceps. Teachers should note that specially designedtongs for the safe handling of sources are available fromcommercial suppliers.

(iii) Sealed alpha-emitting radioactive sources shall be handledwith extreme care because of the necessarily fragile natureof their constructions.

(iv) Sealed sources should whenever possible be kept at adistance greater than 30 cm from the user, and should bepointed away from the human body.


5. Damage to, Loss of and Disposal of Sources

5.1 Retention of defective, obsolete or unnecessary sources of radiationis undesirable and positive steps should be taken for the safedisposal of such sources Such sources should either be returnedto the supplier and the Radiation Board notified; or be disposed ofin a manner approved by the Radiation Board.

5.2 In the event of damage to, or loss of any sources, the following:shall be notified immediately.

The Senior Physicist, or his Assistants (Tel. : 8900721 or 8900722)

Physics Section, Education Department (Tel. : 8392470 or 8392465)

6 The Degree of the Hazard

6.1 When due consideration is given to the limitation on the type ofsource, the activity of radioactive substances to be used in schools,and the small total time in any one year such sources will be usedby any one teacher or student, the degree of hazard from exposureto ionizing radiation to both teachers and students is very small.However, it is essential that students appreciate the nature of thehazard and the degree of care considered necessary in the handlingof radioactive substances.


APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION FROM REQUIRING

RADIOACTIVE SUBSTANCES LICENCE

Use of Radioactive (Note 1) Sources for Teaching Purposes in Schools

1. Name of School/college

Address

Telephone Number

2. Name, age and qualification of teacher who is designated as sourcecustodian (Note 2).

Name

Mr/Mrs/Miss*«

Age Qualification Obtained Awarding Institution Year

3, Details of radioactive sources (Note 3) to be used in the school.

Manufacturer/Catalogue Number Source Activity Quantity

4. The type of monitoring instrument (Note 4)* acquired/already put on firmorder for purchase.

I hereby apply for exemption from requiring Radioactive SubstancesLicence. I confirm that the above source(s) is/are for teaching purposes andthat the instructions in the "Code of Practice on the Use of Sealed RadioactiveSources for Teaching Purposes in Schools" will be complied with.

Date Signed( )

Principal

•Delete as appropriate

On completion, the form should be sent to the Secretary of the Radiation Board,Medical & Health Department, Sunning Plaza, 10 Hysan Avenue, 4th Floor,Causeway Bay, Hong Kong.


Notes

(1) The Radiation Ordinance defines "radioactive substances" as any substancewhich consists of or contains any radioactive chemical element whethernatural or artificial and whose specific activity exceeds 75 becquerels ofparent radioactive chemical element per gram of substance.

(2) The source custodian should be a graduate teacher with good knowledgeof the properties and hazards of radioactive materials and shall beresponsible for the supervision of the use of radioactive substances withinthe school.

(3) To serve as a guide to schools, please note that the Education Departmentincluded the following radioactive sources in their List of StandardFurniture/Equipment for A New School, Sept. 1988, Physics (CE Level) andPhysics (Advanced Level). Manufacturers/Catalogue Numbers are enteredonly to indicate the design and quality of sources required.

Manufacturers/Catalogue Numbers

Harris P66300/7

P66320/2P66340/8P66360/3

Griffin XKR-530-Q

B D H England

Sources

Sealed sources in metal mount with 4 mmstem, supplied in lead castle envelope inwooden box

200 kBq Radium 226 (alpha, beta andgamma emission)200 Kbq Strontium 90 (beta emission)200 Kbq Cobalt 60 (gamma emission)200 Kbq Americium 241 (both alpha &gamma emission)

Insoluble radium source of activity lessthan 750 Bq to be used with diffusioncloud chamber

Uranyl Compound 12 MBq/kg of elementaluranium

Quantity

1 each

5

lOOg

(4) A portable monitoring instrument capable of measuring beta and gammaradiation is normally enough e.g. a system with a G.M thin end windowtube. However, for radium source of activity less than 750 Bq to be usedwith diffusion cloud chamber, monitoring instrument is not required.


APPENDIX F

LASERS

Lower power lasers for school and college work have been available for manyyears. Like any other laboratory instruments, lasers have to be used withproper precautions. There are two main hazards associated with the use oflasers. The greater risk is that of electrocution. Almost all lasers have thepotential of causing severe and possibly fatal electric shock because of thepresence of live and other high voltages in the instruments. The precautionsin the use of electrical equipment, as outlined in the pamphlet "Safety inScience Laboratories", should be followed. In addition, care must be taken notto spill any liquid on the laser. The other main hazard is the adversebiological effect induced by the laser radiation. Both the skin and the eye maybe affected but the latter is far more susceptible to permanent radiationdamage. The -effective beam diameter of the laser is usually very small, andbecause of the very low beam divergence, it is quite possible for a personexposed to laser radiation to receive the full power of the beam through thepupil of the eye. The incident beam will be focused by the cornea and the lensinto an extremely small but highly intense spot on the retina. The heatgenerated could cause irreversible retinal damage in a very short time.

Laser radiation protection is a complicated subject. Both the school staffconcerned and the students should remember that the safety rule given beloware good laboratory practices for using low power lasers. Such rule are notadequate for lasers with high power ratings or generating invisible radiation(which are not recommended for use in a school laboratory environment).

A graduate member of the science staff should be responsible for theprocurement, storage, issue and return of lasers and associated safetyequipment. He should draw up a list of safety rules and operating proceduresand ensure that these are observed. Any person using the laser should be trainin its use and should be familiar with the safety precautions.

Safety Rules

Consideration should be given to the following :

1. The laser should never be viewed directly. Any collimating instrumentsuch as telescope or microscope should not be used.

2. The laser beam should never be looked along and any part of the skinshould not be exposed to the direct beam.

3. The laser should not be fired unless it is correctly aimed at thedesignated target area. Do not align the laser beam with the power on.Always use optical alignment first.

4. Whenever possible non-reflective or absorbing materials should be used inthe vicinity of the laser to prevent specular reflection. When suchreflection cannot be avoided, for example at a lens surface, position someprotective screens so that students and teachers are not exposed to thereflection.


5. The protective screens should be made of non-flammable material. Theyshould be optically opaque and should be painted a matt grey colour.

6. Students should be positioned so that the protective screens are effectiveand they should never be closer to any part of a laser demonstrationexperiment than one metre when the power is on. They should standbehind the laser and at right angles to the proposed path of the beambefore firing.

7. The laser beam path should be located well above or below the eye levelof the students.

8. The laser source should be rigidly fixed so that the direction of the beamcannot be inadvertently altered.

9. Experiments with lasers should be carried out in brightly lit rooms toavoid enlarging the pupils of the eyes.

10. The danger of direct viewing and of specular reflections should beimpressed on the students so that, in case of accidental exposure, theywill react instantly by closing the eyes and/or turning the head away.

11. When a laser is in operation, warning signs should be displayed inconspicuous locations both inside and outside the demonstration orexperiment area and on doors giving access to the area.

12. Adequate protective spectacles should be provided for all staff who mayenter or work in the laser area and are liable to be exposed to laserradiation.

13. The laser should be switched off immediately after an experiment.

14. The laser when not in use should be kept under lock and key so that itis accessible only to authorised members of the staff.

15. Any accidental exposure or even suspicion of exposure of the retinashould be reported and medical treatment should be sought at once.


APPENDIX G

PRECAUTIONS IN THE USE OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Installation

It is essential that the wiring installation for laboratories should be donein such a manner as to comply with the Supply Rules issued by the SupplyCompanies and any ordinance appertaining to such matters All electricalaccessories used (e.g. phigs, sockets and switches) should be obtainedform reputable agents/suppliers All wiring should only be carried out byqualified electrical contractors.

A main switch which can isolate the supply to all outlets in thelaboratory should be fitted To prevent leakage of current to earth, everysocket outlet should be protected by a residual current device having arated residual operating current not exceeding 0.03 ampere.

Switched socket outlets, preferably with pilot lights, should be installedto facilitate local isolations. They should be placed away from any watertap such that they should not be splashed by water as far as reasonablypracticable. Non-fused 13-ampere adaptor and plugs without cord gripshould not be used.

B. Electric Shock

It should be stressed strongly that the passage of even small electriccurrents through the body may cause death by failure of the heart. It isthe amount of current flowing through the body that determines the effecton the body. Any amount of current over 0.01 ampere or so is capableof producing a severe shock. Current exceeding 0.03 ampere is lethal.

Since the voltage at the outlets in the laboratory is usually fixed, suchas 200/220 volts, the current that passes through the body is basicallydetermined by the resistances of the human body. The actual resistancevaries according to circumstances depending upon the points of contact,the moisture content of the skin and the voltage of the live parts. Whenwet, skin resistance can be reduced considerably. This greatly increasesthe chance for a severe electric shock.

The use of electricity in science laboratories is very common and thepotential danger for electric shock is always present. It is important thatbasic safety measures be taken.

C. Safety Measures

1. Students must be made aware of the great danger resulting frombodily contact with a live' electric outlet. They should not handleelectrical appliances when their hands, feet or bodies are wet orwhen they are standing on a wet floor.

2. Switch off the appliance and/or the power supply before the plugis withdrawn/inserted.


3. Electrical equipment should be bonded effectively to earth throughtree-core supply cable and three-pin plug. Fuses should be of thecorrect rating for the equipment they are protecting. Theconnections between apparatus and three-pin plugs should be madewith three-core flexible cable of adequate current rating. Braidedflex should only be connected to portable equipment which has anouter covering of insulating material like plastic.

4. Danger from electricity can arise in the laboratory through ageingand resulting breakdown of the insulation. Apparatus in whichheat is generated (e.g. hotplates, ovens, furnaces and motors) isparticularly susceptible to damaged insulation. Frequent inspectionof the state of the insulation should be carried out. Flexibleleads should be replaced as soon as wear becomes noticeable;damaged leads should be wholly replaced, never patched.

5. Keep the use of extension cords to a minimum. Whenever leads areto be extended by plug and socket connection, the connectionshould be made by a well-matched set with the female socket beingalways the live' one and never the male plug, which has exposedpins.

6. The use of two or three-way adaptors should be avoided as thismay overload the wiring and/or the socket.

7. Apparatus which gives the slightest shock should be repairedimmediately. A piece of faulty apparatus should never be useduntil the fault is satisfactorily rectified.

8. In general, equipment should not be left switched on unattendedfor prolonged periods.

9. Inflammable liquids should not be stored near electrical equipmentbecause their vapours can be ignited by an arc or a spark.Charging of secondary cells such as lead-acid accumulators shouldbe carried out in a well ventilated area.

10. Any experimentation requiring the use of high voltage would besafer if the floor is covered with effective insulating materials.Nobody should be allowed to work alone in a room when using highvoltage. Terminals should be protected and naked wire shouldnever be permitted. All high voltage equipment should always bekept clean.

11. It is essential to ensure that there is a large current-limitinginternal series resistor in E.H.T. power supplies so that even at5kV the short circuit current across the terminals is only about2mA or so.

Section 4 Annex (22) p. 23APPEM3DC H

Report on Accident Concerning Science Experiments/Facilities in School

1. Name of School/College :

2. Address :

3. Principal : Tel,

4. Occurrence of accident :-

Date : Time :

Place :

Class : Number of pupils in class :

5* Nature of accident (e.g. fire, explosion, heat burns, chemcial burns,etc.)

5* Name(s) of pupil(s) involved (age in bracket), and injury, if any,caused by the accident.

7. NameCs) of teacher <s)/laboratory technicians/laboratoryattendant<s) involved, and injury, if any, caused by the accident.

8. Cauise of accident (e.g. wrong procedure, or carelefe&ne&s, ormalicious action on the part of the pupils or others, faultyequipment).

/ * •«* •


9* Distribution of pupils at the time of accident

<a) Groq? experiment :Number of pupils in each group ^_±_

(b) Demonstration experiment :Location of pupils

10. Location and activity of the teacher in charge of the class at thetime of accident

11. First aid given, if any

12. Was any of the following telephoned for help? (Yes/No)

(Tick as appropriate) Time notified Time arrived

Police

Fire Services

Arabulanco

Action taken by the above after arrival

13. Was the Education Department notified of the accident by telephone?

Yes/No : Date and Time notified

14. Were the parents or guardians notified of the accident? Yes/NO

15. Name<s} and designation(s) of witness(es) to the accident, if any

16. General remarks on the accidentg if any

Section 4 Annex (22) p 25

17. Particulars of the teacher in charge of the class at the time :-

Name (Print) : ^^

Qualifications :

Teaching experience (number of years) :

18. Particulars of the laboratory technician in charge of the laboratorywhere the accident occurred s-

Name (Print) :

Qualifications (including professional qualifications) :

Working experience (number of years) :

19. Reporting person (s) (tick as appropriate) :

[~1 Principal

Teacher

Laboratory technician(Signature)

Date :

Section 4Ref.: ED(GR) 1/53 III

Annex (23)EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

HONG KONG

14 August 1991

GENERAL SCHOOLS MISCELLANEOUS CIRCULAR.NO. 66/91

Organized Visits by School Children :Safety Precautions

Heads of schools are requested to bring the circular to the notice ofall teachers.

2. From time to time most schools organize excursions, picnics and fieldwork of various kinds for their pupils. Because this has given rise to someanxiety about the safety of pupils while they are away from their schoolpremises, the Education Department and the Royal Hong Kong Police Farce havedevised a simple reporting procedure which if carefully observed should be ofhelp to school authorities in ensuring the safety of the pupils concerned.This procedure is explained below and Heads of schools are urged in their owninterests to follow the procedure whenever outside visits of anv Jdni areorganized.

3. For each outing, school authorities should

(a) write to the Divisional Commander (RHKPF) of the area which theschool party intends to visit and, if the outing involves thehire of marine craft other than scheduled ferry services theStaff Officer Operations, Marine Police Regional '

(i) the nature of the outing;

(ii) date and time;

(ill) locality and/or route;

(iv) number of pupils participating;

(v) any special difficulties anticipated;

(vi)

(vii) the age range of participants.

(Note: To avoid any unnecessary delays <?rh™i a,,*k •„•requested to write direct to the r,°° authPritl6£ ainstead of to the Coroner of Polic'Tt th^Tv"Headquarters.) roiice at the Police

(b) notify the Divisional Commander and/or the staff n«-(Operations) as appropriate shnnin a«,, v aff Offieerdetails be made at a later date Y °hanges to the


(c) advise participants to carry their IDENTITY CARDS orJUNIOR IDENTITY CARDS. Those under 11 years should carrysome form ot I.D..

(d) on the morning of the outing; telephone the Duty Officerof the station concerned as early as possible, statingwhether the outing will proceed as planned or has beenpostponed or cancelled (the Duty Officer will then relaythe message to the Divisional Commander).

(e) ensure that the leader of the visit/outing will report tothe Deputy Officers of the local station upon completionof the visit. This implies that the Police Force wouldinitiate some form of search actions in the event of anoverdue visit/outing and so this requirement would keepthe local Police appraised of the situation and preventpossible misguided fears for the safety of the group.

4. Heads are reminded that any outing or field trip should besupervised by an experienced and responsible person. Instructionsshould be given to all pupils going on field trips that they shouldreport their return immediately to their supervisor * or the Divisionconcerned if they return independently of the main group,

5. It must be stressed that while a knowledge of such trips bythe Police is in itself an important safety precaution, the primaryresponsibility for the safety of pupils on field trips and outings mustbe with the schools themselves, in that they must provide competentleaders and properly brief the pupils involved. Schools should take allsafety precautions in organizing outings. Pupils participating in theactivities should be briefed of the rules of their participation and ofthe geographical area beyond which they are prohibited to go. Where thepupils are divided into separate groups in the outing, each group mustbe under the care of a supervising teacher who ensures by periodic headcounts that all are present.

6. To assist teachers in informing the Duty Officers concerned offorthcoming outings, the list of Police Station addresses and telephonenumbers is also attached for easy reference.

7. This circular replaces General Schools Miscellaneous CircularNo. 73/90 dated 22 August 1990,

K.H. CHANfor Director of Education

To: Heads of all schools/colleges - for necessary actionHeads of all sections - for information

[WP:l-58/gsmc(2)]


List of Police Station Addresses and Telephone Numbers

Police Station

Hong Kong Island RegionsRegional Police HeadquartersCentral Police StationHollywood Road, Hong Kong.

Wanchai Police StationGloucester RoadWanchai

Happy Valley Police Station60 Sing Woo RoadHappy Valley

Central Police StationHollywood RoadCentral

Peak Police Station92 Peak RoadThe Peak

Waterfront Police Station2 Rumsey StreetCentral

Western Police StationWestern StreetWestern

Aberdeen Police Station4 Wong Chuk Hang RoadAberdeen

Stanley Police Station77 Stanley Village RoadStanley

North Point Police StationJava RoadNorth Point

Causeway Bay Police StationElectric RoadCauseway Bay

Shaukeiwan Police Station28 Shaukeiwan RoadShaukeiwan

Chai Wan Police StationLo Man RoadMount ParkerChai Wan

Duty Officer'sTelephone No.

8416300

5756861 Ext. 41

8355200

8416311

8496242 Ext. 17

5452005

8594200

5558457 Ext. 12

8131760 Ext* 20

8804200

8065200

8845200

5570151 Ext. 201

- ^. * - 2 - Annex (23) p.4Section 4

Duty Officer'sPolice Station Telephone No.

Shek 0 Police Neighbourhood Police 8094444Unit

Kowloon Region 7612500Regional Police Headquarters197 Argyle StreetKowloon City

Sham Shui Po Police Station 360721237A Yen Chow StreetSham Shui Po

Cheung Sha Wan Police Station 7463313Lai Chi Kok RoadCheung Sha Wan

Shek Kip Mei Police Station 7885200Tai Hang Sai StreetShek Kip Mei

Wong Tai Sin Police Station 3529400Shatin Pass RoadWong Tai Sin

Tsz Wan Shan Police Station 7266200Tsz Wan Shan RoadTsz Wan Shan

Sai Kung Police Station 7928600Po Tung RoadSai Kung

Kwun Tong Police Station 7171461 Ext. 12Junk Bay RoadKwun Tong

Sau Mau Ping Police Station 7974269Hong Ning RoadSau Mau Ping

Ngau Tau Kok Police Station 7983300Wai Yip StreetNgau Tau Kok

Kowloon City Police Station 7116955202 Argyle StreetKowloon City

Ho Man Tin Police Station 7618213Princess Margaret RoadHo Man Tin


Police Station

_ 3 -

Duty Officer'sTelephone No.

Yaumati Police StationCanton RoadYaumati

Tsim Sha Tsui Police StationNathan RoadTsim Sha Tsui

Mongkok Police StationPrince Edward RoadMongkok

New Territories RegionRegional Police Headquarters4 Tung Lo Wan Hill RoadShantin

Shatin Police StationShatin

Tin Sum DivisionHin Keng Street

Tai Po Police StationTai Po

Frontier District Headquarters(Frontier Permit Officer)Fanling Roundabout

Sheung Shui Police StationFanling Roundabout

Border Division StationMan Kam To RoadSha Ling

Lok Ma Chau Police StationLok Ma Chau

Sha Tau Kok Police StationFrontier

Kwai Chung Police StationKwai Chung RoadKwai Chung

Lei Muk Shue Police Station302 Wo Yi Hop Road.Sheung Kwai Chung

7801221 Ext. 12

7317278

3986200

6664220

6946211

6943300 Ext. 313

6603200

6753371

6753300

6719595

6753486

6753485

4102200

4294071 Ext. 201


Police Station

Tsuen Wan Police Station4 Castle Peak RoadTsuen Wan

Tuen Mun Police Station100 Pui To RoadTuen Mun

Tai Hing Police StationTsun Wen Road

Castle Peak DivisionArea 44 Tuen Mun

Yuen Long Police StationCastle Peak RoadYuen Long

Ta Kwu Ling Police StationPing Che RoadTa Kwu Ling

Lau Fau Shan Police StationLau Fau Shan

Pat Heung Police StationFan Kam RoadPat Heung

Marine Police HeadquartersTsim Sha Tsui

Marine Regional Command &Control Centre

Islands District HeadquartersCheung ShaLantau

Cheung Chau Police StationCheung Chau Island

Mui Wo Police StationMui WoLantau

Tai 0 Police StationTai 0Lantau

Lamma Police Post

Duty Officer'sTelephone No,

4924231 Ext. 214

4638527

4554211

4687500

4738200

6753487

4721363 Ext. 13

4881336 Ext. 12

.3692261

3665827

9806205

9810251 Ext. 15

9848251 Ext. 16

9857251 Ext. 15

9821577

[WP:l-58/gsmc(2)l

Sect«JH 4HONG KONG

26 September 1990

GENERAL SCHOOLS MISCELLANEOUS CIRCULAR NO.112/90

Supervision of Pupils Travelling in Licensed School Light Buses,School Buses and School Hire Cars

Supervisors of schools which provide school light bus, school busor school hire car services are reminded of the importance of supervisionfor pupils while they are travelling. For the safety of their pupils,supervisors of schools are advised to observe the following guidelines :-

(a) Pupils ought to be taught how to behave when travelling onboard school light buses, school buses or school hire cars,e.g.

(i) they must remain seated all the way;

(ii) they must not talk to the driver or shout during thejourney?

(iii) they must refrain from eating, drinking or playingwhile they are travelling; and

(iv) at no time should children be allowed to put theirheads or hands out of the windows.

(b) Pupils should be taught the proper way to board and alightfrom a school light bus, school bus or school hire car andthey must ensure that the vehicle has come to a completestandstill before boarding or alighting. Where parkingfacilities for school buses or lay-by to set down schoolchildren are provided in the school, they should be fully madeuse of.

(c) When pupils are travelling on these vehicles, arrangementsshould be made for an adult or a teacher, other than thedriver, who knows the pupils well, to escort them during thejourney. This escort should ensure that the pupils areproperly seated and the doors of the school light bus, schoolmis or school hire car are properly closed.

(d) A name-list of pupils travelling on each school light bus,school bus or school hire car should be prepared for the

yiSrt™? T^"^ n-° °ne is missing' This is Particularlyimportant at the beginning of the school term.

EL!!0" f nfuskion' PuP"a travelling in separate school light


(f) Parents or guardians should be informed of the details of theroute, including the pick-up points and times of arrival atthese points.

(g) Care should be taken to ensure that pupils reach the schoolsafely and that young pupils are collected by their respectiveparents or guardians on their homeward journey.

(h) In cases of emergency, the escort should help the pupils tokeep calm to avoid unnecessary panic.

2. For the safety of their pupils, supervisors of schools are alsorequested to seek the co-operation of those operators of private schoollight buses which carry pupils of their schools to ensure that they do notcarry passengers in excess of the capacity permitted by law.

3. This circular supersedes General Schools Miscellaneous CircularNo. 96/89 dated 27 September 1989.

S.T. KWANfor Director of Education

To: Supervisors of all Kindergartens,primary and secondary schools

(WP : GSMC-13)

Section 4Ref. : ED(GR) 949/61 VII

Annex (25)EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

HONG KONG

16 May 1992

GENERAL ADMINISTRATION CIRCULAR NO. 9 /92

Tropical Cyclones, Heavy Persistent Rain and Thunderstorms(Chinese version will follow)

This circular supersedes General Administration Circular No. 12/91.

2, All kindergartens and schools are advised to note the arrangements tobe followed in the event of tropical cyclones, heavy persistent rain orthunderstorms. Their attention is also drawn to the guidance on action to betaken when weather conditions change at the time of public examinations. For thepurpose of this circular, schools include Colleges of Education, the Hong KongTechnical Teachers' College, the Institute of Language in Education, and theapproved post-secondary college.

TROPICAL CYCLONES

3* In general the following arrangements will apply :

Situation

Hoisting

Hoisting

Hoistingor above

Lowering

Loweringlowering

of

of

of

to

toof

No.

NO.

No.

No.

No.all

1

3

a

3

Signal

Signal

Signal

Signal

1 Signal orSignals

Action to be taken

- All kindergartens and schools willoperate as normal.

All kindergartens will close. Otherschools will operate as normal unlessadvised otherwise.

All schools will close.

All schools to resume with the followingsession. Kindergartens to remain closed.

All kindergartens and schools will resumewith the following session*

4* If schools are not in session when a tropical cyclone is approachingHong Kong, the Director of Education will, if the circumstances warrant it, makean announcement over all radio and television channels advising parents whetheror not to send their children to school. The announcement will be made in theevening or early morning, and will be timed, whenever possible, before childrenset out from their homes. The first radio announcement in the morning for AM andwhole-day schools will be not later than 6.15 am, and for PM schools (includingPM sessions^ not later than 11 am.and frequent intervals.

The announcement will be repeated at regular

5* If schools are in session under a No. 1 or No. 3 Signal, and theDirector of Education is advised that the situation is likely to deterioraterapidly, he will make a public announcement over the radio and television

Section 4 Annex (25) p.2stations advising the immediate closing of schools. On all occasions wnen tneDirector of Education announces the closing of schools wnile they are in session,heads should ensure that safe and adequate arrangements are made for their pupilsto return home- Heads are advised to draw up a contingency plan to deal with theclosing of schools due to deteriorating weather.

6. When the lowering of signals as indicated in paragraph 3 aboveenables schools to resume with the following session, appropriate announcementswill be made by the Director of Education. Nevertheless, parents should usetheir discretion in sending children back to school, if it seems to them thatlocal weather, road or transport conditions have not by that time returned tonormal. Heads of, schools should make surethatparents are,fully reminded ofthis discretion, by circular letter.

7. Heads of all schools are requested to ensure that all necessaryprecautions are taken to secure school premises against tropical cyclones.

HEAVY PERSISTENT RAIN AND THUNDERSTORMS

8. When a period of heavy persistent rain and thunderstorms occurs, theDirector of Education will, if the circumstances warrant it, make an announcementover the radio and television channels advising parents whether or not to sendtheir children to school. Again, where possible, the announcement will be madein the evening or early morning before children set out from their homes. Thefirst radio announcement in the morning for AM and whole-day schools will be notlater than 6...15. am, and for PM schools (including PM sessions) not later than 11am* The announcement will be repeated at regular and frequent intervals.

9. However, if the situation suddenly deteriorates, it may be necessaryfor the Director of Education to announce the suspension of classes even after6.15 am (or 11 am for pm schools). Under such circumstances, an announcementwill be made over the radio and television channels, advising pupils to stay athome if they have not already set out for school; while those who have alreadyarrived at school should stay there until the situation warrants a safe journeyhome. Each school should draw up a contingency plan in advance to cover suchsituations. The plan should ensure that the school premises will be open andthat some teachers living close by will be at school to look after those pupilswho have reached school, and that safe and adequate arrangements are made forthem to return home at an appropriate time. Parents should also be informed ofthese arrangements through a circular letter. m

10. An announcement of school closure due to heavy persistent rain (asdistinct from closure due to a tropical cyclone) 'will not apply to the threeColleges of Education, the Hong Kong Technical Teachers..'Colleger the Instituteof Language in Educationand the.approvedpost-secondary college. In the eventthat the operation of any of these institutions is affected by local conditionssuch as flooding or other factors which pose danger to the safety of individualbuildings and their occupants, heads of these institutions should use theirdiscretion to decide whether the closure of their institutions is necessary. Ifa closure is necessary before an institution begins 'its session, the head of theinstitution concerned should request the Education Officer (Information andPublic Relations) to make an announcement over the radio and television stationsbefore 7 am. Heads of these institutions should also make sure that their staffand students are fully aware of these arrangements.

11 • Heads of schools must, however, realise that in periods of heavy rainand thunderstorms, situations can develop in which it may be necessary for theEducation Department to announce the closure of schools while they are insession. Under such circumstances, it is essential that heads and staff of all


schools are particularly mindful that the safety and well-being of pupils intheir charge must be their prime concern. Announcements to close schools whileschools are in session do not' necessarily mean that all pupils must be sent homeimmediately. All heads and their staff must keep pupils in school until they canbe released to return home in safety.

12. In periods of heavy rain and thunderstorms/ the general conditionsmay be such as not to warrant the closure of all schools. In such circumstances,parents may still decide not to send their children to school because of weather,road and transport conditions in. their localities.... Heads of schools are remindedof the need to make alternative arrangements for internal tests and examinationsfor those pupils who miss school for this reason and to ensure that all parentsrealise that such arrangements will be made. Itis important to reassure parentsthat... their children will not be penalised, under these exceptional circumstances.Also, pupils living in remote areas or outlying islands should not be penalisedfor being late under these exceptional circumstances.

13. If local weather conditions warrant the closure of a particularschool, and a decision has not yet been made by the Director of Education toclose schools generally, the"school head may decide to close the school andnotify the District Education Officer as soon as possible afterwards. If theschool is already in session when that decision is taken, appropriate and safearrangements'should be made to send the pupils home.

PUBLIC EXAMINATIONS

14. Heads of all schools, and particularly those used as centres for anypublic examinations, are reminded that the closure of schools due to tropicalcyclones, heavy persistent rain or thunderstorms does not necessarily imply thepostponement of a public examination scheduled to be held on that day. Theyshould listen to radio or television announcements regarding any change affectinga particular examination held in their schools. Such announcements will be madeseparately by the Hong Kong Examinations Authority, normally followingdepartmental announcements concerning the closure of schools.

15. Unless an announcement has ,been made that a public examination has'been postponed due to bad weather, it should be assumed that the examination willcontinue to be held as originally scheduled and schools used as examinationcentres should remain open for examination purposes.

*16* Heads of all schools are asked to ensure that the above proceduresare fully understood by pupils and parents, and that parents are requested to actupon^ the advice given in the public announcements. Pupils taking publicexaminations should in particular be reminded of the contents of paragraphs 14and 15 above.

Y.T. LIDirector of Education

To : Heads of all schools, Colleges of Education, }

approved post-secondary college, Institute ) for necessary actionof Language in Education, Hong Kong )Technical Teachers1 College )

Heads of all sections - for information


Ref : ED 31/4446/79 III EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

4 December 1991


Employment (Miscellaneous Provision) Ordinance 1979and the Employment of Children Regulations 1979

In order to assist the enforcement of school attendance, the above legislationwas enacted in 1979 which prohibits with effect from 1 September 1980, the employment ofchildren below the age of 15 years in industrial undertakings.

2. Children who have attained the age of 13 years and who are attending a schooloffering a full secondary or primary course but who have not completed Secondary III may,with the written consent of parents/guardians and on production of a valid School AttendanceCertificate, in a form specified by the Director of Education, engage in part-time work innon-industrial establishments except those specified in the Schedule (Appendix 1) and subjectto the restrictions as stated in paragraph 3 of the General Information Sheet (Appendix 2).

3. Application for a School Attendance Certificate must be made by theparent/guardian in respect of the child/ward direct to the Principal of school. Applicationmay be made either in English or Chinese.

4. A specimen of the standard application form is at Appendix 3. Principals ofschools are requested to print these application forms for their own use.

5. On receipt of the completed application form, the Principal should verify theparticulars of the pupil before submitting the form to the Student Guidance Section,Education Department, Lee Gardens, Hysan Avenue, Hong Kong.

6. The Commissioner for Labour is prepared under certain conditions to exemptemployers in the entertainment industry from complying with a number of restrictionsstipulated in the Employment of Children Regulations 1979. Details are as shown in theattached explanatory notes issued by the Labour Department (Appendix 4). As far as schoolsare concerned, the main effects of these arrangements are as follows : -

(a) the age limit for child employment has been waived in respectof children employed in the entertainment industry - a child ofany age attending a full primary or secondary course may beemployed as a child entertainer with the written consent of theparent or guardian and, in the case of a contract artiste, theproduction of a valid School Attendance Certificate. A childentertainer who is not employed on a contract basis is notrequired to produce the School Attendance Certificate.

Section 4 Aimex <26> P 2

(b) Children working as entertainers may be employed between 7am and 11 pm but not during school hours or for more thaneight hours on any day.

7. All School Attendance Certificates, irrespective of the date of issue, are validonly up to 30 September each year. Re-application will therefore be necessary in all caseswhere children wish to take up part-time work extending beyond that date.

8. Inspection visits to places of employment will be conduced by inspectors ofthe Labour Department in order to ensure that every child worker engaged in part-timeemployment is employed within the law and has obtained an official School AttendanceCertificate (Form ED,908). It is therefore important that all pupils who wish to take up part-time employment should be made aware of the Employment of Children Regulations 1979and of the need to obtain a School Attendance Certificate in accordance with procedures laiddown in this circular.

9. For enquiries, please telephone Senior Inspector (Services) on 8392519.

10. This circular replaces General Administration Circular 34/90 of 28 November1990.

Mrs G YUNGfor Director of Education

To : Principals of all Secondary/PrimarySchools (except ESF Schools) -for necessary action

Heads of Sections/Colleges -forinformation

District Education Officers -for information


Appendix 1

SCHEDULE

Prohibited Occupations

1. In any premises or place where intoxicating liquor is sold and consumed.

2. Without prejudice to by-law 15 of the Public Cleansing and Prevention of Nuisances(Urban Council) By-laws and to By-law 5 of the Public Cleansing and Prevention ofNuisances (Regional Council) By-law, in the handling for gain or profit of any refusein any public place.

3. In the handling or delivery of any dangerous goods to which section 3 of theDangerous Goods Ordinance applies.

4. At any machine which by reason of its cutting, grinding, rolling, pressing, crushingor similar action, is dangerous.

5. In any of the following premises or places, that is to say -

(a) any dance hall, billiard saloon, mahjong, tin kau or gambling establishment;or

(b) any premises or places at which any totalizator or pari-mutuel betting, cashsweep or lottery is organized or conducted.

6. In any place of public entertainment except in connection with a stage performancethe net profits (if any) of which are devoted to purposes other than the private gainor profit of promoters of the performance.

7. In the kitchen of any hotel, boarding house, cooked food shop, cafe, restaurant or anyestablishment of a similar kind.

8. In outside window-cleaning at more than 3 m above ground level.

9. In any abattoir or slaughter house, within the curtilage of any abattoir or slaughterhouse or in any premises used in connection therewith.

10. In any hair-dressing saloon or massage parlour.


Appendix 2

General Information Sheet

1. The Education (Amendment) Ordinance 1979 stipulates that with effect fromSeptember 1980, all children under 15 years of age will attend school. Childrenwithin the age-group who have completed Secondary III will be exempted.

2. In order to assist the enforcement of school attendance, the Employment(Miscellaneous Provision) Ordinance 1979 and the Employment of ChildrenRegulations 1979 have been enacted which prohibit, with effect from September1980, the employment of children below the age of 15 years, in industrialundertakings.

3. Children who have attained the age of 13 years and who are attending a schooloffering full secondary or primary course but have not completed Secondary III may,with the written consent of parents/guardians and on production of a valid SchoolAttendance Certificate in a form specified by the Director of Education issued by theschool, engage in part-time work in non-industrial establishments except thosespecified in the attached Schedule at Appendix 1 and subject to the restrictions thatsuch a child shall not be employed : -

(a) before 7 am or after 7 pm on any day;

(b) during school hours on any school day;

(c) during the school term for more than :

(i) 2 hours on any school day; or

(ii) 4 hours on any other day;

(d) during the summer holidays for more than 8 hours on any day;

(e) at work continuously for a spell of more than 5 hours without thereafter aninterval of not less than 1 hour for a meal or rest, or

(f) to lift or carry any load exceeding 18 kilogrammes.

4. The parent/guardian should signify consent by completing a standard application form(in triplicate) specified by the Education Department and obtainable in the respectiveprimary and secondary schools.

5. The Principal of School should verify all the particulars of pupil.

Section 4 Annex (26) pS

6. Principal of school should check the 'nature of work' to see whether the job isprohibited in the Schedule. In case of doubt, the Principal should seek the advice ofthe Labour Officers, Labour Inspection Division, Labour Department (Tel. 852 4177,733 2440 & 423 0046).

7. Principal of school should check also the 'hours of work' column to see that themaximum permissible hours are not exceeded and that together with his ownassessment of the pupil's progress in school, the child's education will not be affectedif he/she takes up the job. Where the Principal thinks that the job will interfere withthe child's education, he should consult the Student Guidance Section, EducationDepartment, and seek the advice of Social Welfare Department if the parents are infinancial difficulties.

8. The validity of the School Attendance Certificate is only for a limited period. It thechild is found to have deteriorated in school performance, the Principal need notrenew the School Attendance Certificates on expiry.

9. If the Principal is satisfied with his findings, he should forward the application form(in triplicate) to the Student Guidance Section, Education Department, signifying thathe intends to issue the School Attendance Certificate to the parent/guardian.

10. The Student Guidance Section, Education Department, will then send the SchoolAttendance Certificate, with an allotted serial number, in triplicate, to the Principal.

11. The Principal will enter on the School Attendance Certificate particulars of the pupilbefore issuing it to the parent/guardian. The parent/guardian should be asked toforward the original copy of the certificate to the Employer. The duplicate certificateshould be retained by the school and the triplicate certificate forwarded to the StudentGuidance Section, Education Department, for record purposes.

12. If the pupil changes school or job, he/she must apply for another School AttendanceCertificate. He/she must surrender his/her existing School Attendance Certificate onreapplication.

13. If a child, wants to do two jobs he must apply for 2 School Attendance Certificates.

14. Each child may apply for three School Attendance Certificates only in one schoolyear.

15. School Attendance Certificates are valid in respect of the specific employment and thespecific school. The validity period will be stated clearly on each certificate.

16. The application forms and School Attendance Certificates are issued free of charge.

For information please contact Student Guidance Section,Education Department, 2nd floor, Lee Gardens, Hong Kong.Tel. No : 839 2519


Appendix 3Application for a School Attendance Certificate

ftp be completed in triplicate)

Name of Pupil Date of BirthAddress ^ Age: Years Months

Tel No.Class HKID Card No.

Birth Certificate No.

I wish to apply for a School Attendance Certificate in respect of my child/ward so that he/she can workoutside school hours. The particulars of his/her job are as follows -

Name of Employing FirmAddress of Employing Firm.Nature of WorkHours of work from am/pm to anfrnWages

I understand that the issue of the School Attendance Certificate is free of charge.

Date(Signature of Parent/Guardian)

Name of Parent/Guardian

(For School Use Only)

To : Director of Education(Attn : Student Guidance Section) Date

I confirm that the personal particulars of the pupil are correct.

I confirm that the pupil's school attendance has been satisfactory and as far as I can judge, his/hereducation will not be affected by his/her work outside school hours.

I intend to issue to the parent/guardian a School Attendance Certificate which should be valid untiland should be grateful if copies of the necessary certificate can be sent to me for issuance.

Name of School Tel No.Address of SchoolSchool Hours School Hours in Summer

School (Signature of Principal)Chop

Name of Principal

(For Office Use Only)To : Principal Date

I attach copies of the School Attendance Certificate, serial No. as requested. Theoriginal copy should be issued to the parent/guardian, the duplicate retained by the school for record purposesand the triplicate sent to the Student Guidance Section of this Department.

for Director of Education


Appendix 4

Permissions Granted in Connection with Child Entertainers(Explanatory Notes)

1. As the nature of work and hours of employment of child entertainers are verydifferent from those of other child employees, the Commissioner for Labour, in theinterest of art and education, is prepared to exempt employers in the entertainmentindustry from complying with a number of restrictions stipulated in the Employmentof Children Regulations 1979 so that child entertainers engaged for performances infilms, television/radio programmes, stage shows, advertising etc. may work in specialhours subject to certain conditions and control.

2. Child entertainers can be broadly divided into two groups - those regarded as contractand free lance artistes who are usually provided with a written contract ofemployment and others, commonly known as 'extras', who are without a writtencontract and who are usually engaged on an ad hoc basis. For the former group,because of their regular employment, the Commissioner for Labour will exercisemore stringent control so that their education and health are not adversely affected.

3. In view of the above, School Attendance Certificates may be issued to two categoriesof students. The first category consists of children aged 13 and 14, who wish to takeup part-time employment in the non-industrial sector. The second category consistsof children of any age who wish to be employed as child entertainers under a writtencontract of employment, provided that their period of employment falls between 7 amand 11 pm and that they do not work during school hours and more than 8 hours onany day.

Section 4 APPLICATION FOR REGISTRATION Annex (27)

OF A PUPILS' ASSOCIATION AT

SCHOOL

ADDRESS (for correspondence)

Tel. No.

DateDirector of Education.Education Department,Hong Kong.

1. We request that a Pupils' Association, particulars of which are set out below, be registeredunder the provisions of the Education Ordinance 1971.

2. Particulars:(a) Proposed name of Association (in English)

(b) Proposed name of Association (in Chinese)

(c) School

(d) Eligibility for membership of Association

(e) Details of fees to be charged for membership of the Association and its branches.

(f) Nature of activities

(g) Meeting place(s)

(h) Frequency and times of meetings

3. The contents of this application are true and completeto the best of our knowledge, information and belief.

(Signed) .....(Supervisor)


Ref. ED(GR) 1/1111/65V Education DepartmentHong Kong

3 My 1991


Government's Anti-Smoking Policy

It has been Government's declared policy since 1975 to discourage

smoking, to educate the public (particularly the young) the health hazards of

smoking and to reduce the influence of cigarette smoking promotion. In this

context, Government is opposed to the proliferation of tobacco advertising.

2. It is Government's intention that such policies and practices be applied to

all bodies fully subsidized from public revenue. The purpose of this circular is

to secure your co-operation in supporting Government's anti-smoking policy and

particularly in requesting your staff to refrain from smoking in schools.

3. The following paragraphs outline in detail Government's anti-smoking

measures:

A) Avoidance of smoking during public appearances

(i) To demonstrate support for Government's anti-smoking

policy, senior staff of aided secondary and primary schools

should not be seen smoking in public appearance in an

official capacity.


- 2 -

(ii) They are particularly requested not to smoke in the

following circumstances:

(a) when appearing on television or likely to be

photographed by the press; or

(b) during press conference.

(B) Observance of smoking bans in offices and display of "no

smoking" signs

(i) Smoking in certain enclosed public areas is prohibited under

the Smoking (Public Health) Ordinance. In addition,,

individual government departments have through

administrative measures banned smoking in some of their

premises. These include clinics, health centres, wards,

conference rooms, canteens in Government medical and

health institutions and classrooms, playgrounds, libraries,

canteens in government schools.

(ii) In public waiting areas, lifts and conference rooms, "no

smoking" signs should be displayed stating legibly "1L ty, - > v& ^ "J*^UM-11 in Chinese and "No smoking" in English. As for

lift lobbies, the sign should state "4f ^v^^^

in Chinese and "No smoking inside lift" in English.


-3 -

(iii) "No smoking" stickers are available from the Hong Kong

Council on smoking and Health. However, permanent "no

smoking" signs should be used as far as possible to ensure

that they remain in legible conditions. These permanent

signs, which may be ordered through the Correctional

Services Department, are generally black and/or red on a

white background. Orders of permanent signs can be placed

with the Marketing Manage, Correctional Services

Industries Headquarters, c/o Stanley Prison, Stanley

indicating the size and quantity required, the colours

preferred and enclosing a copy of the artwork for the sign.

Expenses for ordering such permanent signs can be charged

to the School and Class Grant.

(C) Avoidance of smoking in schools

(i) Whilst Hong Kong does not have statutory provision

prohibiting or restricting smoking at the workplace, it is a

growing trend worldwide to protect the rights of non-

smoking workers.

(ii) In view of the increasing concern amongst staff over health

risks and discomfort arising from exposure to passive

smoking, all staff (general and teaching) are requested to

co-operate and refrain from smoking in schools to make for

a healthier working and learning environment.


. 4 -

The Hong Kong Council on Smoking and Health

4. The Hong Kong Council on Smoking and Health (COSH) was established

in October 1987 to step up and co-ordinate Government's anti-smoking efforts

and to encourage greater public participation. The Council, an independent

statutory body on public subvention, is primarily responsible for educating the

public on the harmful effects of smoking and serves as an advisory body to

Government on matters related both to smoking and other forms of tobacco

usage,

5. The Council draws members from the medical, educational, legal, public

relations, accountancy and other professions including representatives of the

Director of Health and Director of Information Services. The Council's

secretariat is headed by an Executive Director.

6. Correspondence or enquiries about smoking and health may be directed

to:

Executive DirectorHong Kong Council on Smoking and HealthWah Yuen Building, 1st Floor145449 Queen's Road CentralHong Kong(Tel No. : 854 0702 or 854 0632Fax No. : 5458931)

K.H. Chanfor Director of Education

To: Supervisors & Heads of all aided primary and secondary schools(including special schools) - for necessary action

Heads of Sections/Colleges/ILE - for information


Ref. : E.D.(PE) 1/1/8/74 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

10 June 1992

GENERAL SCHOOLS CURRICULUM CIRCULAR NO. 31/92

Safety Precautions in the Conduct of School Athletic Meets

Heads of schools are requested to note the content of this circularand bring it to the attention of all physical education teachers and teachersresponsible for organizing school athletic meets.

2. This circular serves as a reminder to schools about the generalsafety precautions they should take in organizing school athletic meets.Appendix II is a guide to teachers on the safety precautions which should betaken in respect of individual events.

General Measures

3. In organizing a school athletic meet, the school head should ensurethat:

(a) the organizer or co-organizers possess the necessary training,experience and knowledge of the activities involved;

(b) the officials are fully briefed on the rules to be followed and thesafety precautions to be carried out, in order to avoid possibleinjury; and

(c) students have been provided with training experience and arephysically fit for participating in the events for which they haveentered.

Programme Planning

4. In drawing up a programme, the school head should ensure:

(a) that the events have been taught either in physical educationlessons or in training programmes after school hours, andopportunities for experiencing the events have been given to theparticipating students, and that students are fit and have thenecessary skill and stamina to take part in the events;

(b) that students are not allowed to participate in more than threeindividual events on any one day during an athletic meet;


- 2 -

(c) that careful consideration is given to the layout of the sportsground/stadium when running, jumping and throwing events arescheduled, to avoid potential dangers (for example, if the cage ofthe discus throw is sited very close to the starting point of the200m race, and there is any likelihood of the discus striking thecompetitors/judges of the running event, these two events shouldnot be scheduled to take place at the same time);

(d) that track events of a similar type, such as 100m and 200m, 800mand 1500m, etc, are not closely scheduled for competitors of thesame grade;

(e) that the heats, the semi-finals and the final of the same event arearranged with suitable time intervals between them(the suggested minimum time intervals for track events are : -

60m, 100m, 200m - 45 minutes400m, 800m - 90 minutes1500m, 3000m - 3 hours);

(f) that long distance events are not scheduled during hot periods ofthe day, in particular in the hot season;

(g) that javelin, discus and softball throws are not conducted at thesame time; *

«(h) that the rules of each type of event, the availability of manpower

and facilities, the enrolment of participants and time available forrunning the programme have all been given due consideration;

(i) that qualifying rounds for over-subscribed events are conductedprior to the meet to reduce the number of participants according tothe availability of time and for ease of control; and

(j) that either an application is made for extending the meet foranother day or the programme is cut to fit the time available ifthe competition time-table appears to be too tight.

Administrative Procedure

5. Parents should be informed that athletic competition is a strenuousactivity not suitable for students suffering from illness or diseases such asheart and vascular diseases, and that participation is voluntary. The writtenconsent of the parents of participating students must be obtained before the dayof competition.

6- School heads are strongly advised to invite qualified first aidersform St. John Ambulance Brigade or the Auxiliary Medical Services to assist infirst aid treatment. If this cannot be arranged, the school should appoint anofficial either inside or outside the school with a valid first aid certificate toperform such duties.


7. The route of evacuation from the spectator stands to publictransport after the meet and in emergency situations should be well planned.

8. One copy of the programme, including information on the timeschedule, order of events, sports ground layout plan and number of heats andcompetitors, should be sent to the appropriate District Amenities Officer of theUrban Services Department or the appropriate District Leisure Manager of theRegional Services Department at least three weeks prior to the meet.

9. If all the proposed events are within those tabulated at AppendixI and if the guidelines at paragraph 4 in this circular have already beenobserved during programme planning, it is not necessary for the school toforward the programme to the Education Department for comment. Otherwise, theschool should send the programme to the appropriate District Education Officerfor comment at least three weeks before the meet.

10. The school should liaise with the officer-in-charge of the sportsground/stadium and the duty officer on the day of the meet at least threeworking days prior to the meet, to make sure that there will be proper andadequate provision of equipment and facilities for the events. In particular, thehead of school must ensure that : -

(a) a record of agreed arrangements is made;

(b) the officer-in-charge or duty officer with whom thearrangements are made will be on duty at the meet; and

(c) a layout plan of the sports ground/stadium is obtainedindicating clearly and correctly the venues for variousevents, the telephone and emergency exits, the equipmentroom, the changing room, the socket for the P.A. system, thespectator and the official stands, the parking space foremergency vehicles, etc.

11. The school should ensure that there are sufficient officialsoperating in the field. Junior students should not be assigned duties in respectof throwing events. Students of senior forms with appropriate training could beassigned specific duties and assist in the meet. All officials must be properlybriefed. The briefing should cover the rules, the potential dangers, the safetymeasures, the co-ordination between judges and helpers, discipline, and controlof the participating students.

12. A meeting within the school should be held before the athletic meet.Officials, student helpers, participating students and spectators should be madefully aware of : -

(a) the potential dangers involved;

(b) the necessary safety precautions to be observed;

(c) the responsibility of every individual for the prevention ofaccidents;

(d) the route of evacuation after the meet and in an emergency;


- 4 -

(e) the need to maintain good discipline;

(f) the rules to be observed during the meet;

(g) the locations of the first aid post, the telephone and emergencyexits, the marshalling area, the equipment room, the changing room,the spectator and official stands, the parking spaces for emergencyvehicles, etc; and

(h) the need to pay attention to announcements from the official stand.

13. Heads of private schools should ensure that proper indemnity andpersonal accident and liability insurance cover have been arranged for allofficials, teachers, student helpers and competitors. (The liability of governmentand aided schools will be borne by the Government and the block insurancepolicy respectively.)

14. If a starting pistol is to be used, an exemption permit granted bythe Commissioner of Police should be obtained. Schools are advised to apply forthe permit at least 14 days prior to the meet. Only authorized persons mayoperate a starting pistol. The starting pistol should never be held close to theeyes or ears or left loaded.

Conduct of Meet

15. Competitors should be advised to warm-up thoroughly before eachevent. As there is inevitably a good deal of waiting during the meet, studentsshould be taught to keep their bodies warm. Poor performance and pulledmuscles often result from cold bodies. If a student is without a track suit,he/she should wear a sweater, overcoat and trousers. This is of vitalimportance on cold days.

16. All apparatus must be checked for safety before use. Damagedequipment should not be used.

17. Special care must be taken when the ground is wet. In dampconditions, cloths should be available for drying implements. If it rains,throwing, high jumping and hurdling should be suspended as they areparticularly hazardous.

18. The head of school should ensure that students not taking part inthe events are not allowed to enter the track and field areas. Officials, scoutsand prefects should be instructed to enforce this rule strictly. Each competitorshould be provided with a number cloth with proper identification marks.Officials should wear uniforms or the same type of shirt, hat or arm band in abright colour for the purpose of identification.

19« On the completion of each event, all competitors must leave thefield or track and return to the spectator stand immediately.


20. When organizing school athletic meets, schools are urged to followclosely the guidance contained in this circular and the booklet on SafetyPrecautions in Physical Education for Hong Kong Schools. The rules and typesof events should, as far as possible, conform to those drawn up for the inter-school athletic competitions organized by the Hong Kong Schools SportsAssociation or the New Territories Schools Sports Association.

21. For enquiries, please contact the Physical Education Section on8392600, 8392602, 8392605, 8392607, 8392608 or 8392609.

22. This circular supersedes General Schools Curriculum CircularNo.41/91 dated 11 September 1991.

C. L. HOfor Director of Education

To : Heads of all Secondary and Primary Schools - for necessary actionHeads of Sections/Colleges/I.L.E. - for information


Appendix I

Events Recommended for School Athletic Meet

GradeEvent

60m

100m

200m

400m

800m

1500m

3000m

5000m

100H

110H

400H

4 x 100m

4 x 400M

High Jump

Long Jump

Triple Jump

Softball Throw

Shot Put

Discus

Javelin

Boys

Secondary

A

V

y

/y/yyy

0.91rn

1 m

0.91m

y

yV

y

y-

5.4kg

1.5kg

700g

B

N/

N/

yyyy--

0.91m

0.91m

-

yy/yyy

4 kg

1 kg

600g

c

-j

yyy

y

y-

-

0.83m

-

-

/

yyy-y

4 kg

1 kg

-

Primary

I

yyy

y--rr

-

-

-

-

y

~

\/

y-

y

2.72kg

-

- .

II

yy--«--.---y-yy-y-

-

-

Girls

Secondary

A

/

yN/

N/

</

-.

-

-

0,33m

*

-

/

>/

%/

y-

/4 kg

1 kg

600g

B

y

V

V*

y

>/-

«

-

0.83m

-

-

yyyy-

y4 kg

1 kg

600g

C

y

yy/y

™«-

0.76m

«

.

y

yyy„

y2.72kg

1 kg

.

Primary

I

y

/

y-

--.»..-

y-

yy-

y2.72kg

-

-

II

yy-

-

.

.

-

-

.

„

-

y-

yy-

y---

A : age over 16

B : age 14 - 16

C : age rnider 14

I : age over 11

II ; age 11 and under


Appendix II

A Guide to Safety Precautions in Conducting Events

in School Athletic Meets

I. Track Events

1. At the earliest opportunity, students should be alerted to thedanger of spikes caused by improper handling. Competitors shouldbe reminded to wear proper spikes.

2. Spikes, starting blocks, hammers, nails and other implements mustbe removed from the track immediately after use. They should notbe lying around when not in use.

3. Before starting a race, the track should be cleared for thecompetitors of that race.

4. All races of one lap or less should be run in lanes. It isparticularly important to enforce this rule in relay races.

5. The starting area for distance running and the take-over zones forthe 4 X 400m relay should be properly organised to avoidcompetitors bunching up.

6. If spikes are worn in distance races, it is advised that either therunners should be kept within an appropriate number, or therunners of the same team/house should be lined up in single-filewith the strongest runner in front.

7. Students should not be allowed to run alongside competitors on theedge of the track.

8. If 'finishing tape' is used, it should be an easily breakable worstedthread. The height should be adjusted so that it will not hurt thenecks of the runners.

9. Hurdles should be set at correct positions and heights. Weightsshould be adjusted at appropriate positions if built-in weighthurdles are used.

II. Field Events

1. General

a. No student should be allowed to "play about" with theimplements/instruments.

b. Throwing sectors and landing areas should be rope off. Theropes should be positioned well away from the sector linesmarked on the ground or the landing areas for each event.A notice of warning should be displayed outside the ropes*


- 2 -

c. Before each throw or jump, the judge should stand in thecircle, or near the scratch line, or in front of the high jumpbar/take-off board to make sure that no competitor will takehis/her throw/jump until all is clear and a signal is given.After the throw/jump, the judge should return immediately tohis position to ensure that no competitor will perform whilethe throw or the jump is being measured.

d. The officials and the other competitors must be kept wellaway from the throwing side when a competitor is making anattempt. They should also be told to deep their eyes on thethrower and get a clear view of the possible flight of theimplement.

e. All jumpers/throwers should be instructed that an attemptmust not be made if they are aware that somebody is movingwithin the approach or flight path, even though their nameshave been called by the judges. It is important that thispoint should be emphasized and that everyone should havethe responsibility to prevent accident.

f. Safety horns, loud hailers and flags should always be readyfor field officials' use. Where applicable, a safety hornshould be used before each throw.

g. As the standard of student competitors is not high, inparticular when performing the turn in a discus throw or theFosbury Flop in a high jump, they are likely to lose controlor their sense of direction. Therefore a wider safety areafor discus throws and a wider landing for high jumps shouldbe allowed.

h. Implements and instruments should never be left on theground or the landing area in such a way as to pose apotential hazard e.g. javelins should never be left struck inthe ground at a dangerous angle. They should be placed onthe ground or in a storage rack in vertical position at theassembly point.

2. Throwing Events

a. The judges must make sure that the throwing field isabsolutely clear before a competitor is allowed to enter thecircle in the case of discus or shot-put events or tocommence the approach run in the case of javelin andsoftball throw events.

b. Clear instructions should be given that implements must bethrown only from the circle or scratch line at the signal ofthe judge.

c. Throwers must remain behind the circle or scratch line afterthe throw. They must never run after the implement. Onlyofficials should be allowed to retrieve the implement when asignal or instruction is given. The official or the assistantmust walk to the implement and return it by hand. Theimplement must never be thrown back.


d. Care should be taken when the implements are being carriedfrom one place to another. A basket should be used to carrythe shots as injury can result if they are dropped. Thejavelins must be carried vertically with the point near to theground. In no circumstances should a student run with theimplement except in the process pf making a proper throw incompetition

e. A throwing cage with a safety net of at least 4m in heightshould be used for the discus competition. Other competitorsshould stand a good distance away from the net of the cage.

f. No attempt should be made to stop a rolling shot by hand.

3. Long and Triple Jumps

a. The edge of the landing area should be level with the groundand covered with sandbags to prevent the jumpers hittingthem.

b. The sand pit must be cleared before a competition. Allrubble, metal and glass pieces etc. should be removed. Thesand pit should be dug over and levelled with a rake orspade after every jump. The tools should not be left in thepit or lying near the landing area where they might injurea jumper falling out of the landing area. They should neverbe left lying on the ground with the teeth pointing upwards.

c. The runway must be level and firm enough to prevent therisk of ankle and foot injuries. The take-off board must beof regulation dimensions and must be firmly fixed in theground. A loose board may cause serious damage to theinstep.

d. Take-off boards or areas must be positioned so that everyperformer can land safely in the landing area. This is ofparticular importance in the triple jump where the standardof performance can vary greatly within a group. Theprovision of additional take-off boards at distances of 7m,9m and llm, etc. is recommended. Grass is not a suitabletake-off surface for competition.

e. The officials and jumpers must be careful that no jumpshould be made while the landing area is being dug or raked.

4. High Jump

a. The landing area must be large and soft enough to allowuncontrolled landings to be safe. Gymnastic mats are notconsidered suitable. No jumper should attempt a FosburyFlop unless the landing area conforms to the measurement(not less than 5m long by 3m wide) recommended by the HongKong Amateur Athletic Association.


- 4 -

b. In competition, the landing: area must be of adequate size tobe safe for all competitors no matter what style of jump isbeing used. The cushioning material must be of adequatedepth or density to prevent 'bottoming', i.e. the landing mustbe completely absorbed and there must be no possibility ofimpact against the hard surface beneath. In addition, atleast 1 more polypad should be placed at each of the twosides of the landing area.

c. Where multi-units are used, they must have suitableattachments and adequate points so that they can beproperly linked. A protective sheet or tarpaulin could alsobe used to cover them tightly to prevent athletes slippingbetween the joints.

d. The surface of the landing area must be comfortable to landon and of low friction level. The surface material must beevenly spread and closely linked giving an even cushioningeffect over the area as a whole. There should be no gapsor holes.

e. For the sake of safety, the dimensions, resilience andsuitability of the landing area as stated above should becarefully checked before a competition.

f. Diving over the bar with double foot take off should neverbe allowed in competition.

g. Officials responsible for re-setting the fallen bar should beadvised to stand well clear of the uprights when jumping isin progress.

h. The crossbar should be set horizontally in line with the edgeof the landing area.


Ref. : ED(PE) 1/1/8/74 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

13 May 1992

GENERAL SCHOOLS CURRICULUM CIRCULAR NO. 24/92

Safety Precautions in Conduct of School Swimming Galas

Heads of schools are requested to bring this circular to the attention ofall teachers of physical education and teachers responsible for organising schoolswimming galas.

2. When hiring a swimming pool for a swimming gala, schools must liaisewith the officer-in-charge of the pool concerned together with the pool duty-officer three working days prior to the day of the gala so as to be satisfied thatthere will be proper and adequate provision for the safety of students. Inparticular, it must be ensured that:

(i) a record is made on points discussed and arrangements agreed;

(ii) the teacher-in-charge of the gala should approach the DutyOfficer-in charge of the pool on date of the gala to see thatrelevant points discussed and agreed as mentioned in (i) abovehave been arranged;

(iii) a layout plan of the pool area indicating clearly the positions ofthe stationary life-guard posts (including student life-guards ifany), the first-aid room, the telephone, the life buoys and the lifesaving poles is available; and

(iv) qualified life-guards will be on duty at appropriate locationsthroughout the programme of events.

3. Schools are recommended to provide student life-savers with at leastthe Bronze Medallion life saving qualification to assist the pool management inwater safety. These students should wear uniforms or other identification so asto be easily distinguished from other students.

4. School officials should be assigned to ensure that all swimmers takingpart in any event leave the pool water immediately at the end of each race or atthe end of each leg in the case of a relay race.

5. The school should ensure that the start and finish areas of the pool areclear of all unnecessary persons and, to this end, participants in following eventsshould not assemble in those areas until all participants in the preceding eventhave left the pool.

6. Heads should ensure that school officials assigned for duty on the dayof the gala are properly briefed with particular emphasis on what action to takein the event of an emergency.


7. School officials responsible for drawing up the programme of eventsmust satisfy themselves beforehand that participating students have theswimming capability to take part in the event for which they have entered.

8. One copy of the proposed list of swimming events should be sent to theDistrict Amenities Officer of Urban Services Department or District LeisureManager of Regional Services Department at least three weeks prior to the dayof the school swimming gala.

9. If all the proposed events are within those tabulated in Appendix I, andif the guidelines in this circular have been observed at the preparatory stage, it isnot necessary for the school to forward to the Education Department forcomment. Otherwise, a copy of the list of proposed swimming events should besent to the appropriate District Education Officers at least three weeks prior to theswimming gala.

10. Short distance races, e.g. 25m events and novice competitions shouldbe held in a shallow training pool or across the shallow width of the main pool notexceeding 1.5m deep. Races should not start or finish in the middle of the mainpool. Competitions involving floating aids for non-swimmers should not beallowed.

11. Competitors are strongly advised to wear swimming caps for easyidentification.

12. Parents should be advised that student participation in swimming eventis voluntary.

13. For enquiries, please contact Ms Chan Lin, Inspector (PhysicalEducation), at 839 2605.

14. This circular supersedes the General Schools Curriculum Circular No.10/91 dated 6 February 1991.

C.L. Hofor Director of Education

To : Heads of all primary and secondary schools- for necessary action

Heads of sections/colleges/ILE- for information


Appendix I

Swimming Events Recommended for School Swimming Galas

Y

G

1

R

s

x>--^tyles

XGrade

Distance v

nr\ fY\\j\j HI

1 OO m

200 m

4 v 1ZC\ mX OU IT!

50 m

100 m

200m

4 x/ C/"\ rr\x ou m

Free

Style

A R f* n

A R r

A B C

A R p nD U U

A B C D

A B C

A B C

A D r* nD L* LJ

Breast

Stroke

A R r nD V* U

A R T

A B C

A BC D

A B C

A B C

Back

Stroke

A R p nD Vwr L/

A R P

A B C

A B C D

A B C

A B C

Butterfly

A R p nD v* LJ

A R P

A B C

A BC D

A B C

A B C

Medley

A B C

A D p nD L* LJ

A B C

A R p nD v-» LJ

D grade :

C grade :

B grade :

A grade :

Age under 11

Age 11 to 14

Age 15 to 16

Age over 16


Ref.: in ED(GR) 2/1408/69 Education DepartmentHong Kong

9 October 1991

General Schools Miscellaneous Circular No. 105/91

Eve Care

Heads of schools are requested to make every effort to ensure that pupils are notsubjected to any undue eyestrain. In this respect, the following matters are of particularimportance:

(I) General Eve Care

(1) Lighting

(a) At School

Attention is drawn to Regulation 41 of the EducationOrdinance which reads as follows:

"All classrooms and the blackboards therein shall beadequately illuminated and the blackboards shall be so placedas to cause the least eyestrain to the pupils and shall nothave a surface that reflects light."

Teachers should be constantly on the alert to detect individualpupils who have vision trouble. Heads of schools shouldinform all teachers of the signs of eye trouble in children sothat they will know what to look for and hence takeappropriate action, e.g. advise the parents accordingly. (SeeAppendix I.)

In the case of malfunctioning, the TV set should be turned offto avoid undue eyestrain.

(b) At Home

Heads of schools are further asked to impress upon theirpupils the dangers inherent in studying in poor light at home.Heads should also take whatever action is open to them ofconveying this warning to parents.


- 2-

Apart from choosing the right size of print for textbooks,Heads of schools are asked to impress upon their pupils theimportance of keeping an upright posture and appropriatereading distance (33 cm recommended) in the classroom andalso at home.

(2) Textbooks

Attention is drawn to Regulation 50 of the Education Ordinancewhich reads as follows:

"Textbooks used in schools shall contain print of such a type andsize as is calculated not to strain the eyes of pupils."

In this connection, please find attached a leaflet showing the varioustypes and sizes of print recommended for different age groups. Thefollowing sizes of print are considered to be most suitable:

(a) For Kindergarten classes, point 90 or above.

(b) For Primary 1 and 2, point 32 or above. Spacing betweencharacters should be 1/3 the size of the type used.

(c) For primary 3-6, point 20 or above. Spacing betweencharacters as in (b).

(d) For Secondary schools, point 16 or above.

It is also suggested that a cream matt finished paper be used inpreference to white or glossy finish as this is not so hard upon theeye.

(II) Prevention of Eve Accidents

Teachers responsible for certain subjects such as Integrated Science,Chemistry, Physics, Biology, Human Biology, Home Economics, Design andTechnology and Physical Education should take appropriate precautions toavoid erroneous handling of dangerous apparatus, equipment and chemicalsby pupils. Adequate warnings before any potentially hazardous situationsor games, e.g. hockey, fencing, wrestling, etc. should be given withforesight on the part of the teachers so as to educate the pupils and preparethem to take appropriate precautions before such situations.


-3 -

Objects with sharp edges or points should be kept properly and out of reachof small children. Sharpened pencils are a potential cause of eye injurywhen held at eye level. School children should be advised to hold suchobjects with the pointed end downwards.

In case of foreign bodies in the eye or eye injuries, medical advice should besouth immediately. (See Appendix II).

(Ill) Personal Hygiene

Personal hygiene is important in the prevention of eye infection, e.g.trachoma and red eye. Pupils with red eyes should be advised to stay awayfrom school and seek medical advice. All pupils should be instructed toavoid using other people's handkerchiefs, towels or washing utensils.

2. This supersedes the General Schools Miscellaneous Circular No. 118/90 dated 3October 1990.

S.W. WONGfor Director of Education

To : Heads of all Schools - for necessary actionHeads of Sections/Colleges/ILE - for information


Appendix I

It is important that slight visual defect should be detected early in its course andnecessary corrections made. An observant teacher who knows what to look for canidentify children who have visual trouble. Signs of eye trouble in children are as follows:

Behaviour

Rubs eyes excessively.Shuts or covers one eye, tilts head or thrusts head forward.Has difficulties in reading or in other work requiring close use of the eyes.Blinks more than usual or is irritable when doing close work.Stumbles over small objects.Holds books close to eyes.Is unable to participate in game requiring distant vision.Squints eyelids together or frowns.

Appearance

• Cross-eyed.• Red-rimmed, encrusted or swollen eyelids.• Inflamed or watery eyes.• Recurring styes (boils in the eyelid).

Complaints

Cannot see well.Dizziness )Headaches ) after close eye workNausea )Blurred or double vision.

The parents should be informed of any suspicion of vision trouble and medicaladvice should be sought.

Appendix II

Services of Eve Care in Hong Kong

1. The casualty departments of all hospitals take care of all emergency eye injuries.

2. The eye clinics operated by the Hospital Services Department take care of eyediseases.

3. The Comprehensive Observation Service is a service in the Maternal and ChildHealth Centres run by the Family Health Services of the Department of Health.This service offers screening tests in the various Department fields of the child frombirth to five years old including eyesight screening tests.


Point sizes of Chinese characters

/Kindergarten 90 ftSclUi. Point 90 or above

> d4^S^ /; Primary 1 & 2 32 ^g | j;/ Point 32 or above

& t 5

/ Primary 3 - 6 20 ISS^mJt/ Point 20 or above

/ Secondary School 16 16 or above

5The School Curriculum

Annex Topic

(l)(a) Subjects Currently Available at Both Junior and SeniorLevels

(l)(b) The Sixth Form Curriculum

(2) GSCC No 43/91 dated 18 September 1991Homework in Schools

(3) ASGC No. 6/90 dated 14 February 1990Implementation of a Permanent Expatriate English LanguageTeacher Scheme from September 1991

(4) ASGC No. 27/82 dated 24 February 1982Guidelines on Remedial Teaching in Secondary Schools

(5) School-based Curriculum Project Scheme

(6)(a) GSCC No. 50/90 dated 12 December 1990Textbooks in Secondary Schools

(6)(b) Guidelines concerning Textbook Selection Procedures andAcceptance of Publishers' Donations by Schools

(7) Locations and Opening Hours of Advisory InspectorateTeaching and Resource Centres

(8) Information Sheet on Educational Television Service

(9) The Wire-free Induction Loop System

Annex Topic

(10) Courses offered by the Field Studies Centre

(ll)(a) Guidelines for the Conduct of School Examinations

(1 l)(b) Instructions to be Followed in the Conduct of SchoolExaminations

Section 5 Annex (l)(a)

Subjects Currently Available at Both Junior and Senior Levels

(i) Subjects available at junior secondary level :Suggested No. ofperiods per week

Accommodation and Catering Services * 5Air-conditioning & Refrigeration * 5Art and Design 3-4Automobile Repairs * 5Biology IBook-keeping * 3-5Buddhist Studies j?Chemistry JChinese History 2Chinese Language 6-7Computer Literacy 1Construction (Interior Decoration) * 5Construction (Wood) * . 5Design and Technology gram sch: 2-3, tech sch: 3-5Economics and Public Affairs 2Electrical Studies * 5Engine Studies * 5English Language 7-8Ethical/Religious Education 1-2Fabrication * 5Fashion and Clothing * 5French IGeography 2Hindi * *History 2Home Economics 3Light Metalvork and Finishing * 5Marine Engineering * 5Mathematics 5Metalwork 5Music 2Office Practice * 2-3Physical Education 2Physics IPottery fPrinting * 5Putonghua 1Retail Merchandising * 3-5Science 4Silversmithing and Jewellery * 5Social Studies 2-3Technical Drawing 3Textiles * 5Typing 2-3Urdu t

These subjects are mainly offered in prevocational schools.Subjects without CDC syllabuses. Their time allocation is decidedby schools*

Section 5 Annex (l)(a) p.2

(ii) Subjects available at senior secondary level :Suggested ,Vb. ofperiods per week

Accommodation and Catering Services * 5Additional Mathematics 3Art and Design 4Biology 4Buddhist Studies SChemistry 4Chinese History 4Chinese Language 6-7Chinese Literature 3-4Commerce 3-4Computer Studies 4Design and Technology 5Dressmaking 4Economics 4Economics and Public Affairs 4Electronics and Electricity 5Engineering Science * 4English Language 7-8English Literature 2-3Fashion and Clothing * 5French t •Geography 4Government and Public Affairs 4Hindi • |History 4Home Economics 4Human Biology 4Mathematics 6Metalvork * 5 ,Music 1-2; for exam 4-5Needlework/Dress 4Physical Education 2; for exam 4Physics 4Pottery 4Principles of Accounts 3-4 •Religious Studies (Christianity) 1-2; for exam 2-4Shorthand 4-5Social Studies 4Technical Drawing 4Textiles * 5Typewriting 3-4Urdu if

These subjects are mainly gffered in prevocational schools.Subjects without CDC syllabuses. Their time allocation is decidedby schools.

Section 5 Annex (l)(a) P.3

(iii) Cross-curricular studies with implementation guidelines:

There are currently three cross-curricular studies taught through othersubjects and various functions and activities of the schools at bothjunior and senior secondary levels. Guidelines are provided on theirimplementation.

Civic EducationMoral EducationSex Education

A set of guidelines on Environmental Education is being developed.

Section 5 The sixth Form curriculum Annex (l)(b)

1. The new sixth form curriculum to be implemented inthe school year 92/93 should cover three maincomponents: a subject specialist component(A-levels), a language skills component and acomponent which seeks to broaden students'intellectual and cultural horizons (AS-levels).

2. The following A-level subjects are offered in92/93:

Applied MathematicsArt & DesignBiologyBusiness StudiesChemistryChinese HistoryChinese LiteratureComputer StudiesEconomicsEngineering ScienceEnglish LiteratureGeographyGovernment & Public AffairsHistoryMusicPhysicsPrinciples of AccountsPure MathematicsSociology

3. Time allocation: It is recommended that 8 periodsper week, each of 40 minutes should be allocatedto each A-level subject.

4* The following AS-level language subjects areoffered in 92/93:

Use of EnglishChinese Language & Culture

5. The following AS-level subjects are offered in92/93:

Applied MathematicsArt & DesignBiologyChemistryChinese HistoryChinese Language & CultureComputer ApplicationsDesign & TechnologyEnglish LiteratureEthics & Religious StudiesGovernment & Public AffairsHistory

'• • ' . „ Liberal Studies.. • • ' ;' . ' ", •/• . . . ' •Mathematics & StatisticsPhysicsSociologyUse of English

Section 5 Annex (l)(b) p.2

6. AS-level Music will be offered at a later date.

7. Time allocations It is recommended tliat 4 or 5periods per week, each of 40 minutes, should beallocated to each AS-level subject offered.

8. No standard pattern of subjects is recommendedsince it is desirable that principals should havethe maximum flexibility in determining what isappropriate for their schools and students.

9. Additional information can be found in theproposed Guide to the Sixth Form Curriculum to bepublished in due course.

Section 5 Annex (2)

Ref. : ED(GR) 1408/61 Education DepartmentHong Kong

18 September 1991

General Schools Curriculum Circular No. 43/91

Homework in Schools

Heads of schools are reminded of their responsibility to supervise and regulate theamount and type of homework set at each level.

2. It is generally accepted that carefully selected homework assignments may havepositive and beneficial effects in reinforcing and facilitating classroom learning, encouragingindependent learning, and fostering a closer relationship between home and school.However, homework set arbitrarily or without reference to pupils' learning needs may bevalueless or even harmful.

3. There can be no hard-and-fast rules about the amount and type of homework whichshould be set at each school level, in view of the wide variation in pupils' learning needs,abilities and home environment. This is a matter on which teachers are expected to exerciseprofessional judgement and common sense. However, it is important that each school shouldhave a homework policy for which the Head carries responsibility in order to exercise propercontrol over the homework being set. Such a policy should be worked out in consultationwith teaching staff and, wherever possible, explained carefully to parents.

4. It is suggested that a homework time-table be drawn up for each class, to ensure aneven spread of homework over the week (or teaching cycle) and a balanced coverage ofsubjects. It is strongly recommended, particularly at the primary and junior secondarylevels, that teachers be given clear instructions on the amount to be set and the subjects tobe covered for each class each day. Due recognition should be given at all times to the ageand abilities of pupils.

5. Homework should not be set merely for its own sake but should have a specificobjective. It should not be used as a means of punishment. It should be planned and chosento complement and reinforce the work being done in the classroom. Exercises involvingpointless mechanical repetition should be avoided. Pupils should not normally be introducedto new work through homework as this can lead to unnecessary and damaging frustration andmisunderstanding.

6. Heads of schools should review their homework policy regularly to ensure that itmeets educationally desirable objectives and continues to be appropriate to theircircumstances.

Section 5 Annex (2)

7. Officers of the Education Department will continue to advise and assist schools onhomework. During their visits to schools they will note the steps being taken to ensure thatboth the amount and type of homework being set are appropriate. All complaints receivedfrom the public concerning homework will be thoroughly investigated.

8. Attached to this circular is a copy of Homework Guidelines outlining some practicalmeasures which might be taken to promote the more effective use of homework as asupplementary learning resource.

S.W. WONGfor Director of Education

To : Heads of all Primary and Secondary Schools - for necessary actionHeads of Sections/Colleges/ILE - for information


Homework Guidelines

The purpose of these guidelines is to outline some practical measures which might betaken to promote the more effective use of homework as a supplementary learning resource.

Function of homework

Well-designed and properly regulated homework can reinforce and facilitate classroomlearning. For instance, pupils may be asked to complete some assignments that cannot becompleted within school hours or within the confines of the school. Pupils may also berequired to revise previous lessons or to prepare for a coming one. Through homework,pupils are also trained to acquire the ability and self-discipline needed to work without directsupervision (but with adequate guidance from teachers), particularly in project work whichrequires pupils to collect and collate information independently. Although the emphasis onthe various functions of homework may vary from subject to subject, teachers should beaware of these functions in order to avoid setting homework irrelevant to the learning needsof their pupils.

School policy on homework

An overall policy regarding the type, frequency and amount of homework should bedrawn up by the school head, in consultation with the teaching staff. The agreed policy willthen be implemented under the supervision of the school head and should be carefullyexplained to all parents, particularly those of new pupils at the beginning of the school year.Guidance to parents has proved to be very useful in helping parents to understand their roleand in soliciting their assistance and support.

Homework assignments

(a) Type - assignments should be varied in type in accordance with the needs of pupilsand subjects. It is important to note that reading, studying and collection ofinformation are as important as written assignments. In fact, writing should notoccupy too large a proportion of homework time and pointless mechanical repetitionshould be avoided.

*

(b) Guidance - assignments should be clearly explained by teachers with regard to howand when the assignments are to be completed. Adequate guidance from teachers willsave pupils' time in completing the assignments and undue frustration can be avoided.

(c) Frequency - assignments should be carefully regulated so that pupils are not undulyoverburdened with homework on certain days as compared with others. This can bedone through the collaboration between different subject teachers and is bestcontrolled by a homework time-table.


(d) Quantity - assignments should be reasonably balanced in terms of quantity so thathomework will not cause physical as well as mental fatigue. It is difficult to specifythe amount of homework to be set at each school level as this depends on a numberof factors which vary greatly from school to school and pupil to pupil. These factorsinclude pupils' learning needs and abilities, home environment and the amount of freetime at home. The guiding principle is that ample time should be allowed for socialfunctions, outdoor activities, extra-curricular activities and rest which are essentialto pupils' physical as well as social development. In view of the variation incondition from school to school, heads of schools should, in formulating homeworkpolicy, use their own discretion in deciding the appropriate number of hours ofhomework daily at each level of education.

(e) Feedback - assignments should be properly marked and recorded to ensure suitablefeedback to pupils, and provide teachers and parents with a ready monitoring devicefor assessing progress. Records of assignments should also be countersigned atregular intervals, say, once a week, by a parent or guardian. Any serious omissionshould be noted and brought to the attention of the parent or guardian concerned.

September 1991

Education DepartmentHong Kong

Section 5 Annex (3)

Ref : ED(SCH) P/22/89 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

14 February 1990


Implementation of a Permanent ExpatriateEnglish Language Teacher Scheme from September 1991

1. The purposes of this circular are to advise schools of the resultsof the final evaluation of the expatriate English language teachers pilot schemeand to ascertain how many schools would wish to participate in the permanentexpatriate English langauge teacher scheme which, subject to the availability offunds, is scheduled to commence in September 1991.

2. The two-year pilot scheme to provide expatriate English languageteachers in secondary schools, which began in September 1987, ended in August1989 as planned. This pilot scheme was succeeded in September 1989 by a two-year modified scheme, the purpose of which was to ensure continuity andmaintain the momentum generated by the pilot scheme whilst the latter wasbeing evaluated by the British Council.

3. The results of the final evaluation of the pilot scheme show thatoverall the expatriate English teachers :

(a) significantly improved the pupils' English language achievement;

(b) significantly increased the pupils' exposure to English languagelearning; and

(c) made positive contribution to the general aims of the schools. Theoverall impact of the pilot scheme is therefore positive.Accordingly the Government intends, subject to policy and financialapproval, to introduce a permanent expatriate English languageteacher scheme in September 1991.

4. The main features of the permanent scheme which are largely thesame as the present modified scheme will be as follows : -

(a) Participation

Participation in the permanent scheme will be by application andsubject to the availability of funds.

(b) English language subject grant

A subject grant will be provided to participating schools which willcover all expenditure incurred in connection with the employmentof the expatriate English language teachers, as an alternative tothe provision in the Code of Aid for Secondary Schools for theemployment of English language teachers on overseas terms. Inother words, schools employing expatriate English language teacherson overseas terms provided under the Code of Aid will not beeligible for participation in the permanent scheme.

Section 5 Amux (3) p.2

(c) Contract

The contract of service will normally be for a period of two years,subject to renewal after expiry. Details are shown at Appendix 1,but these may be subject to modification.

(d) Maximum number of expatriate teachers

Each participating school, regardless of its size, may employ amaximum of two expatriate English teachers to fill genuine graduateteaching: vacancies.

(e) Recruitment

Participating schools will employ the expatriate English languageteachers directly. Individual schools or sponsoring bodies willthemselves recruit the teachers. The administrative costs incurredin the recruitment may be charged to schools' Tong Fai accounts orto private funds accounts.

(f) Places of recruitment

The recruitment would be conducted in Hong Kong and the UnitedKingdom in the first instance and extended to Australia, NewZealand and Canada if necessary. The services of an agency couldbe employed to undertake the recruitment on behalf of the schools,individually or collectively. Local teachers of English currentlyemployed on overseas terms under the Code of Aid would be eligibleto apply for appointment under the scheme as would other localteaches of English, provided that they are not habitually residentin Hong Kong, Macau, China or Taiwan.

(g) Level of teaching

The schools would have full discretion in the allocation of teachingduties to the expatriate English teachers, and of non-teachingduties which should be mainly of English language/literature work.

(h) Fringe benefits

Enhanced fringe benefits will be provided under the permanentscheme and these will include housing allowance, medical protectionand terminal gratuity. Details are shown at Appendix 2, but thesemay be subject to modification.

(i) Qualifications for appointment

These are outlined at Appendix 3, but these may be subject tomodification.


- 3 -

5. Schools which wish to participate in the permanent scheme inSeptember 1991 or after are requested to complete the attached proforma andreturn it to the District Education Officer concerned on or before 15 March 1990.Nil returns are required. For enquiries, schools are advised to contact theirrespective District Education Officer.


To : Supervisors/Principals of all Aided Secondary Schools- for necessary action

Principals, College of Education } for informationInstitute of Language in Education }


Appendix 1

Contract of Employment and Leave Entitlement

(a) If the date of commencement of a contract is later than 1st September butfalls within the first term of the academic year, the date of terminationshall be as if the contract had commenced on 1st September in that year.

(b) If the date of commencement of a contract is later than the commencementdate of the second term in the academic year, the teacher's service forthe remaining1 of the academic year will not earn leave or passagebenefits and the teacher will be required to serve a period of two yearsfrom 1st September in the calendar year in which his employmentcommenced.

(c) The leave entitlement is the school summer vacation at the end of thecontract. If staffing situation permits, additional leave up to a maximumof 14 days prior to the commencement of summer vacation may beapproved.

(d) Renewal of a contract after expiry may be approved, subject to theavailability of funds. Any leave earned must be taken in the summerholiday preceding the new contract.

(e) If the teacher resigns within the first 12 months of the first contract, theschool will be required to refund to Government

(i) the cost for travelling and baggage, and

(ii) the cost for the outward passage.

If the teacher resigns or has his contract terminated without completionof any subsequent contract, the cost for outward passages should berefunded to the Government.

(Note : Travelling and baggage allowance is provided on firstappointment only.)


Appendix 2

Conditions of Service for Expatriate English Language Teachersin Aided Secondary Schools under the BELT Scheme

The appointment will be on a 2-year contract between the managementcommittee of the teacher. The contract will provide for:

(a) Salaries

(b) Increments

(0

(h)

(i)

Contractgratuity

(d) Passages

(e) Travellingand baggageallowance

(f) Housing

(g) Salaryadvance

Furnitureandappliances

Medical

Graduate Master/Mistress rank (MP 20-37)

will be awarded on the basis of qualificationand experience as for local teachers

25% of total basic salary during the period ofagreement

Economy air tickets to and from country oforigin by the most direct route for wife/children.If air passages by an indirect route arerequired, these may be provided on the basis ofactual cost, but subject to this not exceedingthe cost to Government of the standard economyclass air passage.

A travelling and baggage allowance will beprovided on first appointment only. The presentrate is -Single teacher : $ 800Married teacher : $1,600(Note : being reviewed)

A private tenancy allowance will be providedwith a deduction from salary of 7 1/2%. Thepresent rate is -Single teacher : $6,280Married teacher : $7,070(Note : subject to annual review)

Not exceeding $8,000 on arrival, repayablemonthly within the period of the contract ofemployment.

allowance of $150 p.m. and in addition anadvance of one month's salary can be obtainedand repayable monthly within the period of thecontract of employment.

Non-contributory medical scheme.The present rate is $2,700 for the teacher and$3,100 for each dependent.


(j) Leaveentitlement

TerminalLeave

CasualLeave

SickLeave

MaternityLeave

(k) Promotionprospects

Nil

School summer vacation at the end ofthe contact.

2 days per academic year on groundsof urgent private affairs of graveimportance.

28 days on appointment and 48 dayson completion of each succeeding yearof service. The maximum balancewhich can be accommodated is 168days.

A teacher having completed 40 weeksof resident service prior to thecommencement of maternity leave maybe granted 10 weeks maternity leavewith pay calculated as follows :

4 weeks paid leave prior to theexpected date of confinement

A period of no-pay leave fromthe expected date ofconfinement to the date ofactual confinement

6 weeks of paid leave afterconfinement

Maternity leave is limited to 3surviving children.


Appendix 3

Qualifications for appointment

The qualifications for appointment of expatriate English languageteachers are categorized in the following order of priority : -

(a) Category 1

(i) a BA in English Language, or English Literature or EnglishStudies or a Modern Language; and

(ii) a Certificate in Education or equivalent; and

(iii) a TEFL/TESL qualification at least at the diploma level inthe teaching of English as the second language; and

(iv) at least two years' relevant postgraduate experience ofteaching English as a second or foreign language in arecognised institution at secondary level or above.

(b) Category 2

(i) a B Ed (major in English or Modern Language, but notprimary education specialist) obtained after 3 years1 full-time study; and

(ii) as in (iii) of Category 1; and

(iii) as in (iv) of Category 1;

(c) Category 3

as in Category 1 except (iii) thereof;

(d) Category 4

as in Category 2 except (ii) thereof;

In the event that suitable candidates cannot be recruited, theabove qualifications may be relaxed, as follows, subject to the general maximthat the qualifications of recruits must in no circumstances be lower than thoserequired for appointment as a graduate teacher in the Aided Sector :

(a) Category 1%

a degree in any academic subject (but not in non-academic subjectssuch as PE, Home Economics) would be acceptable, provided that thecandidate also had

(i) a Certificate in Education or equivalent; and

(ii) a TEFL/TESL qualification at least at the diploma level inthe teaching of English as a second language; and


(iii) at least three years' relevant post-graduate experience ofteaching English as a second or foreign language in arecognised institution at secondary level or above,

(b) Category 2

a B Ed degree in any academic subject (but not in non-academicsubjects such as PE, Home Economics) obtained after at least oneyear's full-time study (or at least three years' part-time study)would be acceptable, provided that the Candidate also had

(i) a recognised teaching qualification obtained after at leasttwo years' full-time study prior to the commencement of theB Ed course; and

(ii) a TEFL/TESL qualification at least at the diploma level inthe teaching of English as a second language; and

(iii) at least three years' relevant post-graduate experience ofteaching English as a second or foreign language in arecognised institution at secondary level or above.

Section 5 Annex (3) p.9Proforma

To : District Education Officer/District Education Office,

Education Department-

PERMANENT EXPATRIATE ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHER SCHEME

I wish/do not wish* to apply for participation in. the permanentscheme starting from the following school year :

91/92

92/93

93/94

94/95

95/96

Later

EH3CZ311CHcm

(* Delete as appropriate)

(Please tick as appropriate)

The number of anticipated graduate vacancies by September at the timeof participation which could be filled by the expatriate teachers of English is

One

Two I 1 (Please tick as appropriate)

Not known I 1

Name of School

District

Name of Supervisor

Signature of Supervisor

Date

Section 5 Annex (4)

Hef. : ED(RB) 762/82 II EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

HONG KONG

24 February 1982

AIDED SCHOOLS GENERAL CIRCULAR NO, 27/82

Guidelines on Remedial Teaching in Secondary Schools

In Aided Schools General Circular No4 2/82 of 4 February 19821which announced the provision of additional teachers for aided secondaryschools, mention was made of the fact that guidelines on remedial teachingwould be issued by the Education Department. These are now attached.

2» Heads of schools are reminded that the continued provision of theadditional teaching posts beyond the first year will depend on their beingused for the purposes outlined in Aided Schools General Circular No* 2/82*

3* As indicated in the Guidelines themselves, Heads will haveconsiderable flexibility in organizing remedial language teaching in theirschools. The Education Department's main concern is that the serviceprovided by individual schools should be effective and adequate in scale.Heads of schools and teachers will of course be expected to exercise theirprofessional judgement in deciding on the most appropriate arrangementsfor achieving these objectives in their schools*

D-.B-M. BOARDfor Director of Education

To : Supervisors/Heads of All Aided Secondary andConverting Caput Schools - for necessary action

Supervisors/Heads of all Non-converting Caputand Assisted Private Schools - for information

cc : Principals of Colleges of Education and Technical Teachers' College

Section 5 A*1116* P 2

A Guide to Remedial Teaching in Secondary Schools

(I) Introduction

The Education Department has recently announced a timetablefor improving the staffing of secondary schools. Taking a standard-sizesecondary school as an example, the following additional teachers willbe provided:-

(a) two additional graduate teachers in September 1982;

(b) a third additional graduate teacher in September 1983; and

(c) two additional non-graduate teachers as soon as sufficientnon- graduate teachers have been trained by the Collegesof Education*

Other schools will be provided with additional staff proportionately.

2. The additional teachers at (a) are intended to facilitate theintroduction of remedial teaching in Chinese and English in junior secondaryforms* Those at (b) and (c) are meant to facilitate the introduction ofremedial teaching in other subjects, to strengthen career guidance andcounselling^ and to promote extra-curricular and dommunity- involvementactivities. Heads of schools will have the freedom to deploy theirteacherc in a manner they consider most appropriate, as long as the functionsmentioned above are adequately covered.

3* These guidelines are intended to assist Heads in the organizationof remedial teaching within the normal timetable, particularly in Chineseand English, which should commence in the 1982/83 school year.

(II) Administrative Guidelines

Aim

*U The main object of remedial teaching is to give addition-!help to pupils who, relative to their own class, are behind in the basicsubjects. At the initial stage, remedial teaching in secondary schoolswill be in respect of the two languages, Chinese and English.

Organization

remedial teaching might be organized is discussed belowunder five main headings :-

(a) Basic Requirements

(b) iMode of Operation

(c) Selection of Pupils

(d) Selection of Teachers

(e) Accommodation

/6. (a).

Section 5 A™16* <4> P 3

- 2 -

6. (a) Basic Requirements : These are set out below:-

(i) In accordance with the time-allocation recommended by theCurriculum Development Committee, a school should allocate6-7 periods per week to each remedial Chinese or Englishgroup. This will enable a remedial teacher to take 4remedial groups per week. (It should be noted^ however,that depending on the circumstances of the individualschool, there is no need to designate a single teacher as theremedial teacher. Please refer to para 9 below)* The restof the teacher's timetable should be devoted to thepreparation of lessons, the development of remedialteaching materials and co-ordination with the relevantsubject teachers*

(ii) Remedial teaching should be concentrated at the Form I level,but if necessary, can be extended to Forms II and III*Under no circumstances should remedial groups be used fordrilling pupils for the Scaling Tests in the Junior Secondary"Education Assessment System.

7* (b) Mode of Operation : The pupils concerned, preferably notmore than 20 at a time, are withdrawn for remedial teaching when otherpupils of the class are having lessons in the same subject.

8. (c) Selectionof Pupils : The selection of pupils for remedialteaching should be determined by individual schools based on school resultsand recommendations of teachers.

9. (d) Selection of Teachers : The selection of teachers for remedialteaching is at the school's discretion. These teachers may be deployed fromthe existing staff or directly recruited, as long as they are experiencedteachers of the subject concerned. The remedial groups in a particularsubject may bo taken by one teacher or shared out more widely among otherexperienced teachers.

10* (e) Accommodation : Remedial groups can be accommodated in vacantclassrooms when pupils are having lessons in other parts of the school,assembly hall or covered playground corners and special rooms or any othervacant rooms as available.

11. Heads of schools should note that the arrangements suggested inparas 6(i) and 7 above may be varied to suit the special circumstances oftheir schools, provided that the scale of thz remedial service provided isnot reduced. For example, a school may wish to introduce "setting11 inChinese and/or English at certain class levels, thereby re-dividing some orall of their pupils at those levels into smaller groups for more effectiveteaching in those subjects.

Monitoring and Evaluation

12* Heads of schools, assisted by the relevant heads of departments,^will be responsible for the organization and supervision of remedial teaching.

13. At the beginning of term, Heads will be required to submit tothe Schools Division of the Education Department a separate set of timetablesfor remedial teaching at the various class levels.

Section 5 , "116* P-4«. jp —

1/t. Heads will also be asked to supply overall statistical informationon remedial teaching in their schools by completing forms to be issued indue course by the Education Department.

15. A comprehensive record of the pupils receiving remedial helpshould be kept by the remedial teachers. The remedial teachers, incollaboration with the class teachers, should review the pupils1 progressregularly. Pupils who have shown sufficient progress may be replaced byother pupils who are weaker.

16. Schools may contact their District Education Officers for adviceon administrative matters and the relevant Subject Inspectors for professionaladvice. The records mentioned in para 15 above will be subject to inspectionby these officers during their normal or special visits to the schools.

(Ill) Professional Guidelines

17. Remedial teaching is intended for pupils who* for one reasonor another, hatfe fallen behind the rest of their class. The teacher takinga remedial group will need to assess with care the strengths and weaknessesof his pupils at the beginning of a remedial course, and pay much greaterattention to individual weaknesses. He should be patient and should adopta vvarm, friendly attitude towards his pupils to gain their confidence. Veryoften, children who are backward in a subject and feel that they cannot copewill end up disliking or feeling afraid of the subject. It is importantthat the remedial teacher should understand their feelings and help themovercome their fears through constant encouragement.

18. Successful remedial teaching also depends on two other key factors :preparation and co-ordination. The preparation of lessons and teachingmaterials for a remedial group requires much more time and effort than foran ordinary class. The remedial teacher should always boar in mind the needfor devising alternative explanations and suitable teaching aids and exercisesto re-inforce the lesson taught. It is also essential for the remedialteacher to co-ordinate closely with other teachers of the subject to ensurea reasonable degree of uniformity in the progress of the pupils. The keepingof detailed records will help a great deal in this area.

3-9. In all language teaching, and in remedial language teaching inparticular, the model of the language to which the pupils are exposed isextremely important. The remedial teachers, therefore, must themselves belanguage specialists. In particular, in tho case of English, if the remedialteacher cannot present a good model to the pupils, he should make a point ofusing taped material as much as possible.

20. At the beginning of a remedial course in the languages, teachersmay need to classify their pupils according to their areas of weakness andneeds. ^On the basis of the results of these analyses, the remedial teachercan^design the remedial course and remedial materials. For example, somepupils may be weak in one particular language skill such as listeningcomprehension or reading comprehension while others may be weak in otherareas. There may also be pupils who are weak generally. The remedialteacher should organize his teaching systematically so that the needs ofthese different groups of pupils will be catered for. It should always beborne in mind that the ultimate aim of the language teacher, whether takinga normal class or a remedial group, is to help the learners to acquirelanguage through classroom situations which provide rich and meaningful exposureto the target language, and reason and opportunity to use that language.

/21. .» « » •

Section 5 Aimex <4> P 5

21* It is stressed that no set of guidelines can be exhaustive, andindividual schools and teachers are expected to exercise their professionaljudgement to decide for themselves what the most appropriate arrangementsare in the light of their own circumstances and in the light of theirintimate knowledge of their own pupils. They are assured, however, thatthe relevant officers of the Education Department will be ready to offerassistance wherever possible*

Education Department

February 1982

Section 5 (5)

School-based Curriculum Proiect Scheme

The School-based Curriculum Project Scheme(SBCPS) was first introduced by the EducationDepartment in September 1988.

1- Purpose of the scheme

The general purpose of the scheme is to encourageschools to be more positive in developing appropriateschool-based curriculum. It aims to :

(a) meet the different needs and interests of pupilsin learning;

(b) motivate teachers to participate in specificinnovations in curriculum development and tomaximize their potentials in identifying theirown needs, in solving problems and makingdecisions in the process of teaching;

(c) encourage school heads to make appropriateadaptations to the centrally devised curriculumto suit the needs of their own schools; and

(d) provide a more flexible device for teachers andschools to meet the changing needs of society andsubsequently to equip their pupils with all thenecessary knowledge and skills for life.

2- School-based Curriculum Projects

In the context of this scheme, a school-basedcurriculum project generally refers to the projectdevised by a teacher or a group of teachers in aschool or a number of schools to suit the particularcurriculum needs identified in their respectiveschools.

The projects may lead to the production of simpleteaching materials such as a set of worksheets for theteaching specific topics for a particular level ormulti-media teaching packages including a teachers1guide, suggestions for learning activities and audio-visual aids, e.g. slides', cassette tapes, overheadtransparencies.

It is considered essential for the projects toserve the purpose of- complementing the knowledge,concepts and skills imparted to pupils in thecentrally devised core curriculum. The design of theprojects should take into consideration the practicalneeds of pupils at various levels of education. Thescheme may, in general, include projects :

(a) on new teaching approaches to specific topics inthe Curriculum Development Council (CDC)syllabuses or guidelines;

(b) in new topics or areas of studies as alternativesto certain aspects of the CDC syllabuses orguidelines; and

(c) on teaching/resource materials in areas withinthe framework of the curriculum recommended bythe CDC aiming to meet the needs of pupils of aparticular ability range.

Section 5 - 2 - Annex (5) p.2

3. The school-based curriculum nrolect ararrh

The school-based curriculum project grant will begiven in the form of :

(a) An award which is a token emolument for theparticipant(s) when a project is completed to thesatisfaction of the Executive Committee of thescheme* No award will be granted in respect of anincomplete project* **

(b) Production expenses which is a maximum claimableamount allocated to the participant(s) for thedevelopment of one particular category ofprojects for the purchase of raw materials andthe payment of charges for the productionservices, e.g. type-setting and photostaticreproduction of materials, printing andduplication of slides.

The school-based curriculum project grant willfund the development of two categories of projects atdifferent levels of education; namely, category Aprojects are projects covering one curriculumtopic/theme for one particular class level andcategory B projects are projects covering onecurriculum topic/theme for more than one class level.The rates of the grant for different categories ofprojects are as follows (position as at 1991/92 school year)

MaximumClaimableProduction Total

Category Award Expenses Grant

A $ 7 400 $1 800 $ 9 200

B $24 100 $6 800 $30 900

4. Participants

The following are eligible to participate in thescheme :

(a) practising teachers'in schools;

(b) heads of schools;

(c) teaching staff of colleges of education;

(d) teaching staff of the school/faculty of educationof the two universities; and

(e) other educationalists/specialists in relevantcurriculum areas.

Section 5 - 3 - Annex (5) fj

To ensure that the project is exclusively school-based, relevant and useful in the school concerned, itmust be tried out in a school situation during thecourse of preparation. It 'is particularly essentialthat the proposed project should have the support ofthe head of school where the project is to be triedout and evaluated. The head of this school should alsocertify that the proposed project is meeting a specialneed of the his/her pupils.

5. Selection criteria and other requirements

Selection of projects for funding will be basedon actual needs of specific schools and take into theaccount of the following :

(a) relevance;

(b) content;

(c) feasibility; and

(d) creativeness and originality.

When submitting an application for the grant, theapplicant will be required to present, via the head ofthe school, a proposal to the Education Department forvetting and selection purposes. Each successfulapplicant will be required to sign an undertaking withthe Education Department and to fulfil all therequirements stipulated therein.

6. Monitoring and evaluation

The Executive Committee of the Scheme, togetherwith the monitoring panels set up in the EducationDepartment, will be responsible for monitoring theprogress of the projects and the general supervisionof the allocation of funds to the projects. Inaddition, participants who initiate and produce theprojects will also be responsible for evaluating theirprojects and submitting progress reports to theExecutive Committee for consideration.

Section 5 Annex (6)(a)

Ref. 5/2227/54 VI EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

12 December 1990

GENERAL SCHOOLS CURRICULUM CIRCULAR NO.50/90

Textbooks in Secondary Schools

A consolidated Recommended List of Textbooks drawn up by theTextbooks Committee for use in Secondary Schools (SI-5) is forwarded for yourinformation and reference.

2. The textbooks included on this Recommended List are selected fromthose submitted to the Textbooks Committee for review before 29 June 1990 andtherefore there may be other books available which are equally suitable.However, while schools are free to choose any suitable textbooks, they areadvised to choose from this Recommended List. In the event of a schoolpreferring to use other textbooks, there should be good educational reasons forsuch a choice and the school should be prepared to supply such reasons ifrequested to do so. The existence of standing arrangements with a particularpublisher is not a satisfactory reason for the choice of a textbook.

3. To ensure freedom of choice to parents in the purchase of new orsecond-hand copies, school book lists should give full details of all textbooksrequired for the new term. These details should include the exact title of eachtextbook, the edition, the name of the author, the name of the publishers andany other details necessary to avoid ambiguity. The price should also be givenas a guide to parents. Workbooks, supplementary exercises and tests which bearlittle or no relevance to the curriculum and teaching- programmes should not berecommended by schools. Schools are asked to make the Recommended Listavailable to parents who wish to see it.

4. The selection of textbooks and instructional material is a matterrequiring considerable care and thought, the guiding principle being that thisshould be determined mainly by the specific educational needs of the pupilsusing the books and material. Since these needs vary not only from school toschool but also from group to group within a school, it may well be that a bookconsidered suitable for one group of pupils is quite unsuitable for anothergroup. School authorities requiring advice in this matter are invited to contactthe appropriate subject sections of the Advisory Inspectorate, EducationDepartment.

5. It should be noted that textbooks for pupils are not essential forsome subjects. The number of textbooks used for any one subject should bekept to a reasonable minimum, and frequent changes of textbook should beavoided. The guidance which follows, concerning the number of textbooksrequired for each subject, is based on observed practices in schools and theAdvisory Inspectorate's advice.

Section 5 Annex (6)(a) p.2

- 2 -

(i) Chinese/Chinese Literature/Putonghua

Only one course book is required each year. In someseries the book for each year is issued in two parts,one for each term of the year. In addition, onedictionary is also required for the study of Chinese inall forms.

(ii) English

From Secondary 1 to Secondary 5. one course book isrequired each year. Schools are recommended to selecta course book suitable for use by their students,consisting of a teacher's book, a student's book, aworkbook or activity book, and taped materials. Thisis to avoid overloading the textbook list withsupplementary language books and to ensure that alllanguage teaching materials are carefully integrated.In addition, an English (monolingual) dictionary andreaders of appropriate standard should also beprescribed for the study of English in all forms.

(iii) Mathematics

(a) Mathematics

From Secondary 1 to Secondary 5, one textbookfor each year is required. In some cases, eachbook may be issued in two parts, one for eachhalf year.

(b) Additional Mathematics

Only one textbook is" required for the wholecourse, i.e. from Secondary 4 to Secondary 5.

(iv) Science

One course book and/or a set of laboratory worksheetsfor Junior Secondary Science should be sufficient foreach of the first three years. Thereafter, separatecourse books are required for Physics, Chemistry,Biology and Human Biology, but the same four coursebooks, if carefully selected, will suffice for theremaining two years of the course.

Section 5 Annex (6)(a) P.3

_ O M

(v) Computer Studies

(a) Computer Studies

One set of course book is required for Secondary4 and 5 which may be in the form of :

one textbook for both level of Secondary 4and 5, or

- one textbook for each level, i.e. two booksfor Secondary 4 to 5, or

- one textbook on theory and one onpractical.

(b) Computer Literacy

One set of course book is required for Secondary1 to 3 which may be in the form of :

one textbook for three levels (fromSecondary 1 to 3), or

one textbook for each level, i.e. threebooks for Secondary 1 to Secondary 3.

(vi) Social Studies

From Secondary 1 to Secondary 3, only course book foreach year is necessary. If a year's work is served bytwo/three volumes of the same series, then thetwo/three parts together are considered as one coursebook. It is advisable also to include an atlas in theSecondary 1 to 3 textbook list as this may assist inthe teaching of geographical and historical elements inthe Social Studies syllabus. For Secondary 4 to 5, onecourse book again is sufficient for each year.However, the two books for Secondary 4 and 5 may bepurchased together in Secondary 4.

(vii) Geography

From Secondary 1 to Secondary 5, one course book isrequired for each year. Additionally, an atlas isessential in all forms. A well chosen atlas shouldadequately serve the whole of the five-year secondaryschool course. Therefore, for each year, one coursebook and one atlas are required (the two books for thefourth and fifth year may be purchased together in1

the fourth year).

Section 5 Annex (6) (a) p.4

- 4 -

(viii) History and Chinese History

For either subject, one course book is required in thefirst year, with other books in the same series of thecourse for higher forms (the two books for the fourthand fifth years may be purchased tog-ether in thefourth year). A history atlas is a very useful adjunctto history teaching but only one atlas is needed forthe whole course.

(ix) Economic and Public Affairs

From Secondary 1 to Secondary 3, one course book isrequired for each year. In Secondary 4 and 5, thecourse may be divided into two parts - EconomicAffairs and Public Affairs - each served by its owntextbooks. It is not advisable for students topurchase the Hong Kong Annual Report as a textbook.The Report could be made available by the school asDeference material for students.

(x) Economics

From Secondary 4 to Secondary 5, one course bookcontaining microeconomics and macroeconomics isrequired. If the course is served by 2 volumes, onevolume covering the part of macroeconomics and theother macroeconomics, then the two volumes areconsidered as one course book.

(xi) Government and Public Affairs

Schools offering the subject at Secondary 4 and 5 levelshould adopt a set of textbooks from the 'List ofSecondary School Textbooks Recommended by theTextbooks Committee' in accordance with therequirements of the Hong Kong Certificate of EducationGPA Examination Syllabus of the appropriate yearissued by the Hong Kong Examinations Authority.

(xii) Home Economics

From Secondary 1 to Secondary 3, one course bookcovering both the Home Management andNeedlework/Dress aspects or either one of the aboveaspects is recommended. Schools offering the subjectat Secondary 4 and 5 levels should adopt a textbookin accordance with the options selected for the HongKong Certificate of Education Examination, i.e. HomeEconomics, Needlework/Dress or Dressmaking.


(xiii)

(xiv)

(xv)

Music

From Secondary 1 to 3, only one course book for eachyear is required. In some cases, schools may choosenot to use any one course book if their teachersdecided to prepare their own teaching* materials Forschools offering general music in Secondary 4 to 5}there is no course book available at the moment andteachers are encouraged to prepare their own teachingmaterials according to the contents and activitiessuggested in the CDC General Music Syllabus forSecondary 4 to 5. For schools preparing students tosit for the Certificate of Education music examinationin Secondary 4 to 5, teachers should follow the saidexamination syllabus issued by the Hong KongExaminations Authority. A list of suggested referencebooks have been included at the end of the syllabus.

Technical Subject

From Secondary 1 to Secondary 3, only one textbook isrequired each year for each technical subject. If thetextbook is published in a series, the same seriesshould be used throughout the 3 year of study. Thesame applies to Secondary 4 and 5.

If a technical subject is offered from Secondary 1 toSecondary 5, the school may consider using the sameseries throughout the 5 years of study.

Commercial Subjects

Principles of Accounts

Commerce

Typewriting

Shorthand

Only one course book isrequired each year.

Only one course book isrequired each year.

In most cases, one coursebook is sufficient for thewhole typewriting coursefor Secondary 4 & 5

Two course books arerequired for Secondary 4,one on theory and theother on phrasing. ForSecondary 5, one coursebook is required fordictation practice.


- 6 -

6. School authorities are advised that all the textbooks on the Listare recommended for use in schools with the Curriculum Development Councilsyllabuses or the Hong Kong Examinations Authority syllabuses.

7. In order to ensure that stocks will be available for use inSeptember, consultation with a bookseller or publisher may be necessary. Somebooksellers offer a service to schools by printing, for free distribution to pupils,complete lists of books selected for use in the school during the followingacademic year. There is no objection to this arrangement provided that parentsare clearly informed that the availability of such a list implies NO COMPULSIONWHATSOEVER to purchase from a particular bookseller.

8. It is recognised that certain schools operate a service for theirpupils in that they make bulk purchase of textbooks, etc. for sale to theirpupils. There is no objection to such arrangements provided that participationby pupils is entirely voluntary and parents are made fully aware of this. Thisapplies also in those cases where schools offer for sale complete parcels ofbooks, with or without school materials. Parents must not be compelled topurchase such parcels. The contents must be clearly itemized and the price ofeach item shown separately, and parents must be made fully aware that,if theywish, they can buy the necessary items independently.

9. Similarly, there is no objection to textbooks being offered for saleon school premises by representatives of booksellers or publishers as anotherform of convenience to parents, provided parents are fully informed of theprocedure and the benefit of any special discount given is passed on to thepupils in the form of reduced prices. Heads who permit textbooks to be sold onschool premises should ensure that no pirated copies are being sold.Distribution and sale of copyrighted works contrary to the Copyright Ordinanceis illegal.

10. It should be noted that this %List of Secondary School TextbooksRecommended by the Textbooks Committee1 supersedes the lists previously issuedunder all General Schools Curriculum Circulars entitled "Textbooks in SecondarySchools". Supplementary reading books for the subject of English are notincluded because they are not classified as course books. School authoritiesrequiring advice on the use of supplementary readers are invited to contact theEnglish Section of the Advisory Inspectorate, Education Department.


- 7 -

11. It is appreciated that new books may be published after schoolshave made their choice and that schools may choose any such new books thatappear on the subsequent quarterly supplements. However, there appears noreason to change a course book or series of books within the Recommended Listsince this would lead to an unnecessary financial burden on parents. If sucha change is necessary, the whole series should be introduced gradually,beginning in the lowest form and not in all forms throughout the school at anyone time.

S, W. WONGfor Director of Education

To : Heads of all Secondary Schools - for necessary actionHeads of Sections/Colleges/ILE/Government Primary Schools- for information

Section 5 Annex (6)(b)

Guidelines concerning Textbook Selection Procedures andAcceptance of Publishers1 Donations by Schools

Schools should set up subject textbook committees to selecttextbooks for use by pupils. Membership of a subject textbook selectioncommittee should include all teachers teaching the subject in the school.The committee should be chaired by the head of the subject panel in thecase of secondary schools or the senior teacher in charge of academicaffairs in the case of primary schools. It should be accountable to theschool principal.

2. In selecting textbooks, such committees should observe thegeneral principles laid down in the relevant General Schools CurriculumCircular issued to schools annually, and make recommendations as to themost suitable textbooks for use by pupils, having due regard for thespecific educational needs of the pupils who will use such books. Wheremore than one book is found suitable, the committee should list itsrecommendations in order of preference. Where there are valid reasons todeviate from the recommendations, these should be documented by the schoolprincipal as a safeguard against any allegations of unfairness orimpropriety which may subsequently arise.

3. In the event of a sponsoring body operating more than oneschool, it should not arrange for all the schools under its sponsorship touse the same set of textbooks. Individual schools should adopt the formalprocedures described in paragraph 1 above for selecting the textbookswhich best suit their pupils1 interest, with the individual schoolmanagement committee assuming a monitoring role. A school could stillobtain 'volume discounts1 by arranging bulk purchases on behalf of thepupils.

4- Schools should not allow the choice of textbooks to be in anyway influenced by a donation; nor should they accept donations as a matterof course, thereby placing themselves in an obligatory position to thepublisher (s) . In making a decision on whether or not a donation should beaccepted, the school management committee should observe the guidelines onthe acceptance of advantages laid down in Appendix A of Annex (6) of Chapter8.

Section 5 Annex (7)

Locations and Opening Hours ofAdvisory Inspectorate Teaching and Resource Centres

CENTRE

1. Activity ApproachCentre

6.

Chinese LanguageTeaching Centre(Hong Kong)

Chinese LanguageTeaching Centre(Kowloon)

Civic EducationResource Centre(Hong Kong)

Civic EducationResource Centre(Kowloon)

Computer EducationCentre

Cultural CraftsCentre

LOCATION •

4/Fr 19 Hok YuenStreet, Hung Horn,Kowloon

1/F, 9A Bonham Road,Hong Kong(Tel 548 8230)

7/F, To Kwa Wan Marketand Government Office,165 Ma Tau ¥ai Road,Kowloon(Tel 712 8476)

3/F, 4 Pak Fuk Road,North Point, Hong Kong(Tel 565 6239)

5/F, 19 Hok YuenStreet, Hung Horn,Kowloon

1-2/F, 19 Hok YuenStreet, Hung Hora r

Kowloon(Tel 364 5211)

4-6/F, 4 Pak Fuk Road,North Point, Hong Kong(Tel 562 9205)

OPENING HOURS

Wednesday9:00 am - 12:30 prn2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

Tuesday & Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pm

Wednesday & Thursday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

Monday & Wednesday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pm

Saturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pro


Monday - Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pm


Monday - Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn


15.

16.

English LanguageTeaching Centre(Hong Kong)

English LanguageTeaching Centre(Kowloon)

* Field StudiesCentre

11. KindergartenTeaching Centre

12. MathematicsTeaching Centre

13.

14.

Media ProductionServices Unit

Music TeachingCentre

Primary SocialStudies and HealthEducation ResourceCentre

Religious andEthical EducationResource Centre

1/F, 9A Bonham Road,Hong Kong(Tel 548 2537)

*7/F, To Kwa Wan-Marketand Government Officef165 Ma Tau Wai RoadrKowloon(Tel 712 8452)

Sai Kung OutdoorRecreation Centre, TuiMin Hoi, Sai Kung, N.T,(Tel 792 4009)


3/F, 4 Pak Fuk Road,North Point, Hong Kong

1/F, 182 Canton Road,Tsim Sha Tsui, Kowloon(Tel 366 0881)




(By appointment only)Monday - Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

(By Appointment only)Monday - Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

Monday - Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

Wednesday2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

Tuesday9:00 am

Thursday2:00 pmSaturday9:00 am

12:30 pm

5:00 pm

12:00 nn

Monday - Saturday9:00 am - 12:30 pm1:30 pm - 5:00 pm(Extended to 7:00 pm onFriday)

Wednesday2:00 pm - 5:00 pa


Wednesday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

Wednesday2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday9:00 am - 12:00 nn

Section 5 Annex (7) p3

17. Religious, Ethicaland Sex EducationResource Centre

18. Science TeachingCentre

5/F, 19 Hok YuenStreet, Hung Horn,Kovloon

2-3/F, 4 Pak Fuk Road,North Point, Hong Kong(Tel 811 0240)

19. Sex EducationResource Centre

20. Social SubjectsTeaching Centre

21. Technical TeachingCentre

2/F, 4 Pak Fuk Road,.North Point, Hong Kong(Tel 563 6492)


G/F, 145 Junction Road,Lok Fu, Kowloon(Tel 336 0445}

Tuesday & Thursday9:00 am - 12:30 ptn2:00 prn - 5:00 pm


SecondaryWednesday

2:00 pm - 5:00 pmSaturday

9:00 am - 12:00 nn

PrimaryWednesday

9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pm


Wednesday & Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pm



Monday - Friday9:00 am - 12:30 pm2:00 pm - 5:00 pm


NOTE All centres will be closed on Sundays, public holidays and in theevent of public announcement by the Director of Education that allschools are to be closed as a result of adverse weather conditions,e.g. tropical cyclones or rainstorms.

Advisory InspectorateEducation DepartmentSeptember 1991

Section 5 Annex (8>INFORMATION SHEET EDUCATION DEPARTMENT

LEE GARDENS (3RD FLOOR)HYSAN AVENUECAUSEWAY BAYHONG KONG

EDUCATIONAL TELEVISION SERVICE

Background

In early 1968, the Government decided to implementEducational Television (ETV) in Hong Kong and in late 1969 fundswere provided to launch an ETV service addressed initially toprimary schools, ETV broadcast to primary schools commenced inSeptember 1971.

2. . In its first year of operation, ETV was broadcast toPrimary 3 school children in black and white in four subjects(Chinese Language, English Language, Mathematics and SocialStudies). By September 1974, the service was extended to coverPrimary 3 to 6*

3. The ETV Service was further extended to Secondary 1 inSeptember 1976 with colour reception in the same four subjects. In1977, the Service was further extended to Secondary 2 with theaddition of Science for both Secondary 1 and 2. In September 1978the Service was extended to Secondary 3.

4. Starting from 1979, a new series of primary schoolprogrammes was produced in colour to replace by stages the black andwhite primary school programmes. By September 1982, all primaryschool programmes had been changed to colour. As a result, all ETVprogrammes for Primary 3 to Secondary 3 are in colour.

«5. Two new ETV subjects, Science and Health Education, wereintroduced to primary schools, starting with Primary 3 in September1983, and extending one level higher each year to Primary 6 in 1986.

Objectives

6* ^ The main aim of introducing ETV in Hong Kong is to improvethe quality of education. The purpose of ETV is to complement andsupplement the work of teachers in classrooms, to facilitatecurriculum reform and development where necessary, to share theskills of experienced teachers and, in a way, to provide valuablein-service training for under-qualified teachers.

7* ^ ETV in Hong Kong is a combination of instruction andentertainment and is a service to both teachers and students. AsETV is directly appreciated for its being closely integrated withsyllabuses actually used in classrooms, ETV programmes are syllabus-based, locally orientated, and locally produced.


The Programmes

80 Programme contents come mainly from ETV syllabuses whichare designed by ETV Programmes Committees, comprising practisingteachers, lecturers 'of Colleges of Education, inspectors of schoolsand ETV producers. Scripts of ETV programmes are written by the ETVproducers, who are also school inspectors of the EducationDepartment.

9. ETV programmes are jointly produced by the EducationDepartment and Radio Television Hong Kong. They are broadcast toschools via the two local commercial television stations from 8 a.m.to 4 p.m. daily from Monday to Friday over a 32-week period withinthe school year. (Please see Appendix A)

10. Cantonese is the medium of instruction used in all ETVprogrammes except English Language programmes, where the medium isEnglish. School teachers and pupils are often invited to take partin ETV programmes. English Language programmes are often presentedby native speakers.

11. A primary school programme is of 15 minutes duration whilea secondary programme is 20 minutes long. In order to facilitateschool reception and utilization, the broadcast of each programme isrepeated a number of times. The types and number of programmesbeing transmitted to schools in 1991/92 are as follows :-

Subject

ChineseLanguage

EnglishLanguage

Mathematics

SocialStudies

Science

HealthEducation

Number of Programmes

Primary3

30

30

30

30

16

16

Primary4

30

30

30

30

16

16

Primary5

30

30

30

30

16

16

Primary6

16

16

16

16

16

16

Secon-dary1

16

24

16

24

24

-

Secon-dary2

16

24

16

24

24

-

Secon-dary

3

16

24

16

24

24

—


12. m addition to the above-mentioned syllabus-basedprogrammes, the ETV Service also produces special programmes to meetspecific educational needs (Please see Appendix B). Such programmesare transmitted to schools in the time slots for repeat-broadcastsof the regular programmes and schools will be duly notified of thedates and times of transmission through circular letters.

Supporting Materials

13. Teachers1 Notes for use with the ETV programmes areprepared by the ETV producers to provide information ^ on theprogrammes and suggestions for preparation and follow-up activities.For primary school programmes of Chinese Language, English Language,Mathematics and Social Studies, and for secondary school programmesof English Language, Pupils1 Notes are also compiled* These Notes,closely written in support of the programme contents, are intendedto help pupils in revision and consolidation after viewing theprogrammes.

14. All ETV Notes are published by the Government Printer andsold to schools by the Information .Services Department. BesidesTeachers1 and Pupils1 Notes, wall charts or maps for use inconjunction with the ETV programmes, where appropriate, are printedfor free distribution to schools.

School Television Equipment

15. To facilitate reception and utilization of ETV programmes,all primary and secondary schools (both government and aided) aswell as private secondary schools with government bought places areprovided with the necessary television equipment.

Evaluation and Utilization

16. Questionnaires are regularly seat to teachers using theService to obtain their views on ETV programmes. Feedback onprogrammes in the returned questionnaires will serve as usefulreferences to ETV producers for future programming.

17. To ensure that completed questionnaires are a reliableindication of the use of ETV in classrooms, ETV producers makeregular visits to schools'to collect further feedback, and todiscuss with teachers and school heads on improvement and effectiveuse of the ETV programmes.

Education Department1/4466/69/09/91

Appendix A

ETV Transmission Timetable (Secondary}1991/92

First Term: 9th September 1991 - 17th January 1992 Second Term: 17th February 1992 - 19th June 1992

SP©

TransmissionTime

A.M.

P.M.

8:00 - 8:20

9:50 - 10:10

11:10 - 11:30

12:00 - 12:20

12:20 - 12:40

12:40 - 1:00

TransmissionChannel

ATV

ATV

ATV

TVB

TVB

TVB

Monday

SI

C

SC

S2

C

SC

S3

C

SC

Tuesday

SI

S

M

S2

S

M

S3

S

M

Wednesday

SI

E

C

S2

E

C

S3

E

C

Thursday

SI

SC

s

S2

Sc

S

S3

Sc

S

Friday

SI

M

•

E

S2

M

E

S3

M

E

ATV: Asia Television Ltd (World)

TVB: Television Broadcasts Ltd (Pearl)

SI: Secondary 1*S2: Secondary 2

S3: Secondary 3

C: Chinese LanguageE: English LanguageM: MathematicsS: Social StudiesSc: Science

1

*


Appendix

Special Programmes Producedto Meet Specific Educational Needs

Subject

CivicEducation

Programme Title

ETV CivicEducation Series

No* ofProgrammes "

4

LevelIntended

Secondary1-3

CommunityYouth Club

MoralEducation

EnglishLanguage

Remarks

1* Governing forthe People

2. Civic Rightsand Responsibi-lities

3. Voice of thePublic

4. The Making ofA Law

CYC Parts I & II

Anti-shoptheft

English LanguageTeaching Programmefor Teachers :"Communicate"

English LanguageTeaching Programmefor Teachers :"Three Classroomsw

UtilizationProgramme on theSecondary SeriesAf B & C :"Using InterestProgrammes"AND"Using MoreInterest Programmes1

All PrimaryClasses

UpperPrimary &JuniorSecondaryClasses

Secondary

Primary

Secondary

This is anabstract ofRTHK's series"CYC Weekly11


Appendix

Subject

FamilyLifeEducation


Programme Title

ETV Family LifeEducationSeries I :

1. Mirror

2. The Onset ofAdolescence

LevelIntended

Secondary1-3

Remarks

Produced incollaborationwith theFamilyPlanningAssociation

3. The InvisibleGap

4. Friends

5. Go Your OwnWay?

6. Gigi's FirstDate

ETV Family LifeEducationSeries II :

1. Teenagers'Puzzle aboutSex

Secondary4 & 5

Produced incollaborationwith theFamilyPlanningAssociation

2. The Truth -ofLove

3. Should I SayNo?

4. The WeddingInvitation

Home Safety Hidden DangerEducation

Secondary1-5

Produced incollaborationwith theInformationServicesDepartment


Appendix B(2) Cont'd

ChineseLanguage

UtilizationProgramme on theColour Series :Green, Brown, Redand Purple "The NewPrimary Programmes M

Special Series withElements of MoralEducation

Primary One Programmein 2 versionsEnglish &Chinese

Secondary 1

1. A Letter ofApology

2* Ifm Sorry.I Am Wrong.

3. Concern andConsiderationfor Others

Special Series withElements of CivicEducation

1. A Treasure inthe Classroom

2. Chinese Culturethrough PoetryAppreciation

3. What AWonderful World

Secondary 1


Appendix


Subject Programme Title

Science Senior SecondaryScience Programmes

1. Polymers

2. Wave

3. Atomic Structureand ChemicalBonding

4. Heredity

5* Electrolysis

Nuclear Energy

AIDS

Viral Hepatitis

No. ofProgrammes

LevelIntended

Secondary4 & 5

Remarks

In two versionsEnglish andChinese

Secondary1-5

Secondary3-5

Secondary1-5

Mathematics Special Series on"Computer LiteracyM

1. Introducing theComputerEducation Centre

2. What is AComputer?

3. What canComputers do?

Secondary1-3

PhysicalEducation

Safety Precautionsin PhysicalEducation

Secondary1-3

Section 5 Annex (9)THE WIRE-FREE INDUCTION LOOP SYSTEM

1* PROVISION

1*1 HARDWARE

The wire-free induction loop system consists of:

1 loop (fixed along the walls of the classroom orspecial room)1 cassette tape-recorder (with an auxiliary output plugand a built-in microphone system)1 headphone with microphone (for teacher)1 set of headphones (42 per primary and 45 persecondary school)1 storage cupboard with lock and key

In 1982, a supplier was contracted to install thesystem in the schools and provide maintenanceservices. After 1983, the system has become a piece ofstandard equipment, all new aided schools have tocontract companies to install and maintain their ownsystems* The same applies to the second loop system inschools choosing to use'Chinese as the medium ofinstruction after 1989,

Enquiries regarding the installation and maintenance ofthe system can be made to the Institute of Language inEducation (ILE) on telephone no. 8032420,

1.2 SOFTWARE

In 1982 when the system was first installed in theschools, an initial grant was provided for the purchaseof software* Since 1983 when the system has becomestandard equipment, new aided schools have to makeprovisions to buy software in their estimate costs forstandard furniture and equipment.

As for the second loop system, an initial grant isprovided to the schools. The amount for the year1991/92. is $3000*

Since the installation of the loop system in 1982, anannual grant has been allocated to schools to purchasesoftware for use with each set of loop system. Theamount provided for 1991/92 is $60Q/*800 per secondary/primaryschool. Schools should consult the ILE for informationabout these grants.

There is a- wide range of taped material that can beused with the loop system. A tape library of listeningcomprehension software has been set up in the EnglishLanguage Teaching Centre (ELTC) of the AdvisoryInspectorate since 1982. The collection in the libraryconsists of teaching tapes produced by the ELTC andpublished commercially. Teachers are welcome to visitthe library to try out and select tapes. Dubbingservices of tapes produced by the ELTC are available.

can be made at the Centre on telephone no.

Section 5 Annex (9) p.2However, some teachers still have reservations aboutusing the system. They think that it takes up too muchteaching time for students to go from their ownclassroom to the looped room, or distributing andcollecting headphones. They are also worried aboutmaintenance and the damage and repair required due tofrequent use of the headphones, especially with juniorclasses. Or they have difficulty finding suitablematerials for their stuSents.

The following are some suggestions to overcome some ofthe problems teachers may encounter.

(a) Arrange lessons to be conducted either before orafter recess or lunch so that students can godirectly to the looped room. Also, instructstudents to walk faster. This can reduce the timespent on travelling.

(b) Arrange lessons immediately before or after recessor lunch so that headphones can be distributed andplaced on individual desks before students comeinto the room or collected after students haveleft. If possible, arrange the system to be usedby another class in the following lesson so thatthe headphones could be left on the desk for thenext class. Teachers can also trained up studentleaders to help in the distribution and collectionof headphones.

(c) Arrange for one member of the English panel, orall- members to take turns, to check the systemfrom time to time, remove batteries fromheadphones before long holidays, record breakdownsand inform the maintenance contractor for repairs.

(d) Plan the lessons in advance and select materialsaccording to the needs, interests and abilities ofthe students. Commercially published materialsmay not exactly suit the students. Teachers canscreen existing materials to build up a coursebearing in mind the abilities of their students.

It is desirable that members of the English panel sitdown and share their successes or failures of using theloop system. They can consult the English Inspectorateif they have problems in the professional aspects.Technical problems relating to installation andmaintenance etc. should be brought to the attention ofthe ILE.

3 .3 Exploiting the use of the system for listeningactivities

Teachers of English are familiar with conductinglistening activities like speech and pattern drills,dictation, comprehension exercises, story, songs,'listen and do1 exercises, etc. Besides theseactivities, the loop system can be used to conductother kinds of listening activities.

Annex <9> P 3Section 5

2* MAINTENANCE AND STORAGE

2.1 Maintenance and storage of hardware

Some general consideration :

(a) consult the operational manual that comes with theequipment;

(b) handle the equipment with care;(c) use silicon gel to keep storage cupboard dry;(d) keep hardware under lock and key; and(e) ^contact the maintenance contractor or the ILE if

there are any technical problems or complaints.

The tape-recorder :

(a) use A/C supply rather than batteries; and(b) clean and service the cassette recorder regularly.

The Headphones :

(a) switch off volume control at the end of everylesson;

(b) remove batteries before long holidays andweekends;

(c) clean them by wiping with a damp cloth andsanitize them with alcohol regularly; and

(d) distribute them carefully and promptly.

2. 2 Maintenance and storage of software/tapes

(a) keep cartridges in original cases;(b) label cases and cartridges with self-adhesive

labels;(c) keep cassettes away from heat and magnetic objects(d) run tapes at least once every six months; and(e) keep catalogue of tapes.

3 . OTHER POINTS TO NOTE

3. 1 Time-tabling for use of the loop system

The purpose of installing the loop system is to providestudents with opportunities for listening practice. Itis recommended that all classes are allocated at leastone lesson per week/cycle to use the system. Carefultime-tabling and adopting a 'floating class1 system mayhelp to ensure that the looped room(s) is/are madeavailable to all classes for English lessons.

3.2 Handling the loop system with confidence

Since the installation of the system in schools in1982, seminars on the use of the system and tapedmaterial have been conducted by the ELTC. Manyteachers have attended these seminars and returned totheir schools to teach other teachers how to use thesystem.


Jig-saw listening is one of the activities bestconducted by using the loop system. Since studentsmake use of headphones for listening, it can easily bearranged for different groups to listen to differentextracts. While one group is listening using the loopsystem, the other group can listen to their extractplayed on a tape-recorder. The teacher can alsoarrange for one group to listen to the tape whileoccupying the rest of the class with some other taskslike reading and writing. The various tasks can bedesigned to be related and essential to the completionof the final task.

Split class and group listening acitivities are alsoeffective ways of exploiting the loop system. Two ormore language skill activities can be conductedsimultaneously. For example, half the class could dolistening while the other half do reading, writing ororal English with the teacher. The system can also beused to create an information gap for communication,which enables meaningful exchanges between students tocomplete a task.

With the introduction of the loop system, teachers areallowed more flexibility. They are encouraged toexploit the loop system to experiment and conductvarious kinds of listening activities to help studentsdevelop and improve their listening skill.

Section 5 ***** (10)

Courses offered by the Field Studies Centre

The two types of courses offered by the Field StudiesCentre to secondary schools are described as follows:

1- Residential Field Studies Courses for Sixth Form Students

Residential ecology/geography field studies courses are offered tosixth-form students.

Number of Courses Offered

About 30 residential field studies courses are organized for secondary6/7 biology and geography students during term time each year. Inorder for these courses to form an integral as well as a relevant partof the school curriculum, they are of different duration and withprogramme specially designed to gear to the Advanced or Higher LevelExamination Syllabus of Biology or Geography. These courses, and theirduration, are as follow:

EcologyAdvanced Level Course (4 days)

Higher Level Course (3 days)

Geography

Advanced Level Course (4 days)Higher Level Course (3 days)

Organization of Courses

These residential courses are jo in t ly o rgan ized by the A d v i s o r yInspectorate of the Education D e p a r t m e n t and the L e i s u r e ServicesDivision of the Regional Services D e p a r t m e n t . L o d g i n g , m e a l s andrecreational activities are provided by the Sai Kumj Outdoor RecreationCentre, whereas the academic aspects of the courses are organized andconducted by the inspectors of the Field Studies Centre. No tuitionf e e i s c h a r g e d f o r t h e c o u r s e s b y t h e E d u c a t i o n D e p a r t m e n t .Accommodation and meals provided by the Sai Rung Outdoor RecreationCentre are charged at the rate fixed by the Regional Council.


Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

Course Programme

An outline of a typical programme for a four -day f ie ld studies courseis:

8:00 a . m .

8:45 a . m .

12:00 noon

1:00 p . m .

3:30 p . m .

5:00 p . m .

6:00 p . m .

7:00 p . m .

9:30 p . m .

B R E A K F A S T

L U N C H

Recreation

Recreation

D I N N E R

Recreation

j-jr-rj May be briefing, field work, laboratory work, datarL//i processing, discussion and group presentation.

Approach of Study

The course programmes emphasize the importance of the practicalapproach in the study of ecology and geography. In each field studiescourse, participants are required to work in groups on two to threetopics of field studies. The format of each field studies is:

Briefing

Field Work

Laboratory Work

L Data Processing J

Discussion

Group Presentation

(a) briefing on field work procedure

(b) conducting field work in groups

(c) doing practical work in thelaboratory

(d) compiling and processing datacollected from the field orobtained from laboratory work,and to present them in annotatedand graphical forms

(e) interpreting and discussing thefindings and observations offield work and laboratory work

(f) presenting discussion results andreceiving comments from othergroups

Annex (10) p.3Section 5

Topics of Field Studies

For ecology courses, field works can be investigation of the mangrovehabitat at Sai Kung in the Three Fathoms Cove; the freshwater streamhabitat at Pak Tarn An, Pak Tarn Chung and Ho Chung; stream pollutionstudy in the valleys of Ho Chung and Pak Kong; and hill grasslandhabitat at the Pak Sha Van Peninsula and Tui Min Hoi.

For geography courses, field works can be studies of agricultural landuse and settlement or stream pollution in the valleys of Sha Kok Mei,Pak Kong and Ho Chung; urban activities, urban image and urban decay inSai Kung Town; ecosystem studies in the woodland areas of the Pak ShaWan Peninsula; and study of stream channels in Sha Kok Mei.

Teachers' Role

Biology or geography teachers have to accompany their studentsthroughout the course to provide them assistance in doing field workand to look after them.

Application

Schools interested in applying the residential field studies coursesfor their sixth form students could respond to the relevant GeneralSchools Training Circulars. Examples of these circulars are attachedin Appendices I and II.

Time Schedule

May - Circulars issued to schools inviting applications forcourses of the following academic year

June - Schools informed of outcome of application and otherarrangements

September - Orientation course for teachers of schools accepted

September to June of the following year - Residential courses forstudents

Purpose of the Teachers1 Orientation Course

The aim of the course is to familiarize teachers with the detailedarrangements of the course programme so that teachers concerned canbrief their students beforehand and made necessary preparations.Schools accepted would be further contacted on matters concerningaccommodation, meals and payment by Sai Kung Outdoor Recreation Centre,

2. In-service Training Courses for Secondary School Biology and GeographyTeachers

Day or residential training programmes for teachers are organizedduring school year.


Aims of Courses

The aims of these programmes are to familiarize teachers with theecological habitats or geographical sites in and around the FieldStudies Centre, to enable teachers to acquaint themselves with currentapproaches in field work in their own subject areas, and the currenttrend in the teaching of environmental education.

Organization of Courses

Some of these courses are jointly organized by the Education Departmentand other educational bodies/government departments, such as the HongKong Geographical Association, the Hong Kong Association of Science andMathematics Education, the Department of Curriculum Studies of theUniversity of Hong Kong, the World Wide Fund for Nature Hong Kong andthe Agriculture and Fisheries Department.

Application

Schools interested in nominating their Biology/Geography teachers toattend the in-service training courses could respond to the relevantGeneral Schools Training Circulars issued for each course. Teachersnominated are usually accepted on a first-corne-first-served basis.

Section 5 Annex (ll)(a)

GUIDELINES FOR THE CONDUCT OF SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS*

1 General Guidelines(a) All matters pertaining to the examinations must be treated as confidential

(b) Schools are requested to observe maximum security precautions to prevent any leakage of examina-tion question papers.

(c) The preparation and storage of question papers should be closely supervised by the Principal/Vice-Principal and Senior Assistant.

(d) The number of people involved in the preparation of examination papers should be kept to theminimum possible.

(e) Schools are requested to observe strictly the examination dates given by the Ministry of Education.

(f) The Principal of a secondary school may, at his discretion, release his students for 3 days immedia-tely after the Final Examinations.

(g) Teachers will have to report for work as usual on these 3 days and attend to the marking of scripts,preparation of result sheets and report cards, decide on promotion, etc.

2 Setter

(a) The Principal should assign teachers as setters for the various papers well in advance of the examina-tion dates.

(b) The setters should submit the question papers for moderation by the Senior Subject Teacher/Subject Co-ordinator through the Principal/Vice-Principal or Senior Assistant.

3 Typing and Duplicating Question Papers

(a) A room or part of the office (partitioned) should be kept out of bounds to pupils during the periodof typing and duplicating of question papers. All typing and duplicating must be carried out in theroom or in the security area.

(b) A cupboard with locks should be provided in the office for the purpose of keeping the questionpapers and answer scripts.

(c) The stencils for the question papers must be cut undet the supervision of the Senior Assistant orSenior Subject Teacher/Co-ordinator. The original question papers must be returned to .thePrincipal/Vice-Principal or Senior Assistant for safe keeping in the cupboard.

(d) The typed stencils must be returned to the Senior Subject Teacher/Subject Co-ordinator for proof-reading.

(e) The duplicating of the question papers may be carried out by the Office Attendant but only underthe supervision of the Senior Assistant or Senior Subject Teacher/Co-ordinator. The Senior Assistantor Senior Subject Teacher/Co-ordinator must destroy all spoilt papers and must lock up all questionpapers and used stencils in the cupboard.

(0 Where necessary, the printed question papers should be packed according to the requirements ofeach class before they are locked in the cupboard.

(g) Question papers should be safely stored under lock and key until required on the day of theexamination.

4 Issue of Question Papers and Return of Answer Scripts

(a) On the morning of the examination the Chief Invigilator will collect the required number of ques-tion papers from the Principal/Vice-Principal or Senior Assistant, 10 minutes before the start of thepaper.

(b) At the end of the paper, the answer scripts must be returned immediately to the Principal/Vice-Principal or Senior Assistant who will then issue them to the markers.

(c) Security must be maintained throughout to avoid leakage of examination papers and other mal-practices.

5 Schedule for the Different Stages in a-School Examination

It is necessary to maintain a record of the various stages in the examination. The following should becarefully recorded:

Handb°°k P1^113^ bY the Ministry of Education,

Section 5 _ 2 _ Annex (ll)(a) p.2

(a) Dates when question papers are handed in for moderation.

(b) Dates when question papers are received and returned by moderators.

(c) Dates when stencils are cut.

(d) Dates when question papers are duplicated and the number of papers duplicated,

(e) Time at which Chief Invigilator collects the question papers.

(f) Dates on which the markers collect the answer scripts and the number of scripts received bymarkers.

(g) Dates on which the Senior Subject Teacher/Subject Co-ordinator returns the answer scripts andmark lists to the office.

Moderation Arrangements

The Senior Subject Teachers/Subject Coordinators will be the moderators for all question papers in theirsubjects. It is their responsibility to moderate and vet the question papers.

They should ensure that all question papers are of the correct level and that questions set are on topicswithin the prescribed syllabuses and assessment guidelines.

The moderated question papers should be submitted to the Principal/Vice-Principal or Senior Assistant forapproval and for typing and duplicating.

Marking Arrangements

The Principal should assign markers for all the subjects. The markers must collect the answer scripts fromthe Principal/Vice-Principal or Senior Assistant on the day of the examination after the answer scriptshave been returned by the Invigilators. It is their responsibility to ensure that the answer scripts are keptunder lock and key except when they are being marked.

The marked answer scripts and mark lists should be handed to the Senior Subject Teacher/SubjectCo-ordinator for moderation.

After moderation, the mark lists and answer scripts must be returned to the Principal/Vice-Principal orSenior Assistant.

The Principal/Vice-Principal or Senior Assistant will issue the mark lists to the form teachers for thepreparation of the Result Sheet of the class.

Each class should be instructed to prepare a class list to be used by the markers as the mark list. Theseclass lists should be submitted to the markers when they collect the answer scripts for marking. Thenumber of mark lists required for each class will depend on the number of subjects taken by the pupils.

0 ,. c Annex (ll)(b)Section 5

Instructions to be Followed in the Conduct of School Examinations**

A. Instructions to setters concerning the setting of examination papers

1. Teachers of all subjects are advised to collect suitable examination

questions during their preparation of lessons.

2. All setters should discuss with subject teachers concerned before

setting the papers,

3. It is not advisable just to put together different exercise drawn

from exercise books printed by different publishers. Teachers should

set their own questions. The questions should be as varied and cover

as wide an area as possible*

4. For S-4 to S.7 paper, the public examination patterns should be

followed.

5. Standardized headings should be put on the front page of each

question paper and answer sheet.

6* The marks of each question must be labelled clearly.

7. The word 'End of paper* should be put at the end of the question

paper.

8. All question paper drafts should be as neatly prepared as possible.

9. Setters should put their names on the question papers set.

10. After the papers have been set, go over them carefully before handing

them over to the Panel Chairman,

11. A set of model answers and marking schemes (detailed ones for S.3)

should be handed in together with the question papers and answer

sheets.

12. All papers should be handed in to the Panel Chairman and then through

the Panel Chairman to the Principal before the deadlines set on the

circular for setting examination papers.

13. All drafts should be kept properly so that the questions will not

leak out.

14. To be safe, it is better for the setters to type or write out their

own question papers. If the help of the typist is needed, all

question papers should be given with clear instructions to the typist

as early as possible*

** Issued and adopted by a secondary school in Hong Kong

Section 5 Annex (ll)(b) p.2B. Instruction to Panel ChairMan concerning the checking of exaaination

papers

1* All the examination papers must be properly checked by the Panel

chairman.

2. The Panel Chairman should make sure that the type, number, wording

and level of difficulty of the questions are properly set. Check the

headings, instructions and the allocation of marks on the question

paper and answer sheet. Check whether the setters have put their

names on the question papers or not.

3. The checked papers should be handed in to the Principal before the

deadline.

C. Instructions to Panel Chairaan/setter

1. The properly typed or written papers should be taken to the general

office together with a completed printing form before the deadline.

2. Setters should see that the papers for the examination are ready two

days before the examination of that subject takes place and check

whether there are any printing errors and inform the clerk in charge

of examination affairs, if there are any,

3. The Panel Chairman or setter responsible for the subject concerned

should go around the examination centres within the first 30 minutes

after the starting of the examination and be ready to answer any

enquiries about the papers.

4. Setters, Panel Chairman or markers who wish to check or keep a

question paper before the examination day can ask the clerk

responsible for examination affairs for a copy.

Section 5 Juam (11)(b) p 3

D. Instructions to Invigilators

1. Teachers should follow the scheduled invigilation duty list and

should not make any changes without the prior approval of the

Assistant-Principal (Academic).2. All invigilators should collect the examination papers from the

general office 10 minutes before the examination starts. For large

centres like the hall, chief invigilator should collect the

examination papers from the general office and other invigilators

must report for duty 15 minutes before the examination starts.

3* Students taking examination should be allowed to enter the hall or

classroom 10 minutes before the examination starts.

4. Standardized announcement should be made during the examination*

5. Students are not allowed to bring their books, notebooks and cases to

their seats. These have to be placed in front of the classroom or

outside the hall,6. Make sure that all seats in the classroom are arranged in single rows

and that the students are sitting according to the order of their

class numbers*7. All papers should be distributed with their faces down on the desks.

8* Should there be any questions about the question paper, consult thePanel Chairman or setter during the first 30 minutes after the

starting of the examination*

9, All invigilators should be responsible for marking the number of male

and female students present and. absent in the class they invigilateand filling in the Invigilation Sheet.

10. All invigilators should put down the subject name, starting and ended

time for that examination paper on the blackboard.

11. No students are allowed to leave the classroom or hall in less than

45 minutes after the commencement of the examination.

12. Students should not be allowed to leave the classroom or hall

15 minutes before the examination ends. If the examination paper

lasts for one hour or less, no students are allowed to leave theclassroom or hall before the end of the examination.

13. Teachers must be on the alert at all times when invigilating at

examinations. During the course of an examination, watch the pupils

carefully. Invigilators should not mark papers or sit down to do

their own writing. Close invigilation is especially important inpublic examinations.

14. Collect both the question papers and the answer sheets according to

the ascending order of the class number.

15. All examination papers and worked scripts should be given to themarkers concerned immediately after the examination,

16. All spare question papers, supplementary sheets and Invigilation

sheets should be returned to the clerk in charge of examinationaffairs in the office.

3

Section 5 Annex (ll)(b) p.4

E. Announcements to be made during internal examinations

1. You should check carefully that no pieces of paper, notes, books,

cases or blank paper have been brought into the classroom/hall.

(For science subjects only : If you have a calculator with you, make

sure that the cover of your calculators does not contain any paper*)

All small purses should be put under your desks.

Put up your hand if you have any problem.

2. The question papers will be distributed now. Do not turn over your

question paper and do not start writing until you are told to do so.

3. This paper consists of ( ) pages. At the end of page ( ), you

should find the word 1End of paper1.

4. (Corrections may be made in this period.)

Your attention please. On page ( ), question no* ( )

5. Put down you name and class number on every answer sheet/the cover of

your answer book in the space provided now. After time is up, you

will not allowed to write anything including your name, question and

page number.

6. The time now is ( ). You have ( ) for this paper* The examination

will be finished by ( ). You may now start.

7. You have fifteen minutes left.

8* Time is up. Put down your pens* Your answer scripts and question

papers will be collected now. Stay in your seats until you are told

to leave.

9. Make sure you have all your belongings with you. You may now leave.

0 . c Annex (ll)(b) p.5Section 5

F. Instructions to markers concerning mark sheets and question papers

1. All question papers and answer sheets should be collected after the

teachers have checked them with the students.

2. No question papers or answer scripts should be kept by students.

Under the approval of subject Panel Chairman, question papers of S.5

and 5.7 may be kept by students for revision purpose.

3. All worked question papers and answer sheets should be returned to

the office after checking. All question papers and answer sheets

should be kept in the office for one year before they can be thrown

away,

4. For £.3 papers, a copy of the question paper and marking scheme and

all the worked answer sheets should be given according to the order

of the class number to the Assistant Librarian.

5* Markers should enter marks of different subjects and classes into the

computer floppy disk and hand in to the general office on or before

the deadline*

6. In S.I, 2, 4 and 5} daily marks should be counted.

For 5.6-7, individual teachers should decide whether daily marks will

be counted in a particular subject.

For S.3, the marks of the uniform test will be counted as the daily-

marks.

7. Percentage of marks

1st term 2nd term Whole year total

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

8. For $*1~5, turn all marks into round number.

For 5.6-7, the first decimal place of the mark should be counted.

9. $.1-5 : passing mark for each subject = 50%

S.6-7 : passing mark for each subject = 40%

s.iS.2

S.3

S.4

S.5

S.6

S.7

Daily 1

20

20

10

20

Daily marks

Hxam.

30

30

4-0

30

for 2

40

Daily

20

20

10

20

terms = 40

Exam.

30

30

40

30

60

60

c .. n c Annex (ll)(b) p.6Section 5

6. Instructions to form teachers related to the preparation of the classmarks records and report cards

1. Form teachers should discuss with subject teachers about the conductof the students before a conduct grade is given. Grade A should notbe given to students who have got mini-demerits and Grade D shouldnot be given to students having got minor-demerits and major-demerits. Conduct grade should also be handed to the DisciplineMaster for adjustment if any before it is handed to the ComputerGroup for the preparation of the class marks record.

2. After the class marks record has been prepared by the ComputerGroup, form teachers should put down comments for each student,Appropritate and preferably encouraging comments should be writtenfor the students concerning their performance, academic standardand personality.

3. After the report cards have been printed form teachers should copythe comments for the students from the class marks record tothe report cards.

4. Hand in the completed report cards, the class marks record tothe office to be checked by the Principal before the deadline.

5. Make a photcopy of each student1s report card and put it in thewhite envelope for student records. (This only needs to be done in thefinal examination by the general office.)

6. Report cards should be distributed to the students for their parentsto sign. The report cards should be collected from the studentslater to have the signatures of their parents checked.

7. Letters should be sent to the parents of the students who fail tomeet the promotion requirements in the first term.

Section 6General Finance and Accounts

Annex Topic

(1) School Management Initiative: Proposed Block Grant - AidedSecondary Schools

(2) Record of Donations Received by Schools

(3) Internal Financial Control Guidelines (extracted from ASGCNo. 43/86 dated 24 September 1986 on "Model AccountingSystem and Internal Control for Aided Schools")

(4) Sample of an Undertaking on Recurrent Subsidy

(5) ASGC No. 20/92 dated 25 March 1992Hire of Accommodation in Aided Schools

(6) ASGC No. 8/92 dated 12 February 1992Items Chargeable to Subscriptions (Tong Fai)/General FundsAccount

(7) Collections from Students in Aided Secondary Schools

(8) Sample of a Capital Assets Register

(9) Guidelines for the Processing of Long Service Payment andSeverance Pay

Section 6 Annex (1)

School Management InitiativeProposed Block Grant - Aided Secondary Schools

I. Introduction

General Administration Circular No. 16/91 dated 9 May 1991 announcedthat a single block grant will be introduced to replace the presentAdministration Grant, School & Class Grant and Furniture £ EquipmentGrant. A total of 21 secondary schools have joined the first phase of theSchool Management Initiative. In September 1992, a single block grantwill be introduced and these 21 schools will be eligible to receive blockgrant. This paper explains the various components of the block grant.

II. The Block Grant

The block grant will comprise three elements : the Administration Grant,the School and Class Grant, and a new recurrent Furniture and EquipmentGrant. The first two elements, will be calculated exactly the same as atpresent, and schools will be paid the same amount of grant as previously.The F/E grant will become a recurrent grant to be paid to schools onceevery six months in advance. The following paragraphs give a clearerillustration of the three elements.

A. Administration Grant

At present, an Administration Grant for aided secondary schoolscovers the salary cost of their administrative and janitor staff,based on the notional establishment of a standard secondary school.The amount of the grant for administrative staff is on the basis ofthe mid-point salary of their respective ranks, whereas that forjanitor staff is on the basis of the maximum salary point. Underthis arrangement, schools have the" flexibility to make use of thegrant to decide on both the number and salaries of the staff to beemployed and also on whether contractors should be employed toundertake cleaning of school premises and to provide clerical andsecretarial services. The grant is also used to pay staffsseverance pay should the employer's donations to the providentfund be insufficient.

The Administration Grant is normally paid on an operating classbasis. For schools with more special purpose rooms than average,theoretically they may opt, as a concession, to be paid the janitorelement on a classroom equivalent basis. However, in practice, thedepartment's Accounts Division calculates the rates on both basesin accordance with inf6rmation on the number of classes and specialrooms in each school and automatically pays the higher of the twofigures monthly. The grant comprises the salary cost but not theprovident fund donations for administrative and clerical staff. Theprovident fund portion will continue to be paid to schools on adeficiency grant basis (i.e. on actual basis).

After joining the SMI, the above method of calculating theAdministration Grant will continue and schools will receive exactlythe same amount of grant. A review of the administration grantelement will be carried out whenever there is a civil service payadjustment.


-. 2 -

B School and Class Grant

The School and Class Grant was introduced on 1 September 1988 toaided secondary schools to replace the Class Grant. The grant ispaid to schools to enable them to meet their general operatingcosts. The list of items that may be chargeable to the grant is atAppendix 9 of the Code of Aid for Secondary Schools (revised in1990). It divides expenditure items into school-based and class-based and class-based items Grammar, technical and prevocationalschools, are provided with different rates of grant.

After joining the SMI, schools will be paid the same level of Schooland Class Grant. A review, which will take into account CPImovements, will be carried out annually.

C. Furniture and Equipment Grant

Under the existing arrangements, the cost of replacing furnitureand equipment items as well as provision of additional items dueto curriculum changes are met from a non-recurrent accountsubhead under Head 40 of governments expenditure estimates. Anypurchase must go through a very lengthy process which includes,inter alia, submission of requirements by school to ED, approval-in-principle by ED t calling for tenders, approval of tenders by ED,placing orders and delivery, settling payment by schools and thenputting up claims for reimbursement. Each stage requires a numberof parties in the department to be heavily involved in overseeingeach step to ensure that the proposed F/E replacement is in order.

It has been accepted that the process is too lengthy and thatschools are usually forced to accept the lowest tender which mayresult in the quality of the F/E provided being unsatisfactory. Inview of this and having considered the possibility of delegatingmore responsibilities to schools, a Furniture and Equipmentrecurrent grant is to be introduced, with different rates forgrammar, technical and prevocational schools. Formulae of the newrecurrent F/E grant are at Appendix I and a brief description ofthe methods of calculation is set out below for information : -

(i) Secondary Grammar Schools

The grant will calculated on a class basis by dividing the averageyearly expenditure on F/E replacement items for the past threefinancial years for grammar schools, adjusted to the present pricelevel, by the average number of grammar school classes for thecorresponding period but excluding classes in schools opened for upto three years and also classes in those new schools which havenot yet completed the procurement of the first set of F/E, evenwhen they are already more than three years' old as they areunlikely to need to replace F/E. "Three years" is used as a cut-off point because sponsoring bodies are required to spend thefurniture and equipment setting-up fund to fully equip the schoolwithin three years (although most of them are unable to do so forvarious reasons). Such schools will, therefore, not be paid the F/Eelement in the BG until they meet the criteria.


- 3 -

It is proposed that the grant be paid half-yearly in advance so asto enable schools to have sufficient funds to purchase a majorreplacement item. Future revisions of the grant will be byreference to relevant CPI movements. The percentage increase ordecrease will then be used to adjust the amount of the F/E grant.The estimated F/E grant payable to eligible schools at 91-92 pricelevel is at Table 1 of Appendix II attached.

(ii) Prevocational Schools

Since prevocational schools' furniture and equipment requirementsare in many ways different from that of grammar schools, and thesubjects offered by one prevocational school are usually differentfrom others, the design of an F/E grant has many difficulties toovercome. It is therefore proposed that the F/E grant forprevocational schools is to be divided into 2 elements, namely

(a) Common subjects which include general furniture andequipment, F/E for non~Practical/Technical academic subjectsand the 5 common Practical/Technical subjects i.e. Metalwork,Technical Drawing, Electronics and Electrical, Typing, andOffice Practice.

(b) Other Practical/Technical subjects.

For (a) common subjects, the grant is to be calculated by the samemethod already devised for grammar schools at (i) above, i.e. on agrant per class per annum basis pertaining to the subjectsconcerned. The estimated grant payable to eligible schools at 91-92 price level is at Table 1 of Appendix II attached.

For (b) other P/T subjects, the total replacement cost of eachsubject's F/E for each school will be expressed as a percentage ofthe total replacement cost for all these subjects for allprevocational schools. The percentage will be applied to theaverage expenditure for the past three subjects to obtain thesubject F/E grant per annum. By repeating the same process foreach subject in each school, the total subject F/E grant for eachschool is calculated. For example, the present replacement cost forPrinting is $734,333 for one school, the total present replacementcost for all P/T subjects under (b) in all eligible prevocationalschools is $8,421,249 and the average annual expenditure for thesesubjects in the past 3 years is $163,783, The subject grant forschools teaching Printing as a subject is $734,333 / $8,421,249 x$163,783 = $ 14,282 per annum. Details of the calculation are atTable 2 of Appendix II attached. However none of these threeschools will be eligible for the F/E subsidy until they havecompleted procurement of the initial inventory for F/E items.

It must be pointed out that although the aforementioned formula^for(b) is easy to understand and simple to operate, the lifespan1 ofdifferent F/E items is assumed to be the same. This assumption isnecessary, otherwise, the various life-spans for different F/E itemswill make the grant impossible to calculate.


_ 4 -

The revision of the grants for both (a) and (b) is similar to thosefor grammar schools i.e. to adjust by CPI movements. For (b), thecurrent replacement cost of F/E for each subject concerned will beupdated annually by the subject inspectors after approval byFinance Branch.

It is proposed that both (a) and (b) are to be paid half yearly inadvance.

(iii) Technical Schools

A similar approach for prevocational schools will be applied totechnical schools, with the only exception being that element (a)comprises general F/E items and F/E for non-Practical/Technicalacademic subjects, whereas element (b) includes allPractical/Technical subjects.

(iv) Non-standard and Above-standard Items

It is also proposed that school managements be allowed to use thegrant given to them even for the purchase of non-standard andabove-standard items so as to give them greater flexibility tomanage their school. However, schools must spend all the grant onitems for educational purposes and on equipping "school-portion"premises. That is to say, schools should continue to finance F/Eitems for staff quarters, chapel and unregistered rooms etc. fromthe sponsors' own resources.

Appendix III sets out the amount of subsidy that would be paid for eachelement comprising the Block Grant in respect of a 30 operating classstandard sized aided secondary grammar school.

III. Transfer of Funds

To allow schools greater flexibility in managing the resources given tothem through the Block Grant, it is proposed that subsidies paid toschools in accordance with the formulae under Admin. Grant, School andClass Grant and Furniture and Equipment Grant become a "pool" withoutthe need to transfer funds between the different elements. In thisregard, surpluses in an individual grant carried forward from the pre-SMIera should be brought forward to form the opening balance of the blockgrant and allowed to be applied to other elements.

Section 6 Annex (1) p.s

- 5 _

IV. Maximum Amount of Grant to be kept by Schools

Under existing arrangements, schools are allowed to keep not more than3 months' and 6 months' provision in their Administration Grant andSchool and Class Grant accounts, respectively. For furniture andequipment subsidies, the current practice is to fund the cost on areimbursement basis, and, therefore, the question of surplus subsidy doesnot arise.

As the new block grant will become a unique recurrent grant for aidedsecondary schools and the subsidies paid under the grant can be freelyused by schools to meet administration and clerical staff salaries,severance pay, general operating costs and replacement of furniture andequipment, it is proposed that a uniform ceiling should be set for thegrant instead of specifying a ceiling for each element. By doing so,administrative work both on the part of schools and the department canbe much simplified Having considered the existing arrangements andthe fact that the Furniture and Equipment Grant will be paid half-yearly in advance, it is proposed that schools should be allowed to keepnot more than 4.0 months1 provision in their block grant account. Anyamount in excess of 4.0 months' provision as per the school's auditedaccounts will be clawed back by the department. Details of the workingare at Appendix IV.

Accounts Division1 June 1992

Section 6 Annex (1) p.6 Appendix I

Proposed Block Grant for Aided Secondary SchoolsSchool Management Initiative (SMI)

Formulae of the Furniture and Equipment Element

a. Grammar Schools

Average expenditure on F/E replacementfrom 1989-90 to 1991-92 for grammar schoolsx adjustment index*

= Grant p.c.p.a,

Average no. of eligible classes(1989-90 to 1991-92)

Prevocational Schools/Technical Schools

(i) Common subjects

Average expenditure on these common subjectsfrom 1989-90 to 1991-92 for prevocational/technical schools x adjustment index*

Average no, of eligible classes(1989-90 to 1991-92)

(ii) Other P/T.subjects

Average expenditure on these P/T subjectsfrom 1989-90 to 1991-92 for prevoc/technicalschools x adjustment index*

Total current replacement cost of all P/Tsubjects in all prevoc/technical schools

" Grant per subject per annum

= Grant p.c.p.a,

Currentreplace-ment

x cost ofeach P/Tsubject ineach school

The adjustment is applied to bring the expenditure to 1991-92 pricelevel.

Table 1 : Calculatfon of F&E element of proposed Block Grant

Appendix IM

(I) Grammar schools

(tt) Common subjects of provocations! schools

(III) Special P/T subjects of provocations*! schools

Actual Expenditure(1)

1989-90

$10,796,129.67

$751.765,42

$93.073.00

(2)1990-91

$9,736,90084

$553,554.40

$92,477,90

(3)1991-92

$13,777,489.30

$735,816.18

$278,285 00

Actual Expenditure(adjusted to 1991 -92 price level)

(1)x1. 097x1 ,0951989-90

$12,968.472.90

$903.031.90

$111,80068

(2)x1.0951990-91

$10,650,956.42

$606,14207

$101,26330

1991-92

$13,777,48930

$735,816.18

$278.285.00

(a)

Adjusted Expend(Average of 3 yrs)

$12,465,63954

$748,330 05

$163.78299

W

Total no. ofop. classes

4,205

212

-

w/wAmount of Grant

per class p a

$2.964 48

$3.529 86

(Pis see Table 2)

Table 2 : Calculation of additional grant for special P/T subjects of prevocational schools

Existing special P/T subjects

TextilesEng. StudiesFabricationInterior Decor.Fashion* ClothingAccom & CateringWoodworkPrintingRetailing

0)Tot. expend, onspecial P/T subj.(adj. avg. value)

$163,78299$163,78299$163,782.99$163,78299$163.78299$163,782.99$163.782,99$163,782.99$163.782.99

(2)Est. cost ofeach specialP/T subject

$900,000$184,738$261,160$314,458$255,169$584,945$422,386$734,333$26.556

(3)Tot. rept. costof ail existing

special P/T sub

$8,421.249$8,421 ,249$8,421,249$8,421 ,249$8,421,249$8,421,249$8.421,249$8,421,249$8.421 .249

(4}=(1x2 + 3)

Rate of grantper subj. p. a.

$17,504$3,593$5,079$6.116$4,963

$11.376$8.215

$14,282$516 I

Section 6 Annex (1) p.gAppendix III

Amount of Block Grant Payable to a30 Operating Classes Grammar School

(A 12 months period at current price level)

Block Grant Elements

School and Class Grant

OperatingClass Basis

336,900.00

Administration Grant 1,491,310.00

F/E Grant

Block Grant Payableper annum

88,934,40

1,917,144.40

Classroom EquivalentBasis

336,900.00

1,478,600.50#

88,934.40

1,904,434.90

Time of Payment

End of Apriland end ofOctober

End of eachmonth

End of Apriland end ofOctober

* Only applicable to the Administration Grant.

# Assuming that the schools has 35 classrooms and equivalent and 6laboratories.


Appendix IV

Block Grant -Clav Back Provision

I. Admin. Grant

F.Y. 1991-92 (a) 3 months1 provision = $117,384,381

(b) 1 month's provision = $39,128,127

II. School & Class Grant

F.Y. 1991-92 (a) 6 months1 provision » $53,189,091

(b) 1 month's provision - $8,864,849

III. Block Grant.- Claw Back Limit

$170,573,472$47,992,976

3,55 months

4,0 months

Kb) + 1Kb)

Say

Conclusion

SMI schools should be allowed to keep 4.0 months1 provisionin their account. Anything beyond this level will be clawed back by ED.

Accounts Division1 June 1992

To: DEO(

Record of donations received by schools

(Quarterly Return for the period ending=: Hovember/February/May/Augusl)

§OS

Name of donor Donor's relationwith school

Description and valueof donation

P/f 113 HA l£llf 7 3 $r 6*) 1$ 'JO

Vhether the dona-tion is sol icited

Date of receivingdonation

Purpose of donation

f Please delete as appropriate

Note :Nil return is required

School Chops

(WP:donation)

Mane of School :

Name of Supervisor*

Signature of Supervisor1

&3

Date :HJW

Section 6 Annex (3)

Internal Financial Control Guidelines*

In addition to the keeping of proper books of account, effective internal control isequally, if not more important. If they are not already being practised, the followingguidelines should be followed.

(a) Authorising orders and payments

(i) Competitive prices should be obtained and, before orders are placed,they should be approved and countersigned by the head/deputy headof the school.

(ii) All payments should be similarly approved and countersigned by aperson other than the one maintaining the ledge or the cash book.

(iii) All payment vouchers should be marked off as "Paid" to guard againstduplicate payment.

(b) Handling of cash/cheques

(i) Cash, whether receipts or imprest, should be handled by a member ofstaff other than the one maintaining the ledgers or the cash book.

(ii) The security aspect of cash should be borne in mind at all times andthe head/deputy head should be responsible for ensuring that cash heldin the premises is put into a safe/lockable cabinet outside school hours.

(iii) Cheques should not be presigned by any authorised persons.

(iv) The supervisor of an aided school must keep bank accounts in thename of the school, one of which accounts must be kept solely inrespect of moneys received from Government.

(v) All disbursements should, as far as possible, be made by cheque whichshould be signed by the supervisor and, where there are two or moreregistered managers, by one other registered manager in addition to thesupervisor.

(vi) The supervisor may keep a reasonable cash balance to meet smallpayments. Please refer to the relevant Aided Schools General Circularcurrently in force.

Extracted from Aided Schools General Circular No. 43/86 dated 24.9.1986 on"Model Accounting System and Internal Control for Aided Schools".


(c) Monthly reconciliation

A bank reconciliation should be done monthly (i.e. the balance at the end ofthe month shown on the bank statement should be reconciled with that in thebank column of the cash book by taking into account unpresented cheques,etc.) The head/deputy head of the school should certify such a reconciliationand he/she should check the cash in hand with that shown in the cash bookand then sign and date the cash book indicating that this has been done.

(d) Surprise inspection

In addition to the monthly reconciliation, the supervisor and/or members ofthe School Management Committee should carry out periodic surpriseinspections in the same manner, at least quarterly.

(e) Register of capital assets

Proper register should be kept for all fixed asset and items of non-consumableand durable nature, such as school building, furniture, typewriter andmicroscopes, etc. The head/deputy head should make physical verification ofthese assets at least annually. Disposal of any fixed assets should beauthenticated by the head/deputy head in the register of capital assets.

(f) Stocks of exercise books, school uniforms, P.E. uniforms and othertrading items

School heads should satisfy themselves that stocks are held in a secure placeand that regulations relating to the receipt and issue of such stock areadequate. Perpetual inventory record should be kept of exercise books, schooluniforms, P.E. uniforms and other items. Stock-taking should be performedat the financial year end to ascertain the exact quantity in hand and reconcilewith the stock record balances.

Section 6 Annex (4)

Ref. No. L/M to ED(RB) 164/64(98)

(Name of School)

(Address of School)

(Date)

Director of Education,Hong Kong.

Sir,

RECURRENT SUBSIDY

In consideration of the Government of Hong Kong from time to time advancing

recurrent grants to the management committee of the above-mentioned school on the terms

and conditions set out in the Code of Aid for Primary/ Secondary Schools, I,

, Supervisor of the said school, hereby guarantee the repayment of the balance

of any recurrent subsidy which is unused at the time of any of the following events -

(i) Closure of the school

(ii) Suspension of the school's operations

(iii) Withdrawal or removal of the school from the Aided School Lists

maintained by the Education Department.

Yours faithfully,

Witness :

Witness :


Director of Education,Hong Kong.

Please pay the recurrent and non-recurrent grants for my school into the followingbank account:

Name of School:

Name of Account (in English):

Account No.:

Name of Bank (and branch, if any):

Names of three signatories for signing cheques:(N.B. cheques should be signed by the

Supervisor and one other registered manager)

(1)(Supervisor)

(2)(Manager)

(3)(Manager)

I certify that the above account has been opened. I hereby agree that the Bank'sacknowledgement will by sufficient discharge in lieu of my personal acknowledgement.

Supervisor

Date

Section 6 Annex (5)

Ref. ED 396/62 II EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

25 March 1992

AIDED SCHOOLS GENERAL CIRCULAR NO. 20/92Hire of Accommodation in Aided Schools

(Chinese version will follow)

This circular announces revised rates chargeable for the hire of schoolaccommodation* Supervisors/Heads of aided schools are recommended to apply therates as set out in the Schedule of Charges at Appendix A and these rates shouldtake effect from 1 April 1992. However, there will be no objection from EducationDepartment if supervisors/heads of aided schools charge hirers for advance bookingswhich have been made prior to the issue of this circular at the pre-revised rates*Any hire charges levied should be collected in advance and a receipt should beissued to cover the payment.

2. It should be noted that the rates specified under this circular are forgeneral guidelines only and it is up to the supervisors/heads of aided schools todecide the appropriate rates to be levied according to the nature and purpose ofthe activity* In principle, no organization should make use of the facilities inan aided school without being charged, as this represents a hidden subsidy to the'organization* This is amplified further as follows :-

^ School activities - No charges should be levied on normal schoolactivities such as parent-teacher meetings, old boys' associationmeetings, student club meetings etc, irrespective of whether or notthey are carried out during normal school hours*.

(b) Official meetings and general elections - There may be cases whereschools were built' with donations from outside organizations* Inthis respect, it is considered that the organizations may have thefree use of the school premises in holding their official meetingsor general elections. However, charges will have to be paid ifsocial functions are held.

(c) Examinations ~ The Hong Kong Examinations Authority (H*K.E.A*) isresponsible generally for the conduct of local and overseas examinationsfor candidates in Hong Kong0 For examinations specified in theSchedule of the H.K.E.A. Ordinance, (i.e. the Hong Kong Certificateof Education Examination, the Hong Kong Higher Level Examinationand the Hong Kong Advanced Level Examination) and for PitmansExaminations and Typewriting and Shorthand subjects of the LCC andI Examinations, the charges are free.

(d) Use by charitable or non-profit-making organizations - If theproceeds resulting fronf the activities are to be devoted to anapproved charity, or if the organization is itself a charitable ornon-profit-making organization, then the reduced rates as specifiedin paragraph l(B) of the Schedule of Charges at Appendix A willapply.

(e) Use by Religious Bodies - No charges should be levied for religiousactivities initiated by the school's own sponsoring bodies* Forother religious bodies, the reduced rates as specified shall apply.

Section 6 ^mx 5> P 2

(f) Polling/counting stations -" the use of premises in aided schoolsdesignated for polling or-counting purposes pursuant to the ElectorialProvisions (Procedure) Regulations, Cap, 367 is free of charge exceptelectricity charges specified in paragraph 10 of tne Schedule ofCharges at Appendix A.

(g) inter-school competition - The following three associations shouldbe allowed to use school halls and playgrounds free of charge forholding inter-school competitions:-

(i) The Hong Kong Schools Music and Speech Association;(ii) The Hong Kong Schools Sports Association; and(iii) The New Territories Schools Sports Association.

(h) Evening classes used by Vocational Training Council - At the discretionof the supervisors/heads of aided schools, the Vocational TrainingCouncil may be charged for the use of school accommodation for itsevening classes at special rates in accordance with paragraph 6 ofthe Schedule of Charges at Appendix A*

(i) Evening adult education schools/courses/classes operated by governmentdepartments (including the Education Department) and approvednon-profit-making adult education bodies - Special rates will becharged in accordance wirh paragraph 7 of the Schedule of Chargesat Appendix A.

(j) Resource Teaching Centres/Adjustment Units operated by governmentdepartments (including the Education Department) - Special rateswill be charged in accordance with paragraph 8 of the Schedule ofCharges at Appendix A.

3. Supervisors/Heads of aided schools should note that the holding ofpublic performances in school halls is subject to the Licensing Regulations currently |in forcec These regulations are administered by the Commissioner for Televisionand Entertainment Licensing and his prior approval is required. Hirers should beadvised to seek advice from the Commissioner of Inland Revenue whether or notentertainment tax is chargeable in respect of any concert or performance for whichan admission fee is proposed*

4. Hire charges for paragraph 2(i) and 2(j) above should be credited infull to the school's School and Class Grants Account. In all other cases, thehire charges should be credited to the Subscription/General Funds/Tong Fai Accountin the first instance out of which any payment (at an appropriate rate to bedecided by the school) to minor and janitor staff should be made and 40% of thenet balance transferred to the School and Class Grants Account.

5. A log book in the Format prescribed at Appendix B should be maintainedto record details of all hirings (x rhether free or chargeable). The log book issubject to inspection by this Department's audit inspection teams.


6. Aided Schools General Circular No. 17/91 dated 27 March 1991 is herebycancelled*

P, M. V. CARTERfor Director of Education

To i Supervisors/Heads of all aided secondaryand primary schools (including special schools)

Hong Kong Examinations AuthorityVocational Training CouncilSecretary for Constitutional Affairs

PMVC/cl


Appendix A

Schedule of Charges forHire of Accommodation in Aided Schools

with effect from 1.4,92

Per 4-hour SessionSchool Lighting GrandHall Panel Piano

1. School Halls

(A) Standard Rates

Applicable to organizations other thanthose charged at reduced rates at (b)below - 1,240

Reduced Rates {for charitableorganizations, non-profit-makingorganizations and religious bodies) :-

(i) For activities other thanthose specified at (ii)and (iii) below : 620

(ii) For educational, socialand cultural activities,e.g. dancing classes/practices, badmintonpractices, etc., the ratewill be $103 per hour orpart thereof - minimum2 hours*

(iii) For activites organizedby the P.E. Section ofE.Do and the Hong KongSchools Sports Council,the rate will be $103 perhour or part thereof -minimum 2 hours.

2. CUssrooms

(a) (i) $68 per hour or part thereof; minimum 2 hours,

(ii) Additional charged for room cooler : $8 per houror part thereof; minimum 2 hours.

(b) For non-profit-making organizations :

(i) $34 per hour or part thereof; minimum 2 hours.

(ii) Additional charges for room cooler : $4 per houror part thereof; minimum 2 hours,

76 100

76 100

/2 ..

Annex (5) p.5Section 6

- 2 -

3. Covered Playground, Basketball Court, Gymnasium, Sports Fields

(a) Day time -

(i) Without lighting - $134 per 2-hour session with a graceperiod of 30 minutes.

(ii) Electricity charges - $4 per 2-hour session with a grace(optional) period of 30 minuteSo

(b) Night time - $138 per 2-hour session with a grace period of 30minuteso

(c) For charitable or non-profit-making organizations -

(i) Day time -

Without lighting - $67 per 2-hour session with a graceperiod of 30 minutes.

Electricity charges - $2 per 2-hour session with a grace(optional) period of 30 minutes*

(ii) Night time - $69 per 2-hour session with a grace periodof 30 minutes*

(d) Additional charge of $45 per 2-hour session for PE equipment ingymnasium*

4, Laboratory/Speci a1 Rooms

(i) $78 per hour of part thereof; minimum 2 hours.

(ii) Additional charges for room cooler : $12 per hour or part thereof;minimum 2 hours *

5. Special rates for the Hong Kong Examinations Authority

(a) Applicable to examinations specified in the schedule to the H.K.EoA*Ordinance, (i.e. the Hong Kong Certificate of Education Examination;the Hong Kong Higher Level Examination and the Hong Kong AdvancedLevel Examination) and Pitmans Examinations, Typewriting and Shorthandsubjects of the LCC & I Examinations*

Free of charge for all type of accommodations,,

(b) Applicable to overseas/external examinations, e.g. G.C.E.. L.C.C-and TOFEL, etc. :-

(i) Hall

Day time

$610 per 4-hour session (including a grace period of 30minutes); and

$138 per additional hour (or part thereof).

/3 ...


Evening time

$335 per 2-hour session (including a grace period of 30minutes); and

$138 per additional hour (or part thereof).

The above hire charges are specifically approved byGovernment on the understanding that H.K.EoA,, makesex-gratia payments to those school staff who assist inthe conduct of the examinations.

(ii) Classroom without room cooler - $34 per hour or partthereof; minimum 2 hours.

Additional charges for room cooler - $4 per hour orpart thereof; minimum 2 hours.

(iii) Laboratory without room cooler - $39 per hour or partthereof; minimum 2 hours.

Additional charges for room cooler - $6 per hour orpart thereof; minimum 2 hours.

So Special rates for Vocational Training Council for evening classes conductedin aided school premises

Classroom/Workshop without room cooler $212 per month each

Classroom/Workshop with room cooler $435 per month each

The hire charge shall be on a monthly basis with 15th of the month as thebreak off point for determining whether a full month hire rate should becharged.

7. Special rates for evening adult education schopls/courses/classes operatedW^overnment departments jinciuding the Education Department) and approvednon-profit-making adult educationbodies

(a) Classroom without room cooler $212 per month each

(b) Classroom with room cooler * $435 per moth each

(c) Special room without room cooler $327 per month each

(d) Special room with room cooler * $622 per month each

(e) Laboratory without room cooler $ 41 per hour each

(f} Laboratory with room cooler * $ 53 per hour each

* Applicable to approved non-profit-making adult educationbodies only

/4 ....


- 4 -

8. Special rates for Resource Teaching Centres/Adjustment Units operatedby government departments (Including the Education Department)

Classroom without room cooler $605 per month each

9. Special rates for the ^school-based organizations

(a) Free of charge for activities which are basically for the benefitof the students of the schools in which these activities areheld.

(b) At reduced rate for activities which do not involve the studentsof the schools in which these activities are held, butnevertheless intended as a form of training having recognizededucational value of teenagers (same as non-profit-makingorganizations).

* School-based organizations include the Community youth ClubScheme, the Scouts, the Girl Guides, Junior Red Cross, St. JohnAmbulance Brigade, road Safety Patrol, Sea Cadet Corps, JuniorPolice Call and the Duke of Edinburgh Award Scheme.

10. Electricity Charges for school premises used as polling/countingstations in elections

(i) Schools designated as polling/counting $55 per daystations installed with no more than40 light bulbs

(ii) Schools designated as polling/counting $110perdaystations installed with more than 40light bulbs

Appendix B

ex

Hire of accommodation in Aided SchoolsMaintenance of Record

Hire of School Hall

Date

18.4.92

21,4.92

J ,5,92

Time

7: 00-10: 30pm

7*00-13 :00pm

9:00-l:00prn

Charges

SchoolHall

$1,240

$ 620

~

Lighting

$76

$76

-

GrandPiano

$100

$100

-

TotalAmount

$1,416

$ 796

Free

Name ofHirer

ABC Co,

CommunityChest

HKEA

Signatureof Hirer

ReceiptNo , andDate

Certifiedby Head ofSchool

Hire of Classroom

Date

15.4.92

21,4.92

15.6,92

29.7.92

Classroom

3B

2A

1C

ID

Time

2-| hours(i.e. 3 hours)

4 hours

1 hour(Minimum 2 hours)

2 hours

Charges

Rate per hour

Classroom

$68

$34

$68

_

Room Cooler

$8

$4

$8

_

Total/\rnr"Yi ir

$228

$152

$152

Free

Name ofLJ 4 yc^Y*iiJLL&L

ABC Co.

HKEA

DBF Co,

Associ-ation ofpaststudents

SignaturervF Hi for*

ReceiptNo . andDate

Certifiedby Head ofSchool

8

Section 6 Annex (6)

Ref: ED(SCH) S/42/90 Education DepartmentHong Kong

12 February 1992


Items chargeable to Subscriptions (Tong FaiVGeneral Funds Account

The Codes of Aid for Primary, Secondary and Special Schools provide that with theapproval of the Director of Education, schools may charge Subscriptions (Tong Fai) forexpenditure on educational needs. Income from Subscriptions or any other source are treatedas "school funds" and are credited to the schools' Subscriptions (Tong Fai) account (alsonamed as General Funds account in respect of aided primary schools).

2. This circular announces that the use of school funds in the Subscriptions (TongFai)/General Funds account has been relaxed with immediate effect to cover expenditure onboth educational and school needs which include:

(i) topping up of the costs for above-standard items;

(ii) full costs for non-standard items;

(iii) maintenance for non-school portions within the school premises; and

(iv) instructors' fees for cultural activities.

3. A list of expenditure items chargeable to the Subscriptions (Tong Fai) General Fundsaccount is drawn up as shown in the Annex attached. This list is by no means exhaustiveand is subject to periodic review.

4. The relevant sections of the Codes of Aid for Primary, Secondary and Special Schoolsare amended to read as follows:

Section I2(a) for Primary Schools

" Where a school, administered under the terms of this Code of Aid, ispermitted by the Director to charge Subscriptions (Tong Fai) to meet theschool's share of capital and special expenditure and for expenditure on schooland educational needs, the amount of Tong Fai in the school shall be subjectto the approval of the Director."


Section Ufa) for Secondary Schools

" The Director may permit a school to charge Subscriptions (Tong Fai) forexpenditure on school and education needs. The amount of such subscriptionsin each school shall be subject to the approval of the Director afterconsideration of the level of subscriptions pertaining in aided schools generallyand the particular circumstances of the school. "

Section 12(a) for Special Schools

11 The Director may permit a special school to charge Subscriptions (Tong Fai)for expenditure on school and educational needs. The amount of suchsubscriptions in each special school shall be subject to the approval of theDirector."

5. Schools are required to keep a proper account of every income and expenditure itemunder the Subscriptions (Tong Fai)/General Funds account for audit purposes.


To: Supervisor and Heads of all aided schools

Supervisors and Heads of Caput/Assisted Private/Bought-Place schoolsand Heads of Sections - for information


Annex

List of expenditure items chargeable to Subscriptions (Tong Fai)/General Funds Account

1. Teaching staff salaries approved by ED:

(a) salary on top of ED's approved entitlement; and

(b) additional teachers employed to teach specialised subjects e.g. B.K.

2. Crown rent and rates in respect of non-aided portion e.g. principal's quarters withinthe school premises, tuckshop, school chapel within school premises to be usedexclusively by students.

3. External redecoration/repairs of principal's quarters within the school premises (upto normal standards approved by Architectural Services Department/HousingDepartment and subject to ED's approval as to the scope of the repairs.)-

4. School's portion (in the case of fee-charging primary schools) towards major repairs,emergency repairs and furniture and equipment costs.

5. School's portion in refinancing major repairs, emergency repairs andfurniture/equipment due to increase above the approved costs.

6. Maintenance of non-school portion of the building for educational purposes (e.g.school chapel).

7. Purchase of items of office equipment for school administration (e.g. fax machine)and their maintenance costs.

8. Subject to ED's approval in each case, employment of school social workers.

9. Garden expenses.

10. Printing and stationery (applicable to schools collecting photo-copying charges fromstudents).

11. Light, fuel and power (electricity charges for items not approved to be paid by EDe.g. air-conditioning to library, school hall).

12. Expenses on swimming pool (maintenance cost and chemicals).

13. Water (swimming pool).

14. Purchase of above-standard furniture and equipment items for school uses.


15. Insurance cover for non-school portions and for above-standard items of furniture,equipment and buildings against fire and other natural disasters.

16. Staff uniform (for minor staff, special school staff).

17. Bank charges (for salary payment and fee collection).

18. Debit interest on overdraft.

19. Subscription fees e.g. scouts, sports association, career masters' association.

20. Food for fish in aquarium in conference room.

21. Scholarship to students.

22. School's anniversary expenses.

23. Souvenir for guests and staff (on account of their service).

24. Instructors' fees.

25. Advertising fees for staff recruitment and pupil enrolment.

26. Lift maintenance.

27. Licence fee e.g. for loop system.

28. Transportation.

29. Prizes to students (for outstanding performance in sports, academic subjects).

30. School magazine.

31. Seminar and course fees for teachers.

32. Guarantee commission payable to banks in respect of electricity deposits.

33. Telephone (additional).

34. Surcharge on late payment of water, electricity, etc.

35. Expenditure on Parent-Teacher Association and Student Union.

36. Provident fund handling fee for preparation of Deed of Variation for non-teachingstaff.

37. Deficit on various grants other than the Salaries Grant which is a deficiency grant.

Section 6 Annex (7)

Collections from Students in Aided Secondary Schools

Purpose of Collection Maximum Rate of Charge Account to be Credited

(1) Registration fee $250 Tong Fai (Subscriptions)

(2) Entrance examination fee $20 Tong Fai (Subscriptions)

(3) Fine for serious damage to the original cost of the book plusor loss of library book 20% for handling charges

Block Grant

(4) Fine for overdue library the r a t e i m p o s e d bybook Urban/Regional Council

- ditto -

(5) Replacement charge forloss of library card

- ditto - - ditto -

(6) Replacement of student $5 per copycard

Tong Fai (Subscriptions)

(7) Transcript $10 per copy

(8) Replacement of graduation $10 per copycertificate

- ditto -

- ditto -

(9) Breakage and damage of $25science equipment

Block Grant

(10) Breakage of school $25 for individual studentproperty other than science $100 for the whole classequipment responsible

(11) Wilful damage to schoolproperty

the full cost of repair/replacement of the item

the account from whichfunds were originallydrawn for the purchase ofthe item(s) concerned

- ditto -

(12) Locker deposit $10 per student(to be refunded to student onleaving school)

Tong Fai (Subscriptions)

00

sI

* Location : General Office

Capital Assets Register

Item

1

2

3

4

5

Particulars

Writing desks

Chairs

Cabinets

Sofa

Fans

SourceofSupply

Date ofPurchase

1.9.89

1.9.89

1.9.89

2.12.89

23.12.89

Value

Govt'Funds

$

9,000

4,500

15,000

-

2,726

SchoolFunds

-

-

-

8,000

-

Quantity

6

6

24

4

8

Date & Reasonof Write-off

Supervisor/Principal'sauthentication

Remarks

)) Non-recurrent grants

)Donated by SponsoringBody

Charged to School &Class Grant

§1 separate sheet for each location.

Section 6 Annex (9)

Guidelines for the Processingof Long Service Payment and Severance Pay

Severance Pay and Long Service Payment are paid in accordance with theeligibility criteria stipulated in the Employment Ordinance (Cap 57 of theLavs of Hong Kong). In essence, the criteria are :

Severance Pay In continuous employment for not less than 24months prior to dismissal by reason of(i) redundancy, or(ii) lay off.

Long Service Payment In continuous employment for not less than 5years prior to termination of service byreason of

(i) dismissal for reasons other thanredundancy or summary dismissal

• (ii) death(iii) early retirement on ground of ill health(iv) retirement on reaching the age of 60

The methods of calculating the amount of payments are as follows :-

Severance Pay

Last full month's salary x 2/3 x years of reckonable service *Less any Provident Fund (Employer's A/C only)/Gratuity Payments

*where years of reckonable service maybe counted back to 23-8-66.

Long Service Payment

Last full month's salary x 2/3 x years of reckonable service *Less any Provident Fund (Employer's A/C only)/Gratuity Payments

* where years of reckonable service may be counted back to 1-1-77.

The following should be observed in determining the amount of SeverancePay or Long Service Payment to be met from government funds :

a) the salaries must be fully subvented by governmentb) the period of service counted in the calculation of aSeverance Pay or Long Service Payment must be covered bygovernment subsidiesc) any retirement gratuity and/or employer's donation togetherwith interests/dividends in Provident Fund Schemes must be setoff from the total amount of Severance Pay or Long ServicePayment entitlementsd) for some non-teaching staff in Special Schools whose servicewas formerly fully subvented by government departments (SWD, HSD,DH) their period of service under government subsidies may alsobe counted in the calculation of Severance Pay or Long ServicePayment.


Reference should be made to the Employment Ordinance (Cap 57, Lavs ofHong Kong) for determination of an individual's eligibility for Severance Payor Long Service Payment. In case of doubt it is the responsibility of theSupervisor to consult the Commissioner for Labour. Replies from theCommissioner for Labour, if available, should be attached to claims forreimbursement of Long Service Payment. Please note that Severance Pay whichis paid out of the Administration Grant Account is not reimbursable.

In all cases of meeting the payment of Severance Pay and Long ServicePayment in whole or in part from government funds School supervisors shouldcomplete in respect of each individual receiving such payment a form as perAppendix I and submit to the Education Subventions Section of the ED AccountsOffice for record or reimbursement purposes.

Accounts DivisionEducation Department

1 May 1992


Appendix I

Long Service Payment/Severance Pay for Mr./Ms: (Post:

Name of School: _

School Code:

Fully aided w.e.f.:

Pursuant to Employment Ordinance 1985 (CAP 57, Laws of Hong Kong) Icertify that the above named staff of this school is entitled to a LongService Payment/ Severance Pay computed as follow

a. Date of Birth :

b. Date of Appointment:

c. Date of leaving employment:

d. Reason for leaving employment:

e. Reckonable years of service: (c - b or 1-1-77/23-8-66 as the case may be)

Yr, Days

f. Wages in each of the 12 months preceding dismissal:

g. Total salary earned during the 12 months preceding dismissal

h. Last full month's salary :_J!

i. Provident Fund Payment(Employerfs Account only)/ Retirement Gratuity

3(Please attach copy of Provident Fund Termination Benefit Statement.)

j. Amount of Long Service Payment/ Severance Pay: [(h)x2/3x(e)]

$ x x = $

k. Adjustedft Long Service Payment/ Severance Pay [(j) or (g)*- (i)]

_J nJ zJ* whichever is the smaller. JfThis adjustment is applicable toProvident Fund contributors and those in receipt of gratuity payments.

I certify that the above information is correct and I undertake to repaythe government for any overpayment of Long Service Payment/ Severance Payto the staff concerned.

Supervisor


S A M P L E

Appendix I

Long Service Payment/Severaitee-'Pay for Mr ./Ms:JtfONG (Post:Janitor Staff)

Name of School: ABC SCHOOL

School Code: 1000

Fully aided w.e.f.: 1-9-70

Pursuant to Employment Ordinance 1985 (CAP 57, Laws of Hong Kong) Icertify that the above named staff of this school is entitled to a LongService Payment/ Severance-Pay computed as follow

a. Date of Birth : 15-1-40

b. Date of Appointment: 1-9-73

c. Date of leaving employment: 1-9-90

d* Reason for leaving employment: DISMISSAL

e, Reckonable years of service: (c - b or 1-1-77/23-8-66 as the case may be)

13 Yr 243 Days

f. Wages in each of the 12 months preceding dismissal:

g. Total salary earned during the 12 months preceding dismissal:

$ 53,720

h. Last full month's salary: $ 4,755

i. Provident Fund Payment(Employer's Account only)/ Retirement Gratuity

$ 23,259,21

(Please attach copy of Provident Fund Termination Benefit Statement*)

j. Amount of Long Service Payment/ 9everaaee-Pay: [(h)x2/3x(e)]

$ 4,755 X 2/3 X 13 243/365 = $ 43,320.44

k. Adjusted* Long Service Payment/ Severaitce-Pay [(j) or (g)* - (i)]

$ 43,320,44 - $ 23,259,21 = $ 20,061,23

* whichever is the smaller. #This adjustment is applicable toProvident Fund contributors and those in receipt of gratuity payments,

I certify that the above information is correct and I undertake to repaythe government for any overpayment of Long Service Payment/ Severance Payto the staff concerned.

7-9-90 ( CHANDate Supervisor

Section 7Stores, Furniture & Equipment,

Repairs & Maintenance ofSchool Buildings

Annex Topic

(1) Recommended Design of a Tender Box for Aided Schools

(2) Tender Summary Sheet

(3) Application for Purchase by Quotation

(4) Application Form for Estimates 1992/93 - Major Repairs/Alterations

(5) ASGC No. 26/89 dated 14 June 1989Internal Maintenance of all Aided Schools in Estates Vestedin the Housing Department

(6) ASGC No. 14/90 dated 28 March 1990Maintenance of Non-Estafe Aided Schools

Section 7 Annex (1)

Recommended Tender Box for Aided Schools

Size; 12"(W) x 18lf(H) x 10"(D) with an opening of 1" x 12" at the front.

Material: lauan plywood of 5/8" thick.

Design: 2 locks and a concave door handle with wordings of "Tender Box".

Section 7 Annex (2)

Tender Summary Sheet

Date of Issue Tender No.

Sheet No. Date of Opening

Tender for the supply of

Supplier

We certifythat wehavecheckedthis Sheetto ensurethat thereis a 'tick'againstevery firm.

Tender -totalOpeningCommitteeChairmanSignature:

Name in blockletters:

MemberSignature:

Name in blockletters:

Category

1Offer

2No

Offer

3Rec'dlate

4No

Reply

For School Use only

Remarks/Referrals

Section 7 Annex (3)

School Ref.:To: # Supervisor/Principal

Application for Purchase bv Quotation

I have obtained the following oral/written quotations for supply of furniture and

equipment and wish to recommend acceptance of the # lower/higher offer from

The reasons for not accepting the lower offer are

as follows :

ItemNo. Specification

QtyApvd inStandardList

QtynowReqd

Name ofSupplier

UnitPrice

TotalAmount

OfferAccepted" /"

As the item is required # most urgently / by ...., I shall request

the supplier to deliver the item on or before if approved.

Payment may be effected after satisfactory receipt of the goods on

I confirm that the above item is a single purchase and not part of a largeconsignment to be delivered at intervals.

Quotation obtained by:_

Rank:

Signature:

Date:

I certify that the price(s) for the purchase is / are considered reasonable and thepurchase is not part of a large consignment to be delivered at intervals.Recommendation is approved. Please place orders. *

Authorised by:# Supervisor/Principal

Date:

delete whichever inapplicable

ofrlJLi/Cjl JTJExa.l'JfMXA / uj_iv /i.™-'i*i>.*.

SECTION A

Name of School

Address *

Type of School(please tick asappropriate)

Name of Principal

(to be completed in triplicate by school)

Estate

Itemno.

i

Location

<

Non-Estate

Details

PrimaryFee_Chargi ng

Primary Secondary SpecialNon-fee

tfel. No.

of Work Required

Details of Work(Works to, non-school portionlro re underlined) ^

w

Reason for Request

Mote: If insufficient space above please use continuation sheet /sheets

Name of Supervisor

For appointment to

Signature

visit school please contact :

Date

Name

Tel No

SECTION B (To be completed by ASD/HD)

CONTRACT AREA/ESTATE

Contact Officer

Contact Tel. No.

Date of Estimate

Est, prepared by

Estimates / Remarks

Worktype

BuildingWork

BuildingServices

Total for this page

Total Remarks (if any)

Grand total all pages

SECTION C (To be completed bv ED)

Approved Subsidy $ Date

Signature Name

(for Director of Education)

Work type : IM = Improvement RA = Repairs which are essential RB = Repairs which are desirable but not EssentialRC = Repairs which are not necessary (Note: Estimates are not required for works classified as RC)

AIDED PRIMARY/SECONDARY SCHOOLS - MAJOR REPAIRS/ALTERATION - ESTIMATES 1993/94 [CONTINUATION SHEET] PAGE OF

SECTION A (To be completed in triplicate by school)

Details of Work Required

ItemNo.

Location

Name of School

Details of Work(Eorks to non-school portionto bp nnf f T"! i n<=*rl )

Reason for Request

SECTION B (To be completed by ARD/HD)

Estimates / Remarks

WorkType

BuildingWork

BuildingServices

Total for this paqe

Total Remarks (if any)Ii;i(n

*

fr53

s7*to

CO

I.o*s

Work Type : IM = Improvements RA = Repairs which are essential RB = Repairs which are desirable but not essentialRC = Repairs which are not necessary (Note : Estimates are not required for works classified as RC)


Appendix

Guidelines for the completion ofapplication forms for estimates 1993/94

(a) The proposed items of work should be numbered.

(b) The description of the proposed repairs and the reasons why therepairs are needed must be clearly written in detail on theapplication forms to ensure legibility. Sketches as appropriateshould be provided for the proposed works.

(c) If any of the works applied for have been included in a previoussubmission, please indicate the year and whether or not the workhas already been approved.

(d) Any works related to non-school portion should be clearly indicatedin the application forms. (Works of non-school portions of theschool do not rank for government subsidy and schools should notethat both the Architectural Services Department and the HousingDepartment will charge a 20% on-cost for such works done.)

(e) The application form should be completed in either English orChinese. If completed in Chinese, the name of the school in Englishmust be shown on the form.

(f) Only one top sheet should be used and if more space is requiredthen continuation sheets should be used. All sheets should benumbered.

(g) The name and telephone number of the school staff member whoprepares the estimates should be provided on the forms so that thisperson can be contacted by the personnel of the ArchitecturalServices Department of the Housing Department, as appropriate, foran appointment before visiting the school.

Section 7 Annex (5)

Ref. : ED(SCH) E/14/88 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTED(GR) 6016/67 HONG KONG

14 June 1989


Internal Maintenance of all aided schoolsin estates vested in the Housing Department

The purpose of this circular is to announce that with effect from 15 June 1989, the HousingDepartment will take over the responsibility for the internal maintenance of all estate schools, inaddition to its current responsibility for external repairs.

School supervisors and heads of all aided schools in estates vested in the Housing Departmentare to note the following revised procedures for necessary action:

(A) For major internal repairs/redecoration and emergency repairs

(i) Schools will have to respond to the annual call circular for inclusion of anymajor repairs works in the Education Department's Draft Estimates for theforthcoming financial year. Requests for emergency internal repairs ofschool buildings of urgent and essential nature can be made to the EducationDepartment as in existing practice by the school supervisors.

(ii) In making their application of works, schools will have to specify the scopeof works to be done without giving the estimated costs.

(iii) The Education Department will carry out a preliminary vetting of allapplications from schools. Professional officers of Housing Department willthen decide if the school's applications are technically justifiable and advisethe Education Department of the estimated costs accordingly.

(iv) Subject to the availability of funds, the Education Department will informschools of the approved projects in due course. Professional officers ofHousing Department will approach individual school to arrange for the worksprogram.

(v) All repairs works will be carried out by government term contractorssupervised by the Housing Department.

(vi) The Housing Department will not be responsible for any works on non-schoolportion of an estate school which is readily identifiable from the schoolportion, nor will it be responsible for any "private funding" projects.

(vii) Professional staff of Housing Department will prepare to act as consultant toeach aided school as to whether major repairs works will be required.Schools may contact their respective Housing Managers for assistance.


(viii) All school management committees, as building tenants, should beresponsible for the safety and soundness of their buildings. The HousingDepartment acting in their roles as works agents would be responsible onlyfor the sufficiency of the actual repair work projects undertaken by them.However, it would be prepared to provide consultant advisory services, onrequest, to any tenants who might require advice on the condition of theirbuildings, or part thereof, which may be giving rise for concern.

(ix) The existing arrangements for Housing Department to maintain the externalparts of all school buildings within the estates will remain unchanged.

(B) For minor internal works/repairs

(i) Schools may carry out the minor building works with their contractors as inexisting practice or refer the cases to Housing Department via respectiveHousing Managers for immediate action.

(ii) For any minor repairs of building services installation (other than thosesimple and unskilled works such as timer resetting, fluorescent lampreplacement, etc.) electrical, fire services, pumping, communal aerialbroadcast distribution system, etc., the school should refer all cases toHousing Department via respective Housing Managers for action in order toestablish a single source of responsibility.

(iii) The Housing Department will inform the school concerned of a roughindication of cost for these minor works prior to issue of works order. Thefinal cost of works will be subject to re-measurement after completion ofworks.

(iv) The cost of these minor repairs i.e. below $2000 in the case of aided primaryschools, below $8000 in the case of aided secondary schools and below$2000 in the case of aided special schools will be charged to individualschool and class grant account.

The revised procedures will not affect those approved projects which are currently plannedor carried out by private architects in all estate schools.

Y.P. CHANfor Director of Education

To : Supervisors/Heads of all aided primary and secondary schools (including special schools)- for necessary action/information


Section 7 Annex (6)

Ref.: ED(SCH) A/21/89 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

28 March 1990


Maintenance of Non-Estate Aided Schools

The purpose of this circular is to announce that with effect from 1 April 1990, theArchitectural Services Department will provide maintenance services to non-estate aidedschools.

2. Supervisors and heads of non-estate aided schools are requested to note the followingrevised procedures for necessary action:

(a) Non-estate aided schools will continue to respond to the annual call circularissued by the Education Department inviting applications for major repairworks for inclusion in the Draft Estimates for the forthcoming financial year.As in existing practice, school supervisors can apply to the EducationDepartment for emergency repairs if the works are of an urgent and essentialnature.

(b) Schools should specify the scope of works to be done. There is no need forschools to estimate costs. Professional officers of the Architectural ServicesDepartment will decide if the schools' applications are technically justified andadvise the Education Department on the estimated costs.

(c) The Education Department will inform schools of the approved projects,subject to the availability of funds. The professional officers of theArchitectural Services Department will then approach individual school toarrange the works programme.

(d) Repair works will normally be carried out by government term contractorssupervised by the Architectural Services Department.

(e) The Architectural Services Department will take up repair works in a non-school portion if it is inseparable from the school portion at which repairworks are to be carried out. However, a 20% overhead cost for any worksundertaken on non-school portion will be charged. Architectural ServicesDepartment may not take up any works in a non-school portion which isseparately identifiable from the school portion.


(f) The existing arrangements for schools to carry out minor repairs and to chargethe costs to the School and Class Grant shall continue. It is not intended thatthe Architectural Services Department should be involved in minor repairs.

(g) All school management committees, as building tenants, remain legallyresponsible for the safety and soundness of their buildings. The ArchitecturalServices Department will be responsible only for the sufficiency of the actualrepair work projects undertaken by it. However, it will act as consultant andis prepared to provide advisory services, on request, to any owner who mayrequire advice on the condition of their buildings, or part thereof, which maybe giving rise for concern. Therefore, schools are free to contact therespective professional officers of the Architectural Services Department foradvice and assistance, as they would formerly have contacted their ownconsultants.

3. The revised procedures will not affect those approved projects which are currentlyplanned or carried out by private architects in all non-estate schools.

4. A guide to the services to be provided by the Architectural Services Department isattached for school's reference.see note®

5. The Chinese version of this circular will follow.


To: Supervisors/Heads of all aided primary and secondary schools(including special schools)- for necessary action/information


Note: This guide has been incorporated as Attachment of Appendix 13 of the Co4pof Aid for Secondary Schools.

Section 8Personnel

Annex Topic

(1) ASGC No. 27/91 dated 22 May 1991Letters of Appointment (for Teachers in Aided Schools)

(2) Samples of Job Description

(3) Specimen Leave Record Card

(4) Specimen Application Form for Permission to Leave Hong Kong

(5) Training Requirements for Promotion in Aided Secondary Schools

(6) General Guidelines for Appointment of Daily-rated SupplyTeachers

(7) GAC No. 6/92 dated 8 April 1992The Prevention of Bribery Ordinance

(8) ASGC No. 2/90 dated 17 January 1990Corruption Prevention in Aided Schools

Section 8 Annex (1)

Ref. : ED (GR) 6013/68 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

22 May 1991

AIDED SCHOOLS GENERAL CIRCULAR NO.27/91

Letters of Appointment (for Teachers in Aided Schools)

Regulation 77 of the Education Regulations requires the Supervisorof a school to issue to all teachers letters of appointment setting out -

(a) conditions of service ;

(b) salary scale; and

(c) conditions of termination of appointment.

2. The actual terms upon which a school engages its teachersconstitute matter of private contract and it is not possible for the Director ofEducation to draw up a standard letter of appointment which will suit therequirements of every school.

3. However, it is possible for the Director to offer guidance in thisrespect, and the attached specimen letter and its attached draft conditions ofservice have been prepared for this purpose.

4. Supervisors are requested to use the specimen letter and draftconditions of service when preparing letters offering appointments to teachers,modifying if necessary the letter and/or the conditions of service to suit thecircumstances governing each appointment. However, if and when anymodification is made, attention should be paid to Section 70 of the EmploymentOrdinance, Chapter 57, which stipulates that -

"Any term of a contract of employment which purports to extinguishor reduce any right, benefit or protection conferred upon theemployee by this Ordinance shall be void."

5. A draft letter of acceptance is also attached which it is hoped willbe helpful.

6 Before employing a new teacher, Supervisors are advised to checkwhether the teacher has fully complied with all the terms of the contract he hassigned with his previous employers. This is to avoid any inconvenience thatmight be caused to the parties concerned.

7 Supervisors of schools are also requested to note that by virtue ofSection 11 of the Employment Ordinance, an employer may without^ notice orpayment in lieu suspend from employment any employee for a period of notexceeding 14 days -

(a) as a disciplinary measure for any reason for which the employer isentitled to summarily dismiss the employee under Section 9 (wilfuldisobedience, habitual negligence, serious misconduct, fraud ordishonesty);


(b) pending the employer's decision whether to exercise his right tosummarily, dismiss the employee under Section 9; or

(c) pending the outcome of any criminal proceedings against theemployee arising out of or connected with his employment.

In case of (c), where the criminal proceedings are not concluded within 14 days,the period of suspension may be extended till the end of such proceedings. Asfar as payment of salaries is concerned the management committee may decideas to whether or not to suspend the teacher on half pay during the abovementioned period, if it is felt desirable. However, it should be noted that priorapproval for such payment of salaries would need to be obtained from theDirector of Education.

8. If a teacher is suspended for more than 2 days, a supply teachermay be employed on daily basis.

9. Since in a school the responsibility of suspending an employee fromemployment rests on the management committee, supervisors of schools areadvised to consider, in the interest of the school, including the procedure forsuspension in an employment contract although there is no absolute need to doso.

10. This circular is to supersede the Aided Schools General Circular No.20/90 which is hereby cancelled.


To Supervisors of all aided schools (including special schools)- for necessary action

Heads of Section/Government Schools/Colleges/Institute- for information *


SPECIMEN

LETTER OFFERING APPOINTMENT - TEACHERS IN AIDED SCHOOLS

(Two copies of this letter should be signed by the Supervisor)

Name of School : Tel. No :

Address of School ;

Supervisor : __(Full Name in English) (in Chinese)

Managers :

Principal/Head Teacher ;

Dear Sir/Madam,

The Management Committee of theSchool hereby offers you an appointment as a teacher in the school. Themonthly salary scale in respect of this appointment is shown in the conditionsof service attached hereto. You will be required to enter the salary scale at$ a month. If you wish to accept this offer of appointment in theabove school under the conditions set out in the attached Conditions of Servicefor Teachers in Aided Schools, please sign both copies of the letter ofacceptance and both copies of the Conditions of Service and return one copy ofeach document to me direct or through the Principal/Head Teacher. The secondcopies are for your retention. If no reply is received on or before

the offer shall be considered withdrawn. You are advised togive due and proper notice of your intention to leave your present employment.If you accept this offer, you are required to report for duty atA.M./P.M on __ •

Yours faithfully,

( )Supervisor

Mr/Miss/Mrs(Name of Teacher offered appointment)

Address : ___—-— — Date:


CONDITIONS OF SERVICE - TEACHERS IN AIDED SCHOOLS

Probationary PeriodSalary Scale

Payment of Salary

Two years with effect from

Incremental Date

Provident Fund

Sick Leave

Maternity Leave

A teacher shall receive each month the salarydue to him without any deduction save, whereappropriate, his own contribution to theProvident Fund. Salary shall be credited to hisbank account or paid in the form of a chequedrawn against the official school account andissued on or before the last day of the monthin which the salary has been earned. Salaryshall continue to be paid during school holidays,subject to the conditions specified below forpayment of salary on termination of service.

A teacher's incremental date shall be the firstday of the first month of commencement ofservice if appointed on or before 15th, or 1st ofthe following month if appointed after 15th.However, the teacher's increment may bewithheld subject to the prior approval of theDirector of Education if his performance ofduties is found to be unsatisfactory.

Subject to provisions of the Grant/SubsidizedSchools Provident Fund Rules, 5% of the basicsalary, including any allowances approved forthat purpose by the Director of Education, shallbe contributed monthly by the teacher, whereappropriate, to one or the other of these fundsand an appropriate amount of donation to thatcontribution shall be made by government to theteacher's Provident Fund account.

Subject to the submission of an acceptablemedical certificate, a teacher may be given onappointment up to 28 days sick leave, and oncompletion of each succeeding year of service afurther 48 days. The maximum balance whichmay be accumulated shall be 168 days. Grantof paid sick leave and special tuberculosis leaveshall be in accordance with the rules governingsuch leave in the relevant Code of Aid.

Subject to the submission of an acceptablemedical certificate, maternity leave with fullpay or no pay may be granted in accordancewith the rules governing such leave in therelevant Code of Aid.


Termination ofAppointment andPeriod of Notice

Conditions forPayment of Salary onCommencement orTermination ofAppointment

: (a) By Teacher If a teacher wishes toterminate his appointment, one month'snotice shall be given to the schoolmanagers during the probationary periodand three months' notice otherwise.

(b) By School Management CommitteeWhere a school management committeeconsiders that the service of a teacher isunsatisfactory, even after due warnings,both oral and written, have been given,one month's notice shall be given to theteacher to terminate his service duringthe probationary period. Subsequently,three months' notice shall be given bythe employer after the completion of theprobationary period. Where it isconsidered necessary to terminate ateacher's appointment for causes otherthan unsatisfactory service the foregoingperiod of notice should apply. In thecase of teachers with more than fiveyears' service every effort should bemade to give a longer period of notice.

Salary shall be paid from the date of assumptionof full duties and shall cease immediately afterthe last day of performance of full duties exceptas provided below.

A teacher with service of one academic year ormore without break whose appointmentterminates, with due notice given, no earlierthan the beginning of

(i) the major school holidays (i.e. Christmas,Chinese New Year and Easter Holidays) will bepaid to the end of the school holidays;

(ii) the summer vacation will be paid to the end ofAugust.

A teacher with service of less than one academic yearbut more than 59 days whose appointment terminates,with due notice given, no earlier than the beginningof

(i) the major school holidays will be paid to theend of the school holidays;

(ii) the summer vacation will be paid to the end ofJuly.

A teacher with service of 59 days or less shall bepaid up to and including the last day of duty.


Promotion Prospects Serving teachers who have satisfied therequirements laid down by the Director ofEducation may be promoted to a higher rank.

Paid Outside Work

Limit of Duties

Absence form Duties

Other Conditions :

(Other conditions may beadded here provided thatthey are in conformitywith the provisions ofthe Education Ordinance,the Employment Ordinanceand their subsidiarylegislations, the relevantCode of Aid, and theinstructions as theDirector of Education mayfrom time to time issue)

No full-time teacher shall undertake paidoutside work except with the prior approval ofthe Supervisor. Approval may be withdrawn atany time if the work is found to be interferingwith the teacher's duties and, in any case, shallbe subject to half-yearly review.

Apart from his normal teaching duties, theteacher may be required to assist with normalextra-curricular and other school activities, atthe discretion of the Principal/Head Teacher; buthe shall not be required to perform any otherduties not directly connected with the school towhich he is appointed.

If a teacher is absent from his duties forreasons of ill health, he shall reportimmediately to the Principal/Head Teacher andshall, if the period of absence exceeds two days,forward to him an acceptable medical certificate.Absence for any other reason should beapproved by the Principal/Head Teacher.

*s* * * *ss* t * * * t * * * * * * * * * t * * * * * *

To be completed by the Teacher :

I confirm that I have read and understood all the above conditionsand hereby agree to abide by them.

Signature of Teacher -

Name in Block Letters

Date ;

Section 8 Annex (2)

Job Description

1. Rank; Graduate Master/Mistress

2. Duties and responsibilities of the job;

(a) Tb engage in class teachir g ip to S7 in an aided secondaryschool.

(b) To be a Class Jfester/Mistress if required.

(c) To share the responsibilities in organising and conductingone or more groups of extra-<ajrricular activities as follows;

(i) academic clubs(ii) interests groups(iii) sports clubs(iv) religious groups(v) uniformed groups(vi) community services groups(vii) Houses

(d) To assess and to record the attainment of students taught.

(e) To serve as a member (and secretary) of a subject disciplinepanel and to assist in the performance of specialresponsibilities and administrative work and non-teachingduties of the school such as school curriculum devecpaent,civic/moral/sex education, school discipline, studentguidance and counselling, student welfare, school/publicexaminations, * student admission/prcootion/registration/streamng, publication matters, first aid,audio-visual aids, staff welfare, fee collection, etc.

(f) To co-operate with colleagues in order to maintain a goodteaching standard and progress among students andadministrative efficiency within the school.

(g) To contact parents about the conduct and progress of theirchildren.

(h) To participate in departmental committees, seminars andcourses in order to contribute to and/or update one'sprofessional views and standards.

(i) To perform any other duties as may be required.

Section 8 An**ex (2> P-2

Job Description

1. Rank; Certificated Master/Mistress

2. The duties and responsibilities of the nob:

(a) To engage in class teaching in an aided secondary school.

(b) To be a Class Master/Mistress if required.

(c) To share the responsibilities in organizing and conducting one ormore groups of extxa-currioolar activities as follows:-

(i) academic clubs(ii) interests groups(iii) sports clubs(iv) religious groups(v) uniformed groups(vi) Houses

(d) To assess and to record the attainment of students taught.

(e) To assist in the performance of special responsibilities and inother administrative work and non-teaching duties of the schoolsuch as school curriculum developn*ent, civic/moral/sex education,school discipline, student guidance and counselling, studentwelfare, school/public examinations, studentadmission/promotion/registration/ streaming, publication natters,first aid, audio-visual aids, staff welfare, fee collection, etc.

(f) To co-operate with other teachers and staff and school socialworker as may be required in order to maintain a good teachingstandard and progress among students.

(g) To contact parents about the conduct and progress of theirchildren.

(h) To participate in departmental cxranittees, seminars and courses inorder to contribute to and/or update one's professional views andstandards.

(i) To perform any other duties as required.


Job Description

1. Rank: Principal Assistant Master/Mistress

2. The aim of the lob

To co-ordinate pastoral care and extra- mricular activitiesand to attend to the special needs of pupils in junior formsof a secondary schools of 24 or more classes.

3. The duties and responsibilities of the lob:

(a) To engage in class teaching of academic subjects up to S5and/or of practic l/oiltural subjects up to 37 and toassess and to record the attainment of pupils taught.

(b) To be a Class Master/Mistress if required.

(c) To closely co-ordinate the extxa~<3jrricular activities injunior forms with the overall co-ordinator of theseactivities in school as follows:

(i) academic clubs(ii) interests groups(iii) sports clubs(iv) religious groups(v) uniformed groups(vi) Houses

(d) To closely cx>-ordinate the work of pastoral care injunior forms of the school with the Student Counsellingand Guidance Team, the Discipline Master and the CareersMaster.

(e) To attend to the special needs of pupils in junior fonts,including referrals of pupils with such needs to theSpecial Education Section of the Education Department andother government departments as appropriate.

(f) To participate in departmental cxsnmittees, seminars andcourses in order to contribute to and/or update one'sprofessional views and standards.

(g) To perform other duties as may be required.

4. Supervision received

Supervised by the Assistant Principals and Principal.


5* Co-operation and contacts

(a) To co-cperate with other teachers and staff and schoolsocial worker as may be required in order to maintain agood teaching standard and progress among students.

(b) To contact parents about the conduct and progress oftheir children.

8 6. Working conditions

Staff rocm, laboratory/workshcp/special roan, classroom.

Section 8 Annex (3)School

Leave Record of Staff

Name: Sex:

Marital Status: Date of Appointment:^

Leave Taken:

YearNature of Leave

ML SL NP

Period of Leave

From To DaysS. L.

BalanceReference

Section 8 Annex (4)School

Application for Permission to Leave Hong Kong

Part I (To be completed in duplicate by the applicant at least THREEweeks before departure)

Permission is hereby sought to make the following* visit:

(a) Name of Applicant :

(b) Rank/Post :

(c) Country/Countries to be visited :

(d) Purpose of visit : •

(e) Date and time of departure :

(f) Date of return to Hong Kong :

(g) Address(es) during visit :

(h) Visit organised by :

Signature of Applicant

Date :

Part II

To : Supervisor

Recommendation by Principal

I confirm that the above staff's services are not required during his/herproposed period of absence.

Application is recommended/not recommended.*

Signature

Name in Block Letters

Date :

•Delete as appropriate


Part III

To : Applicant

*(A) Permission to leave Hong Kong is approved.

2. You are reminded of the following -

(a) You are expected to return to Hong Kong: in time and toresume duty upon expiry of your approved leave/holidays;

(b) You must not accept free or subsidized travel oraccommodation or any other benefits which may not beaccepted as ruled by the School Management Committeewithout prior approval.

3. Failure to observe the above may lead to disciplinaryproceedings and/or result in forfeiture of pay,

*(B) Permission to leave Hong Kong is not approved.

Signature of Supervisor

Date : __

c.c. Principal

1 Delete as appropriate

Section 8 Annex (5)

TRAINING RB2UIRmENTS FOR ERCH7TIONIN AIDED SK3ONDARY SCHOOLS

CertificatedMaster/Mistress(CM) toAssistantMaster/ Mistress(AM)-

CourseCode No.

(1) (a)

(1) (b)

(2)

Requirement

Refresher Training Course run by theColleges of Education undertaken withinthe previous 10 yearsorRefresher Training Course run by the TT.T?undertaken within the previous 10 years

or

Other acceptable training such as theACIE or a relevant degree, undertaken/obtained within the previous 10 years

AssistantMaster /Mistress(AM) to SeniorAssistantMaster/Mistress(SAM)

(3) (a)

(3) (b)

(4)

AND (5)

(6)

Refresher Training Course run by theColleges of Education undertaken withinthe previous 10 yearsorRefresher Training Course run by the TTJRundertaken within the previous 10 years

or

Other acceptable training undertakenwithin the previous 10 years

School Administration Course for AMs runby the Training Unit

or


Senior AssistantMaster/Mistress( S A M ) toPrincipalAssistantMaster/Mistress(PAM)

(7) (a)

(7) (b)

(8)

AND (9)

Refresher Training Course run by theColleges of Biucation undertaken withinthe previous 10 yearsorRefresher Training Course run by the TLEundertaken within the previous 10 years

or


fCourse in pastoral care, guidance/counselling and extra-curricularactivities to be run by the tertiaryinstitutions


GraduateMaster/Mistress(GM) to SeniorGraduateMaster/Mistress(SGM)

(10) (a) Refresher Training Course run by theColleges of Education/ tertiaryinstitutions undertaken within theprevious 10 yearsor

(10) (b) Refresher Training Course run by the ILEundertaken within the previous 10 years

or

(11) Other acceptable training such as anadvanced diploma or a relevant higherdegree, obtained within the previous 10years

Senior GraduateMaster /Mistress(SGM) toPrincipalGraduate Master/Mistress (PGM)

(12) (a)

(12) (b)

(13)

AND (14)

Refresher Training Course run by theColleges of Education/ tertiaryinstitutions undertaken within theprevious 10 yearsorRefresher Training Course run by theundertaken within the previous 10 years

or

Other acceptable training such as anadvanced diploma or a relevant higherdegree, obtained within the previous 10years

Secondary School Administration Coursefor Senior Teachers run by the TrainingUhit

or

(15)

(16)

Course in school administration,curriculum development, remedialt e a c h i n g , pas tora l care andextra-curricular activities to be run bythe tertiary institutions

.or

Other acceptable training such ascertificate/diploma courses inschool/public administration ormanagement studies run by the tertiaryinstitutions, or a higher degree withmanagement as an elective, undertaken/obtained within the previous 10 years


Senior Graduate (17) Secondary School Adnilnistration CourseMaster/Mistress run by the Training Unit(SQ1) toPrincipal orGraduateMaster/Mistress (18) Other acceptable training such as(PGM) (as head certificate/ diploma courses in school/of a school) public administration or management.AND studies run by the tertiary institutions,Principal or a higher degree with management as anGraduate Master/ elective, undertaken/ obtained within theMistress (PGM) previous 10 yearsto Principal I/Principal II

Note 1 The r e q u i r e m e n t for re f resher training at the C o l l e g e s of Education/te r t ia ry Institutions or the ILE w i l l be w a i v e d for teachers who havecompleted a Co l lege of Education T e a c h e r ' s C e r t i f i c a t e or a universi tyP o s t - g r a d u a t e C e r t i f i c a t e In E d u c a t i o n course w i t h i n the previous 5years.

Note 2 For s p e c i a l e d u c a t i o n teachers in secondary schools , the requirementsare the same as those for ordinary teachers except that the refreshertraining course may be replaced by -

(a) an aggrega te of 50 hours of attendance at short courses run bythe S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n S e c t i o n , the Advisory Inspectorate or theD e p a r t m e n t s o f E x t r a - M u r a l S t u d i e s o f l o c a l t e r t i a r yi n s t i t u t i o n s , o r r e l e v a n t I N S T E P c o u r s e s under taken w i t h i n t h eprevious three years (up to the end of school year 1991-92); or

(b) a new r e t r a i n i n g programme for specia l education teachers to beintroduced in the school year 1992-93. If the programme cannotbe o f f e r e d as scheduled, condit ion (a) above w i l l be extended tothe end of school year 1992-93. An announcement to th is effectwill be made not later than 30 June 1992.

Mote 3 For t e c h n i c a l t e a c h e r s in s e c o n d a r y t e c h n i c a l and pr e - v o c a t i ona Is c h o o l s , the " R e f r e s h e r T r a i n i n g Course for Serv ing Secondary SchoolT e c h n i c a l T e a c h e r s " , w h i c h is d e s i g n e d f o r t e a c h e r s o f specia l izeds u b j e c t s in t h e s e s c h o o l s , is a c c e p t e d as a r e p l a c e m e n t for theRefresher Training Course run by the Colleges of Education.

EWP:S-45F/asgc(3)]


Brief Descriptions of Training Courses

Refresher Training Course for Non-graduate Teachers (run by Colleges ofEducation)(Course Code No. (1) (a), (3) (a), and (7) (a) for purpose of completing theProforma for nomination for promotion)

1* Duration - 19 alternate Saturday mornings and 1 weekday afternoon of3 hours each per week for a duration of 37 weeks.

2. Content

A. Core Areas (corrpilsory)

a. Educational Ideology and School Practices in Educationb. Educational Technologyc. 2 optional subjects e.g. Mixed Ability Teaching, Education for

Democracy, Juvenile Delinquency, Computer in Teaching, etc.

B. One Elective

(Both the duration and content of the course are subject to details to beprovided in the relevant circular to be issued in due course.)

Refresher Training Course for Graduate Teachers(Course Code No. (10) (a) and (12) (a) for purpose of completing the Prof orma forixmrination for promotion.)

(Details of the course will be provided in the relevant circular to be issuedin due course.)

Refresher Training Course (run by the HE)(Course Code No. (1) (b), (3) (b), (7) (b), (10) (b) and (12) (b) for purpose ofccnpleting the Prof orma for nomination for pronotion.)

1. Duration - 16 weeks

2. Content

(A) Chinese Language Coursea. Innovation and Conceptsb. Methodologyc. Linguistic and Language Proficiencyd; l^iton^iuae. Language information

(B) English Lanoauge Coursea. Introductory Moduleb. Study Skills Modulec. Language Inprovement Moduled. Computer-assisted Learning Modulee. Language Teaching Module

(Both the duration and content of the courses are subject to details tobe provided in the relevant circular to be issued in due course.)

/ *


School Adiiinistration Course for ANs (run by the Training Unit}(Course Cede No. (5} for purpose of completing the Proforma for nomination forpromotion. )1. Duration - 3 days2. Content

A. Management Concepts e.g. Management FunctionsB. Management Skills e.g. Biter-personal Q mmunicationC. Professional Knowledge e.g. How to Deal with Problem Pupils(Both the duration and content of the course are subject to the detailsto be provided in the relevant circular to be issued in due course.)

Qpurse in Pastoml Care, Guid^CH/^un^llina and Extra-<ainricular Activitiesfor Non-graduate Teachers (run by HKU/ GJHK)(Course Code No. (9) for purpose of corqpleting the Proforma for nomination forpromotion. )1- Duration - 10 meetings; each of 3 hours2. Content

A. Pastoral Care, Guidance and CounsellingB. Extra-curricular ActivitiesC. Curriculum DevelopmentD. School AdmijiistrationE. Staff Development(For details, please refer to Aided Schools General Circular No. 9/92dated 12.2.92 and the relevant circular on the course to be issued in duecourse.)

Course in School Acfaimstratipn, Curriqalum Development. _ Remedial Teaching,Pastoral Care am Extxa-curricular Activities for Graduate Teachers(run by HKU/ CUHK)(Course Code No. (15) for purpose of completing the Proforma for nomination forpromotion. )

1- Duration - 10 meetings, each of 3 hours2. Content

A. School Administration and Management TechniquesB. Curriculum Planning and DevelopmentC. Pastoral Care, Guidance and CounsellingD. Extra-currioUar Activities(For details , please refer to Aided Schools General Circular No. 9/92dated 12.2.92 and the relevant circular on the course to be issued in duecourse.)

Secondary School Admfoistration Course (run by the Training Unit)(Course Code No. (17) for purpose of corpletlng the Proforma for nomination forpromotion. )-1. .Duration - 9 days2. Content

*A. Management Concepts e.g. Management FunctionsB. Management Skills e.g. Setting Objectives for a SchoolC. Professional Knowledge e.g. Case Studies on Problem PupilsD. Procedural Knowledge e.g. Code of Aid for Secondary SchoolsE. Finance e.g. School Finance & AccountsF. Law e.g. Education Ordinance & Regulations

(Both the duration and content of the course are subject to the detailsto be provided in the relevant circular to be issued in due course* )

[WP:S~45F/asgc(3)]

Section 8 Annex (6)General Guidelines for

Appointment of daily-rated supply teachersDevolution of Responsibilities to SMI Schools

Provision in the Code of Aid

1. The provision of the employment of supply teachers on a dailybasis to substitute for teaching staff (including Lab. Tech. in aidedsecondary schools) absent on approved leave for more than two days isgiven in para. 29 of the Code of Aid.

2. The approved pay due to supply teachers is charged to theSalaries Grant.

Change of Procedure

3. The Principal employs on behalf of the SMC a daily-rated supplyteacher to substitute for a teacher (including Lab. Tech.) on approvedleave for more than two days and advises the DEO (instead of seeking theappproval of the Director) of the employment. The Principal also advisesthe DEO (based on the guidelines given below on how to rate the daily payof the supply teacher) of the daily rate of pay supported by copies ofqualification documents when the application for grant of leave to theteacher to be covered is sent to the DEO (sample of the appointment formfor daily-rated supply teachers in aided secondary schools attached).

4. As before, upon resumption of the duty of the teacher takingleave, the school submits the certified signed receipt (sample attached)of the supply teacher to the DEO for payment of grant.

General Guidelines for Employment

5* A supply teacher may by employed to substitute for a teacher (orLab. Tech.)"on approved leave for more than two days.

6. Such a supply teacher should be of the same grade asf or of alower grade than, the teacher for whom he is substituting; except that aCM (non-graduate) may be engaged to replace an untpialified teacher.(Hence a graduate supply teacher substituting for a non-graduate teacheron leave should only be paid at the daily rate of the non-graduate.)

7. A supply teacher's service on a daily basis is purely for reliefduties and cannot, in any way, be regarded as service for any purposeincluding incremental credits.

8. At the time of proposed employment, the Principal should advisethe supply teacher that

(i) he/she is liable to disciplinary sanctions if he/sheneglects or wilfully refuses to perform his/her duties or inany manner misconducts himself/herself;

(ii) the employment may be terminated at any time on either partyby one day's notice;

(iii)he/she is informed of the period of employment, which may beextended as may be agreed between the supply teacher and theschool; and

(iv) he/she is paid at a daily rate as provided by the EDaccording to the number of days actually worked and paid in.arrears.

Section 8 - 2 - Annex (6) p.2

9. A supply teacher beyond the age of 65 may be employed providedthat the Principal is satisfied that he/she is physically fit to teach(please refer to Aided Schools General Circular No. 19/90 dated 11 April1990).

10. As before, the Principal vets a supply teacher's qualificationdocuments (such as academic diplomas, certificates and/or transcripts) andsubmits copies of such documents (duly certified against the originals forauthenticity purpose) to the DEO together with the supply teacher'sappointment form. The Principal should also check the supply teacher's IDcard or other form of identity against such information as stated on theappointment form.

General Guidelines on how Supply Teachers are rated

11. The daily rates of pay for supply teachers are announced in AidedSchools General Circulars issued for such purposes. Schools should makeprompt payments to their supply teachers and then claim reimbursement fromthe ED. A supply teacher on a daily basis will be paid according to thenumber of days actually worked (he/she may enjoy rest days and schoolholidays but these will not be paid).

12. The daily rates of pay for supply teachers for secondary schoolsas at 1 September 1991 are as follows:-

Supply teachers for secondaryschools Daily rate$

(i) Graduate 641(ii) Mon-graudate 528(iii) Unqualified 248

(Note: Schools should update the daily rates of pay when any revision isannounced in the relevant Aided Schools General Circular issued by theED.)

13. (i) A graduate supply teacher should have the samequalifications as required for appointment to the post of GMin an aided secondary school (please see Guides toAppointment for GM in Appendix 15/Attachment C of the Codeof Aid)r i.e. a degree from a Hong Kong or Britishuniversity, or equivalent. (The Principal should seekassistance of the DEO for assessment of overseasqualifications.)

(ii) A non-graduate supply teacher should have the samequalifications as required for appointment to the post of CMin an aided secondary school (please see Guides toAppointment for CM in Appendix 15/Attachment [ of the Codeof Aid and Appendix 1 to Aided Schools General Circular Mo.14/91 dated 20 March 1991 on Implementation of theRecommendations of the Working Group on the Appointment ofTeachers holding Non-standard Qualifications in AidedSchools). For quick reference, holders of the followingstandard/non- standard qualifications can be paid at thenon-graduate rate of pay as supply teachers in aidedsecondary schools:

Section 8 _ 3 _ Annex (6) p.3

(a) Teacher's Certificate from a College of Education inHong Kong, or equivalent;

(b) Certificate of In-service Course of Training forTeachers (Secondary/Primary/Technical) from a College ofEducation in Hong Kong;

(c) Post-graduate Certificate in Education (PGCE) from alocal university, or equivalent;

(d) Diploma from Approved Post-Secondary College, orequivalent;

(e) Degree from the three Taiwan universities historicallyaccepted by the ED for appointment to aided schools?

(f) Higher Diploma/Higher Certificate* or equivalent plus 1year's relevant post-qualification working experience;

(g) Diploma/Certificate* or equivalent plus 2 years1

relevant post-qualification working experience;(h) Diploma from Academy for Performing Arts (in Music) with

HKCEE (to teach music).

(The Principal should seek assistance of the DEO for assessmentof overseas qualifications.)

(iii)An unqualified supply teacher is one who is eligible forappointment as an unqualified teacher in an aided secondaryschool. He/She may be -

(a) a registered teacher, whose status is acquired after atleast 10 years of approved teaching as a permittedteacher (R-rlO); or

(b) a holder of HKCE with an aggregate of 5 separatesubjects at Gade E or above, including English Language(Grade E or above of Syll B or Grade C or above of SyllA if he/she is to teach English), or Chinese Language;or

(c) a holder of Hong Kong English School Certificater HongKong Chinese School Certificate, or Hong Kong SchoolCertificate, or equivalent; or

(d) a permitted teacher with a general teaching permitissued by the ED with subjects to teach, at theappropriate levels.

14. In case of doubt concerning the daily rate of pay for a supplyteacher, the Principal should seek advice of the DEO.

(* Obtained from Hong Kong Polytechnic, Hong Kong City Polytechnic, HongKong Technical College, or a Hong Kong Technical Institute)

Education Department (Ref. ED(SCH)D/10/89)May 1992


Appointment Form for Daily-rated Supply Teachers in Aided Secondary Schools

?art A (To be completed by the supply teacher) ~~ ~

.. Name 2. Sex(in English) (in Chinese)

Date of BirthMas shown on ID Card/Passport No.

[. Address (Tel

>. Qualification

(A) University

Name of University Degree Year Major/Minor

* (In case of an overseas degree, which has been assessed by the CivilService Branch as equivalent of a degree from a local university, acopy of the document should be attached.)

(B) Approved Post-secondary College/ H.K. Polytechnic etc

Name of Col. /Polytechnic Diploma Year Principal Sub j .

(C) Teacher Training

Name of Col. of Ed./Uni. Cert/Dip Year Electives

(D) Public Examinations Results

Sec.Sch, attended Cert. Year Subjects & Grades

(E) R-10/General Teaching Permit # (# Delete whichever is inapppropriate)

* No. Date issued

* Subjects & level (if stated)

6. Date of Employment

7. Subjects and classes to be taught

Signature Date(NOTE The Principal should certify having checked the original documents

by initialling the entries on lines marked*.)

Part B (To be completed by the Principal)

The above-named supply teacher, employed on day-to-day terms as fromto substitute for Mr/Mrs/Ms * *

(Rank: ), will be paid HK$ per working day, the dailyrate of pay for a graduate/non-graduate/unqualified supply teacher.

Date Signature

f/ajne SchoolPrincipal


SUPPLY TEACHER'S RECEIPT

Name:

Date : From To

No. of Working Days

Rate oer day :

Amount :

I confirm that I have received the above sum.

Signature Date

Week

M W Th Remarks

I certify thatt the amount payable to the above-named supply teacher is-correct.

Principal's signature:

Name of School :

Date :

* Please note the school/public holidays in the Remarks column and markthe day(s) on which the supply teacher has actually worked*


Name of School

Director of Education[Attn: DECK )]Education Department,Hong Kong.

With reference to your letter ofwith the application of *Mr./Miss/Mrs,•sick/maternity/no-pay leave ofto

in connectionfor

jiays as from

sinceteacher(s) as follows:

inclusive, I report that *he/she has resumed duty. I submit relevant particulars about the supply

Supply TeacherDate

from to

No. ofworkingdays

Rateperday

Amount

The above emoluments have been paid to the supply teacher(s) concerned,signed receipt(s) being attached for your records.

Yours faithfully,

Signature of Principal:

Date:

* Delete whichever is inapplicable

Section 8 Annex (7)

Ref.: ED(RB) 29/86/91 EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

8 April 1992

GENERAL ADMINISTRATION CIRCULAR NO, 6/92

The Prevention of Bribery Ordinance(A Chinese version will follow)

All teaching and non-teaching staff of schools registered under theEducation Ordinance are reminded that they are, like the employees of anyorganization in Hong Kong, subject to Section 9 of the Prevention of BriberyOrdinance.

2. The section under reference makes it an offence for an employee toaccept, without his employer's (i.e. the school management committee's)permission, an advantage as an inducement to or regard for doing or not doingan act in relation to the employer's business. It therefore means that inthe case of a school, no staff, teaching or non-teaching/ may accept anadvantage* vithout the permission of the school management committee. Anymember of staff, teaching or non-teaching, who wishes to accept an advantage,must consult the school Principal. The Principal may, if so authorized bythe school management committee, give permission or refer the matter to theschool management committee for a decision.

3* To assist school management committees and principals in dealingwith requests for acceptance of advantages and to help prevent corruptionthat may arise in connection with the selection of textbooks in schools, thefollowing guidelines have been prepared and are attached to this circular :-

(a) General Guidelines on the Acceptance of Advantages and RelatedMatters - Appendix A

(b) Guidelines on Textbook Selection Procedures and the Acceptanceof Publishers1 Donations by Schools - Appendix B

4. Any allegation or suspicion of corruption in a scliool should bereferred immediately to the Operations Department of ICAC (Telephone No.526 6366). Complaints about inefficiency or poor management however shouldbe referred to the Education Department, and not to the ICAC.

5. Schools are also reminded that an Education Department CorruptionPrevention Group has been established. The membership of this Group includesrepresentatives of the Corruption Prevention Department of ICAC, which hasalready carried out a number of study assignments within the Department. Theterms of reference of the Group enable it to discuss and identify possibleareas which call for review from the point of view of corruption prevention,and to discuss and advise generally on corruption-related problems.

For definition of 'advantage', please refer to the Attachment of Annex 1 ofAppendix A of this circular.

/ * * * 4


- 2 -

6. Supervisors and Principals of schools who wish to bring any matterto the attention of the Education Department Corruption Prevention Groupshould do so by letter to the Deputy Director of Education, who is Chairmanof the Group.

7. The contents of this circular should be brought to the attention ofall members of the management committee and all teaching and non-teachingstaff of the school.

8. This circular supersedes the General Administration Circular No.5/90 dated 14 February 1990.

LI WET TINGDirector of Education

To : Supervisors/Principals of all Schools (Aided, Private & ESF Schools)for necessary action

Heads of all Government Schools/Colleges/Sections - for information

[WP:A002]


Appendix A

General Guidelines on the Acceptance of Advantagesand Related Matters

Section 9 of the Prevention of Bribery Ordinance lays theresponsibility on the school management committee (SMC), as an employer,to decide that advantages may or may not be accepted by school staff. Incarrying out this responsibility, SMCs are reminded of the specialposition of schools in relation to their influence on young people and theneed for their staff individually and the schools as a whole, to be inevery way above suspicion of any trace of doubtful practice.

Advantages to Individual staff

2. Examples of advantages which SMCs might find difficult todisallow include :-

(a) small gifts by pupils or parents to teachers; it would bewise to set a maximum cash value on such gifts;

(b) gifts given at graduation ceremonies to individual teachers(if management policy permits); a maximum cash value may beset to these gifts also; and

(c) gratuities paid to minor staff for extra-curricular use ofschool premises or facilities.

3. There are certain advantages which SMCs should never accept orpermit* These are advantages connected with :-

(a) the appointment or promotion of school staff;

(b) the admission or promotion of pupils (other thanregistration fees approved by the Education Department);

(c) the conduct of any test or examination (except for paymentsby the Hong Kong Examinations Authority);

(d) nominations for courses of training or study-tripsinvolving either teachers or pupils;

(e) donations to an individual rather than to the school;

(f) commissions or gifts by a supplier or contractor to anindividual rather than to the school;

(g) payments for the use of school premises or facilities to anindividual rather than to the school;

(h) holidays for principals or other teaching staff, sponsoredby textbook publishers or booksellers.

Section 8 ***** (7) *A

Appendix A (Cont'd)

4. Additionally, schools subsidized under the Codes of Aid shouldnot permit their staff to accept the following advantages :-

(a) fees for private tuition of pupils of the same school; and

(b) payments by teachers on sick leave to other teachers toattend to their classes.

5. TO facilitate a simple and effective control over requests fromstaff for the acceptance of advantages, an SMC may delegate the giving ofpermission or refusal to the supervisor or principal. However, advantagesto the principal or to any member of the SMC should only be approved bythe SMC. It should be emphasized that the SMC will continue to beresponsible for the permission or refusal given under delegatedauthority. SMCs' delegation of authority should therefore be in writingand limited to specific types of advantage and it would be advisable toobtain regular reports on how that authority has been exercised. To helpthe supervisor or principal to discharge his delegated authority properlyand to provide a formal guideline for all the school staff, it would beuseful for the SMC to issue an internal circular setting out the school'spolicy on the types of .advantages and the circumstances under which staffmay or may not accept them. At Annex 1 to this Appendix is a sample of aninternal school circular which schools may consider using, subject tomodifications in the light of the circumstances of individual schools.

6. It should also be stressed that although advantages may beaccepted, they must not be solicited.

Donations to the School

1. On the question of donations to the school, the SMC shouldexercise great care that :-

(a) they are not in any sense a reward for a favour bestowed onan individual pupil such as admitting him to the school;and

(b) in the case of donations by school suppliers, they shouldimply no standing commitment to continue to use thatsupplier or in any way to restrict the freedom of theschool or the pupils to obtain the most effective servicesat the best possible price.

In deciding whether a donation should be accepted, SMCs must balance theirdesire to improve school facilities against the danger of being obliged tothe donor or bringing their schools into disrepute*

/••**•


Appendix A (Cont'd)

8- In this connection, particular care needs to be taken withregard to relations between the school supervisor or principal, and thepublishers of textbooks, suppliers of textbooks and suppliers of uniformsor other items used by the pupils. In no circumstances may the supervisoror principal suggest to a publisher or bookseller that in return for adonation or discount, a particular textbook or series of textbooks will bechosen by the school in preference to others. (For guidelines preparedspecifically for the selection of textbooks and acceptance of publishers'donations by schools, please refer to Appendix B), Similarly, in nocircumstances may the supervisor or principal suggest to a supplier ofuniforms or other items used by the pupils that, in return for a donationor other favour, a particular supplier will be chosen by the school inpreference to others.

9. Another important point in connection with contacts betweenschools and textbook publishers concerns cash grants from a publisher forthe purchase of equipment or teaching aids, to be used with a particulartextbook or series of textbooks. Any such grant constitutes anadvantage. It may not be accepted without the special permission of theSMC.

10. The decision on whether or not donations to the school could beaccepted should normally be taken by the SMC and should not be delegatedto the school principal. If for any reason the SMC should feel itnecessary to delegate this authority, clear guidelines and criteria shouldbe established and the school principal should be required to report atregular intervals any donations accepted and the reasons for acceptingthem.

11. SMCs of schools subsidized under the Codes of Aid must alsoensure that, as laid down in the Codes, all donations to the school, ifaccepted, are expended for school or educational purposes only.

12* For schools subsidized under the Codes of Aid, prior approvalmust be sought from the Education Department before they can acceptdonations which would result in additional recurrent expenditure eitherfrom government or school funds. If no additional expenditure isinvolved, schools need not seek the Education Department's priorapproval. However, acceptance of donations should continue to be reportedquarterly to the Education Department and to be fully recorded in theschools1subscription/general funds account for audit purpose. At Annex 2to this Appendix is a standard form which schools should use to reportdonations to the Education Department. Nil returns are required*

/ * » « * *


Appendix A (Cont'd)4

Gifts Unconnected with School Affairs

13. Nothing in the Prevention of Bribery Ordinance prohibits theexchange of gifts between private individuals so long as it is not inconnection vith the affairs of the schools.

Conflict of Interests

14. SMCs should require their members and school staff to report anysituations where they or their immediate family have an interest,financial or otherwise, in any matter under consideration by the school orin any company or organization which has or likely to have businessdealings with the school.

15* On receipt of any disclosure of interests, the SMC shouldconsider whether or not the member or school staff concerned should bedirected to withdraw from participating in the further consideration ofthe matter in respect of which the conflict arises*

Corruption Prevention Department

16* If further guidance is needed, schools may contact theCorruption Prevention Department of ICAC on telephone No. 522 1520 or theDistrict Education Officer, who may refer the school's query to theCorruption Prevention Department of ICAC,


Annex 1

Sample of an Internal School Circular

School Policy on Acceptance of Advantage and Related Hatters

This circular explains the School's policy on the acceptance ofadvantages by staff members in connection with any business of the school.

The Prevention of Bribery Ordinance

2. Under Section 9 of the Prevention of Bribery Ordinance, it is anoffence for an employee of the school to solicit or accept an advantage inconnection with his work without the permission of the ManagementCommittee of the School, "Advantage" has a vide definition under theOrdinance, and it includes money or gifts; a full definition is at theAttachment.

3* This school requires staff to exercise utmost care in acceptingor soliciting advantages from any person having dealings with the School,and strictly prohibits staff from accepting or soliciting any advantagesgiven with a corrupt motive or with a view to influencing any decisionconcerning the school. The following paragraphs set out the School'spolicy and requirements in these matters.

Accepting Advantages

4. Permission is hereby given for employees to accept, but notsolicit, the following advantages in connection with their work :-

(a) small gifts from pupils or parents, provided that the valueof the gift does not exceed ($100;)

(b) gifts from pupils to teachers at graduation ceremoniesprovided that the aggregate value of the gifts does notexceed ($500) on each occasion;

(c) gifts from parents, colleagues, pupils or former pupils^ofone school on the occasion of retirement or resignationprovided that the value of the gift from any one persondoes not exceed ($1,000;)

(d) gratuities to non-teaching staff for extra work inconnection with extra curricular activities and other useof school premises or facilities, to a maximum value of($500) per staff member on any one occasion; and

(e) discounts on books, stationery and office and educationalequipment offered by school suppliers, provided that thediscount does not exceed (30%) and is generally availableto all members of staff.

Note : Figures in brackets are considered realistic and are recommendedfor adoption by schools.


Annex 1 (Cont'd)

5. If an employee wishes to accept any advantage not listed above,he must, before or as soon as possible after acceptance, seek the writtenpermission of the Supervisor/Principal of the School. Permission for theSupervisor, Principal or any School Manager to accept an advantage,irrespective of the value, must be given by the Management Committee ofthe School. There is however no -restriction on the acceptance ofadvantages in the employees' private capacity, unconnected with theirschool duties, i.e. from a person who has no connection with the school.In case of doubt the wisest course of action is to seek the advice of theschool principal.

6. Advantages offered in connection with the following activitiesroust not be accepted as the Management Committee is unlikely to givepermission :-

(a) the appointment or promotion of school staff;

(b) the admission or promotion of pupils (other thanregistration fees approved by the Education Department) ;

(c) the conduct of any test or examination (except for approvedofficial payments);

(d) nominations for courses of training or study-tripsinvolving either teachers or pupils;

(e) donations to an individual rather than to the school;

(f) rebates, commissions or gifts by a supplier or contractorto an individual rather than to the school;

(g) payments for the use of school premises or facilities to anindividual rather than to the school;

(h) holidays for school staff sponsored by vendors andsuppliers to the school, including textbook publishers orbooksellers*

Entertainment

?• Entertainment is not an advantage under the Prevention ofBribery Ordinance. However, employees are asked to avoid excessivelylavish or frequent entertainment which could bring disrepute to the schoolor lead to embarrassment or a sense of obligation, in the discharge oftheir duties*

Conflict of Interests

8* Any employee of the School who or whose immediate family has aninterest, financial or otherwise, in any matter under consideration by theschool, or in any company or organization which has or likely to havebusiness dealings with the School, must declare details of his interest tothe School.

Annex 1


Annex 1 (Cont'd)- 3 -

Donations to Schools

9. Any donation to the School, in cash or in kind, may only beaccepted with the approval of the Management Committee and in compliancewith th provisions of the Codes of Aid (in the case of aided schools).

Outside Employment

10. Employees who wish to take on paid outside vork including thoseon a part-time basis, must have the written approval of theSupervisor/Principal. Approval will not be given if the outsideemployment may give rise to a conflict of interests.

Contravention of School Rules

11. Any breach of the School's policy will result in internaldisciplinary action and may, in some circumstances, lead to prosecutionunder the Prevention of Bribery Ordinance.

Sections Annex (7) p. 10Attachment

"Advantage" means :-

(a) any gift, loan, fee, reward or commission consisting ofmoney or of any valuable security or of other property orinterest in property of any description;

(b) any office, employment or contract;

(c) any payment, release, discharge or liquidation of any loan,obligation or other liability, whether in whole or in part;

(d) any other service, or favour (other than entertainment),including protection from any penalty or disabilityincurred or apprehended or from any action or proceedingsof a disciplinary, civil or criminal nature, whether or notalready instituted;

(e) the exercise or forbearance from the exercise of any rightor any power or duty; and

(f) any offer, undertaking or promise, whether conditional orunconditional, of any advantage within the meaning of anyof the preceding paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e).


Appendix B

Guidelines concerning Textbook Selection Procedures andAcceptance of Publishers' Donations by Schools

Schools should set up subject textbook committees to selecttextbooks for use by pupils. Membership of a subject textbook selectioncommittee should include all teachers teaching the subject in the school.The committee should be chaired by the head of the subject panel in thecase of secondary schools or the senior teacher in charge of academicaffairs in the case of primary schools. It should be accountable to theschool principal.

2. In selecting textbooks, such committees should observe thegeneral principles laid down in the relevant General Schools CurriculumCircular issued to schools annually, and make recommendations as to themost suitable textbooks for use by pupils, having due regard for thespecific educational needs of the pupils who will use such books. Wheremore than one book is found suitable, the committee should list itsrecommendations in order of preference. Where there are valid reasons todeviate from the recommendations, these should be documented by the schoolprincipal as a safeguard against any allegations of unfairness orimpropriety which may subsequently arise.

3. In the event of a sponsoring body operating more than oneschool, it should not arrange for all the schools under its sponsorship touse the same set of textbooks. Individual schools should adopt the formalprocedures described in paragraph 1 above for selecting the textbookswhich best suit their pupils' interest, with the individual schoolmanagement committee assuming a monitoring role. A school could stillobtain 'volume discounts1 by arranging bulk purchases on behalf of thepupils.

4. Schools should not allow the choice of textbooks to be in anyway influenced by a donation; nor should they accept donations as a matterof course, thereby placing themselves in an obligatory position to thepublisher (s). In making a decision on whether or not a donation should beaccepted, the school management committee should observe the guidelines onthe acceptance of advantages laid down in Appendix A.

Section 8 Annex (8)

Ref: ED(GR) 5/896/74 XII EDUCATION DEPARTMENTHONG KONG

17 January 1990

AIDED SCHOOLS GENERAL CIRCULAR No. 2/90

Corruption Prevention in Aided Schools

The Corruption Prevention Department of the Independent Commission AgainstCorruption is charged with the statutory responsibility of examining the practices andprocedures of government departments and public bodies to identify potentialopportunities for corruption and recommend improved control measures. Governmentdepartments and public bodies have found these reports helpful and constructive. TheDepartment also has a statutory responsibility to advise and assist any person, on thelatter's request, on ways in which corrupt practices may be eliminated or reduced. Thisform of assistance is provided by the Advisory Services Group of the CorruptionPrevention Department on a free and confidential basis.

The Education Department considers that it is the responsibility of each aidedschool to ensure that corruption opportunities are eliminated or reduced. The experienceand expertise of the Corruption Prevention Department are available to all aided schools.Advice, which will be given freely and on a confidential basis, can cover areas such aspurchasing procedures for equipment, books and other items, tendering for maintenanceand other contracts, and policy on the acceptance of gifts and advantages, e.g. fromparents of students. Implementation of the recommendations put forward is a decisionof the school seeking the advice. Although the Education Department would appreciatethe opportunity of being informed of the corruption prevention advice which is given, itis entirely a matter for the school seeking the advice to decide whether or not it wishesto do so.

All requests for advice should be addressed to the :

Advisory Services GroupCorruption Prevention Department25th Floor, Fairmont House8 Cotton Tree DriveHong Kong

Tel: 5221520 (Direct Line)

Y.P. Chanfor Director of Education

To: Supervisors/Heads of all Aided Schools

E 371.20095125 S63SMI manual on school administration.[Hong Kong]: Education Department,1992.

EDUCATION LIBRARYUNIVERSITY OF HONG KONG

THE UNIVERSITY OF HONG KONG LIBRARIES

RESERVE MATERIALS TWO-DAY LOAN

This item must be returned on or before the date indicatedbelow. It may be renewed online one day before due date.Late returns and loss are subject to fines.

smi manual - university of hong kongebook.lib.hku.hk/hkg/b35827427v2.pdf · 2006-08-31 · smi...

Documents